Truckee High School Pool Renovation - TTUSD High School Pool Renovation ... 2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the ... 2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical

Architecture

Engineering Planning Interiors

Truckee High School Pool Renovation

Tahoe-Truckee Unified School District

Project Manual

Construction Documents

Volume 2 Architect’s Project No. 75-15110-01

Date: December 8, 2016

TRUCKEE HIGH SCHOOL POOL RENOVATIONS 75-15110-01

TAHOE TRUCKEE UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT

TRUCKEE, CA

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

ARCHITECT DLR Group

1050 20th Street, Suite 250

Sacramento, CA 95811

STRUCTURAL

ENGINEER

CYS Structural Engineers, Inc.

2495 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 650

Sacramento, CA 95833

MECHANICAL/

PLUMBING

ENGINEER

Capital Engineering Consultants, Inc.

11020 Sun Center Drive, Suite 100

Rancho Cordova, CA 95670

ELECTRICAL

ENGINEER

The Engineering Enterprise

1125 High Street

Auburn, CA 95603

AC_______ FLS _____ SS ____

DATE: ________________________

IDENTIFICATION STAMPDIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

02-115419

Jcc12/8/2016

GC GBC

RBH


TAHOE-TRUCKEE UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT

TRUCKEE, CA

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

SECTION 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 2 of 2

(Please note Division 00 – 14 in Volume 1 of 2)

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

Not Used

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

Section 22 0516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 0517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 0518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 0519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 0523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

Section 22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

Section 22 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

Section 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

Section 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping

Section 22 1119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties

Section 22 1123 Domestic Water Pumps

Section 22 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

Section 22 1319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

Section 22 3300 Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters

Section 22 4213.13 Commercial Water Closets

Section 22 4213.16 Commercial Urinals

Section 22 4216.13 Commercial Lavatories

Section 22 4216.16 Commercial Sinks

Section 22 4223 Commercial Showers

Section 22 4713 Drinking Fountains

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

Section 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

Section 23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

Section 23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

Section 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

Section 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 0713 Duct Insulation

Section 23 0716 HVAC Equipment Insulation

Section 23 0923 Building Automation System

Section 23 0923.14 Flow Instruments

Section 23 1123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping

Section 23 2923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 23 3113 Metal Ducts

Section 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories

Section 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators

Section 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles

Section 23 3723 HVAC Gravity Ventilators

Section 23 4100 Particulate Air Filtration

Section 23 5123 Gas Vents



TRUCKEE, CA

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

Section 23 7333.16 Indoor, Indirect, Gas-Fired Heating and Ventilating Units

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section 26 0010 Basic Electrical Requirements

Section 26 0090 Electrical Demolition Section 26 0519 Building Wire and Cable Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding Section 26 0529 Electrical Hangers and Supports Section 26 0531 Conduit Section 26 0533 Boxes Section 26 0553 Electrical Identification Section 26 0926 Low-Voltage Network Lighting Control Section 26 2719 Surface Raceways Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices Section 26 2816 Overcurrent Protective Devices Section 26 2819 Disconnect Switches Section 26 5100 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 0010 Basic Communications Requirements Section 27 0528 Communications Pathways Section 27 0529 Communications Hanger and Supports Section 27 0553 Communication Identifications Section 27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling Section 27 5123 School Communication System DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 6113 Fire Alarm System DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Not Used

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Not Used

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Not Used

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS – Volume 2 of 2



EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Rubber union connector packless expansion joints.

2. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints.

3. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.

4. Rubber packless expansion joints.

5. Alignment guides and anchors.

6. Pipe loops and swing connections.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide, including analysis

data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping

systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing

connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions

and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building

structure.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating,

end connections, and location for each expansion joint.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.




12/8/16

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working

pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between

anchors.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to the following:

a. General Rubber Corporation.

b. Mason Industries, Inc.

c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables.

3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F, unless otherwise indicated.

4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.

B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:




a. Basis of Design: Metraflex Company (The).

1) Domestic Water: Metraloop series, lead-free NSF certified.




12/8/16


c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two

flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center

section of flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.

4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings

with solder-joint end connections.

a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F

and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

C. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:




a. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.


c. Metraflex Company (The).

d. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint

Manufacturers Association, Inc."

3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.

4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Configuration: Single joint, Single joint with base, and double joint with base

class(es), unless otherwise indicated.

6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- or multi- ply phosphor-bronze

bellows, copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds.

a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.

D. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:




a. General Rubber Corporation.




2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic

Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-PSJ-703.

4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods.




12/8/16

5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods.

6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.

7. Material for Water: Butyl rubber or Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic

rubber.

8. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:




a. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.




2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section

outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider

for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.

3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities

appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

B. Install flexible-hose packless expansion joints according to manufacturer’s instructions.

Support return bend according to manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion

Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."




12/8/16

D. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-PSJ-703.

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb

tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including

tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,

including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,

including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides

nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9

and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-

69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.




12/8/16

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. This Project will be commissioned by a third-party Commissioning Agent. In addition to the

requirements of this Section, comply with the requirements of Section 019113, “General

Commissioning Requirements.”

END OF SECTION 220516



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded

steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc

coated, with plain ends.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular

space between piping and sleeve.




12/8/16

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, or Stainless

steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, and walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal

system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants

specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestopping specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."




12/8/16

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.

3.3 COMMISSIONING




3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal

system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal

system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.




ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew

fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with

concealed hinge and setscrew.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.




12/8/16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping

and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brasstype

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass

type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-

plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of maintenance-room, warehouse, and parking floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.




12/8/16

3.3 COMMISSIONING







METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: Metering devices and components.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, or equal:

a. Flo Fab inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.




12/8/16

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

e. Trerice, H. O. Co.

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

g. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

h. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass.

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

5. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

6. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

7. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

8. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

10. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping

tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.




12/8/16

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 COMMISSIONING




3.5 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.6 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.




GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

12/8/16

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.

3. Bronze swing check valves.

4. Bronze gate valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

B. Pipe, pipe or plumbing fittings, fixtures, solder and flux installed in a system providing water

for human consumption shall comply with lead free requirements of California Health and

Safety Code Section 116875. Provide submittal information for products third-party certified

by an approved laboratory as complying with California Health and Safety Code Section

116875.

1. Third-party certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G, or NSF 61 and

NSF 372.




12/8/16


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.

2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.

4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. California Health and Safety Code Compliance: HSC 116875 for valves for potable water

service. Valves for potable water service shall be third-party certified by an approved

laboratory as complying with California Health and Safety Code Section 11 68 75.

1. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water

service.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.




12/8/16

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Butterfly Valves:

a. Handlever: For valves NPS 6 and smaller.

F. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

G. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

I. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with

copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze or Brass Trim:


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE.




12/8/16

g. Stem: Bronze or brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Aluminum-Bronze Disc:



the following:


b. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig, or 250 psig.

c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM or NBR.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:



the following:


b. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.


c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: PTFE.




12/8/16

2.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:



the following:


b. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.


c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.




12/8/16

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.

3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with nonmetallic disc.

C. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher

CWP ratings may be substituted.

D. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.5 COMMISSIONING




3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:




12/8/16

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe positioning systems.

7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for

trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe

guides and anchors.

3. Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using

performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated according to California Building Code and ASCE/SEI 7.




12/8/16

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include

Product Data for components:




C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to


B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.




12/8/16

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made

from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts,

saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:




a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting

multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel

orstainless steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc or hot-dipped galvanized.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

1. ERICO International Corporation.

2. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

3. Pipe Shields Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-

psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.




12/8/16

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of

pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless- steel

anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Stainless-

steel anchors shall be used outside building.

2.6 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural

carbon-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from

the building structure.




12/8/16

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.

Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-

fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size

or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for

individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads

being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and

waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,

nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install

additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before

concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at

top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not

exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.




12/8/16

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building

services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining

insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and

equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc

welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work;

and with the following:




12/8/16

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior

Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment

that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal

framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:




12/8/16

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated

or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension

of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2

to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow

off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

5. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension

of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

6. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated,


8. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

10. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For


11. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

13. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30,

from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

14. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and

contraction might occur.

15. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but

vertical adjustment is not necessary.

16. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24

if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

17. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2

to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required

in addition to expansion and contraction.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping





12/8/16

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of

beams, channels, or angles.

2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of

beams.

3. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

4. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.

5. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

6. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids

with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by

manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches.




12/8/16

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll

hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and

limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of

stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected

equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-

adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in

concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply

and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. This Project will be commissioned by a third-party Commissioning Agent. In addition to

the requirements of this Section, comply with the requirements of Section 019113,

“General Commissioning Requirements.”




VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

220548 - 1

12/8/16

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Open-spring isolators.

3. Housed-spring isolators.

4. Restrained-spring isolators.

5. Housed-restrained-spring isolators.

6. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

7. Resilient pipe guides.

8. Elastomeric hangers.

9. Spring hangers.

10. Restraint channel bracings.

11. Restraint cables.

12. Seismic-restraint accessories.

13. Mechanical anchor bolts.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for devices for HVAC

equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 2

12/8/16

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by OSHPD or an agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and

operation, due to seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, and due to seismic

restraints.

3. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and

values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate

association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By OSHPD or an agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and

the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and

equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and

restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 3

12/8/16


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that

is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the CBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD or preapproval by another agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings.

Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If

preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.

Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs

must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Refer to structural Drawings.

2. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by OSHPD or an

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they

are subjected.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:



the following:

a. California Dynamics Corporation.

b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

c. Mason Industries, Inc.

d. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 4

12/8/16

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

5. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed, and Waffle patterns.

6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.


2.3 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:



the following:





2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.4 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:



the following:






at rated load.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 5

12/8/16





6. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad

attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt, threaded mounting holes and

internal leveling device, and elastomeric pad.

2.5 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:



the following:





2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight

being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to

the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes and elastomeric pad.

c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.


at rated load.





2.6 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part

Telescoping Housing:




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 6

12/8/16



the following:






elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with

adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.



b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level

equipment.


at rated load.





2.7 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a

minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions.

2.8 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable

to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet

location requirements.

2.9 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 7

12/8/16



the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-

rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel

contact.

2.10 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:



the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.


at rated load.





7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 8

12/8/16

2.11 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Hilti, Inc.

3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;

rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.12 RESTRAINT CABLES



1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.


3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End

connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for

restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.13 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES






4. TOLCO.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted

connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers

to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid

equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 9

12/8/16

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and

size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.14 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS




2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within

specified loading limits.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 10

12/8/16

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. All seismic restraint devices shall be installed in accordance with their listings

B. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

D. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required

submittals for component.

E. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

K. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling

holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during

coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other

embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed

tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has

achieved full design strength.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 11

12/8/16

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-

duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural

element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate

with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one

supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in

Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. Comply with

requirements in Section 220516, “Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping” for

flexible-hose packless expansion joints for use at building seismic joints.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage

device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been

approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide

temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected

by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.




EQUIPMENT

220548 - 12

12/8/16

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

3.7 COMMISSIONING







IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Valve tags.

5. Acoustical ceiling labels.



B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:



the following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Marking Services, Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, or stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black.

4. Background Color: White.




12/8/16

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS



1. Brimar Industries, Inc.

2. Marking Services Inc.

3. Seton Identification Products.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Red

D. Background Color: White

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. Do not use pipe labels or plastic tapes for bare pipes conveying fluids at temperatures of 125

deg F (52 deg C) or higher.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering



2. Marking Services Inc.


C. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.




12/8/16

D. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to fit circumference of pipe and to

attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 VALVE TAGS




2. Marking Sevices Inc.


B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain.

2.5 WARNING TAGS






B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.




12/8/16

2.6 ACOUSTICAL CEILING LABELS

A. Provide 1/16 inch thick white nameplate with black letters to identify access to concealed valves

or equipment requiring service where located above acoustical ceiling tiles. The nameplate shall

be 3/4 inch high by 2-1/2 inches wide. Coordinate the information to be engraved on each plate

so that it exactly matches the valve tag or equipment nameplate. The minimum letter height

shall be 1/4 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.




12/8/16

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged

valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Natural.

b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White.

b. Hot Water: White.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

3.7 ACOUSTICAL CEILING LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplate on the ceiling support of the tile providing access.

B. Nameplates shall be installed using double-faced 2 mil permanent acrylic adhesive.




12/8/16

3.8 COMMISSIONING







PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping located outside building thermal envelope.

2. Domestic hot-water piping.

3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance

thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

3. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.

4. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

5. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

C. Product Data for California Green Building Standards Code Compliance: For adhesives and

sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed statement of VOC

content and chemical components.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates

of tests and test methods employed.




12/8/16

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

C. Comply with California Energy Code.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.




12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants and

coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca

formulations in amounts greater than 0.1 percent (by mass).

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

a. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

"Flexible Elastomeric Insulation" Paragraph below is unsuitable for temperatures lower than minus 70

deg F (minus 57 deg C) and higher than 220 deg F (104 deg C).

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers and products.

See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."



a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

b. Knauf Insulation.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

d. Owens Corning.

ASJ requires field-applied adhesive and staples. ASJ-SSL does not require field-applied adhesive and

staples, resulting in reduced installation labor.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

Phenolic insulation is available in Grades 1 and 2. Grade 1 has a lower thermal conductivity than Grade 2.

Grade 2 is not commercially available.



2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

Mineral-fiber insulating cement is suitable for temperatures from 100 to 1600 deg F (38 to 871 deg C).

Vermiculite insulating cement is suitable for temperatures from 100 to 1800 deg F (38 to 982 deg C).




12/8/16

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.





a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.






Mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement is suitable for temperatures from 100 to 1200 deg F (38 to 649

deg C) and for a smooth surface.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.






2.3 ADHESIVES

Military Specification in this article was the only standard available when this Section was written. MIL-

A-3316C was last updated in October 1987.

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

Product attributes in first paragraph below are based on Foster Brand products; there are variations among

manufacturers.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.





a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.

c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.




12/8/16

One or both subparagraphs below may be required to comply with Project requirements or authorities

having jurisdiction. Retain first subparagraph below if required for LEED-NC, LEED-CI, or LEED-

CS Credit IEQ 4.1.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Retain subparagraph below for LEED for Schools.

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.







One or both subparagraphs below may be required to comply with Project requirements or authorities

having jurisdiction. Retain first subparagraph below if required for LEED-NC, LEED-CI, or LEED-

CS Credit IEQ 4.1.



Retain subparagraph below for LEED for Schools.




D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.





a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.

d. Speedline Corporation.









12/8/16

2.4 MASTICS

The industry does not have a clear definition that categorizes mastics into vapor barriers, vapor retarders,

and breather mastics. Specification follows the nomenclature used by Foster. Products with a perm rating

of 0.1 and lower are considered vapor barriers. Products with a perm rating greater than 0.1 and less than

1.0 are considered vapor retarders. Products with a perm rating greater than 1.0 are called "breathable."

Consider ambient conditions and operating temperatures when selecting a mastic. Consider using water-

based mastics for environmental reasons.

LEED Credit IEQ 4.1 does not address requirements for mastics.

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

Retain subparagraph below if low-emitting materials are required. Consult mastic manufacturers to

determine VOC limits.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


Verify that products listed comply with water-vapor permeance. Require proof of performance and

certified test reports from vapor-barrier mastic manufacturer to support product literature claims.

Retain one of four mastic paragraphs below. Product attributes in first paragraph are based on Foster;

there are variations among manufacturers.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.





a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.


c. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.








d. Knauf Insulation.

e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

f. Vimasco Corporation.




12/8/16

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

LEED Credit IEQ 4.1 does not address requirements for lagging adhesives.

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).




b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.


3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

Sealants are categorized into "joint sealants" and "flashing sealants." Joint sealants are primarily used for

vapor sealing longitudinal seams and butt joints of insulation materials. Flashing sealants are primarily

used for sealing jacket and mastic materials.

A. Joint Sealants:









e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

2. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when





12/8/16

3. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Materials in first paragraph below are for sealing metal jacket seams and joints.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:






2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.

6. One or both subparagraphs below may be required to comply with Project requirements

or authorities having jurisdiction. Retain first subparagraph below if required for LEED-

NC, LEED-CI, or LEED-CS Credit IEQ 4.1.



8. Retain subparagraph below for LEED for Schools.




2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

Coordinate types of factory-applied jacket insulation materials selected and types of factory-applied

jackets indicated in insulation system schedules.

For insulation materials with factory-applied jackets for use on applications above 140 deg F (60 deg C),

specify sufficient insulation thickness to maintain outer surface temperature of insulation below 140 deg F

(60 deg C). 140 deg F (60 deg C) surface temperature is set by OSHA for personnel protection.

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

Both glass-fiber- and polyester-fabric-reinforcing meshes are acceptable.

Retain two paragraphs below to give Contractor option to use either glass-fiber or polyester fabric.

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.






12/8/16




B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.






b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..





a. Alpha Associates, Inc.

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.





a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.

c. Proto Corporation.

d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. PVC jackets are available in several colors. Colored jackets may be used to replace field

painting. UV rays fade colors in exterior applications. Some colors (black, gray, and




12/8/16

white) do not fade as quickly as other colors (red, orange, and green). Colored jackets

have different emissivity and are not recommended for outdoor use.

4. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect.

5. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

2.11 TAPES

Product performance is based on products manufactured by Venture Tape; there are slight variations

among manufacturers.

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.





a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.

b. Compac Corporation.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company.


e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.





a. Compac Corporation.

b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company.

c. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils.






12/8/16


2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:





a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

b. RPR Products, Inc.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. In paragraph below, stainless steel is the most common wire used and is best suited for all

applications.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel

See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain

subparagraph and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."



a. C & F Wire.

2.13 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,


Retain one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product

Requirements."



a. McGuire Manufacturing.

b. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

c. Truebro.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures,:


Retain one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product

Requirements."




12/8/16



a. Truebro.

b. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.




12/8/16

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.




12/8/16

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve

stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.




12/8/16

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match

size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.




12/8/16

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.




12/8/16

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded

fittings, three locations of welded fittings, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation

Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 COMMISSIONING




3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:




12/8/16

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing

Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Protective shielding guards.

3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 30 mils thick.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside

buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.



Safety Code Section 116875. Provide submittal information for products third-party certified


116875.


NSF 372.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. California Health and Safety Code Compliance: For products covered under the scope of HSC

116875 for potable water service. Products for potable water service shall be third-party

certified by an approved laboratory as complying with California Health and Safety Code

Section 11 68 75.




12/8/16

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61 Annex G and NSF

372. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:



the following:

a. Elkhart Products Corporation.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Viega LLC.




12/8/16

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal

in each end.

3. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-

rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

C. Color: Black or natural.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.



the following:

a. Dresser, Inc.

b. JCM Industries, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.




12/8/16

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



the following:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

c. Wilkins.

d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



the following:

a. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

b. Wilkins.

c. Zurn Industries, LLC.


3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:



the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.




12/8/16

E. Dielectric Nipples:



the following:

a. Grinnell Mechanical Products.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

G. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in

Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.




12/8/16

J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

Q. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for

thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.




12/8/16

E. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools

recommended by fitting manufacturer.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and

thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to

ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.




12/8/16

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges

instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:




12/8/16

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.




12/8/16

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 COMMISSIONING




3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.




12/8/16

3.12 COMMISSIONING




3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one

of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 1-1/4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-

sealed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-

sealed joints.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or

gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or

ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.




12/8/16

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 221119 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Balancing valves.

3. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

4. Hose bibbs.

5. Drain valves.

6. Water-hammer arresters.

7. Air vents.

8. Trap-seal primer valves.

9. Flexible connectors.


1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers in domestic

water piping.





Safety Code Section 11 68 75. Provide submittal information for products third-party certified


11 68 75.


NSF 372.

C. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




12/8/16


A. Field quality-control reports.





Section 11 68 75.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G, NSF 372 and

NSF 14.Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Ames Co.




3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Chrome plated.




12/8/16

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

b. Woodford Manufacturing Company.



3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Ames Co.




3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.4 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:



the following:

a. ITT Corporation.

b. NIBCO INC.


2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.

3. Body: bronze.

4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.

5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.




12/8/16

B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:



the following:

a. Leonard Valve Company.

b. Powers.

c. Symmons Industries, Inc.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:



the following:

a. Leonard Valve Company.

b. Powers.



2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

2.6 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Woodford

Manufacturing Model 24, or equal.




12/8/16

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

b. Body Material: Brass.

c. Seat: Replaceable washer.

d. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

e. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

f. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

g. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum

breaker complying with ASSE 1011.

h. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough brass, or chrome or nickel plated.

i. Finish for Service Areas: Rough brass.

j. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

k. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

l. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.

m. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

n. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

o. Include integral wall flange with each hose bibb.

2.7 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint.

6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.8 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:



the following:




12/8/16

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Metal bellows.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.9 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 3/8 or NPS 1/2 minimum inlet, as required.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Stainless steel.

2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:



the following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.




12/8/16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

B. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets

and with shutoff valve on outlet.

C. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

D. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Building Wire and Cable"

for electrical connections.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Calibrated balancing valves.

3. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.

4. Primary water tempering valves.

5. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.




12/8/16

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 22 11 23 - DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include materials of construction, rated capacities,

certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.





11 68 75.


NSF 372.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.




12/8/16


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. California Health and Safety Code Compliance: HSC 116875 for pumps for potable water

service. Pumps for potable water service shall be third-party certified by an approved

laboratory as complying with California Health and Safety Code Section 11 68 75.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WET-ROTOR PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.

2. WILO USA.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, wet-rotor pump.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Body: 100 percent lead-free bronze.

2. Impeller: Polypropylene.

3. Pump Shaft: Ceramic.

4. Bearings. Double-sintered carbon.

D. Motor: Single speed.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.




12/8/16

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 22 05 13 "Common Motor

Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Transformer: Provide if required.

6. Settings: Start pump at 115 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.

B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting.

3. Operation of Pump: On or off.

4. Transformer: Provide if required.

5. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for seven days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections

before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.




12/8/16

C. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

D. Install timers on wall in Custodial Room.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

D. Install shutoff valve and union on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and union on

discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with

requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing

Piping."

E. Connect thermostats, and timers to pumps that they control.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set thermostats, and timers, for automatic starting and stopping operation of

pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot

liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or

drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.




12/8/16

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

10. Adjust timer settings.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.7 COMMISSIONING







SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.

3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.






A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:




12/8/16

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's

written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,

fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe

sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:




a. ANACO-Husky.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe

stop.

C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:




a. ANACO-Husky.




12/8/16

b. Clamp-All Corp.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.

3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class. Include

square-cut-grooved or threaded ends matching joining method.

B. Galvanized-Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, threaded.

C. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or

ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching

joining method.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded

ends.

3. Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard

pattern.

D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-

free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is

indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,

solder-joint fittings.

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-

free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is

indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.




12/8/16

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences

in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and

compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified

piping system fitting.

3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-

resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and

tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with

separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections

compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:




1) A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

2) Central Plastics Company.

3) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

4) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:




12/8/16







b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:




1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.


3) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion

flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:




1) Elster Perfection Corporation.

2) Grinnell Mechanical Products.

3) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

4) Victaulic Company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66

2) Electroplated steel nipple.




12/8/16

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch or high-density, cross-

laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate

friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically

indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.




12/8/16

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint

devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be

used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use

long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back

or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used

on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size

of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of

piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions

for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in

piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 and smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4

and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Q. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to

building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout

fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main

piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22 13 19

"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements

for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."




12/8/16

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing

Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry

seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use

ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and

thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

Torque bolts in cross pattern.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and

tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.




12/8/16

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Section 22 05 23 "General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves:

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified

in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive

environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive

environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,

pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum

rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.




12/8/16

4. Spacing for hubless cast iron soil piping: Every other joint, unless over 4 feet

then support each joint.

5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:




4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with

cover flush with floor.




12/8/16

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 22 13 19

"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if

indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for

connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance

of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at

final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have

been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage

and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was

covered or concealed before it was tested.




12/8/16

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except

outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system

and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water.

Maintain pressure for four hours. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and

traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and

watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they

leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this

pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air

throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas

and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,

until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 COMMISSIONING




3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and

debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

3. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings;

and coupled joints shall be installed where piping will be located over critical

areas including food preparation, food storage, food serving, dining areas,

operating and delivery rooms, nurseries, and other sensitive areas.




12/8/16

4. In addition to materials listed above, vertical waste piping from lavatories, sinks,

and drinking fountains may be any of the following:

a. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.

b. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.

4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube,

Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.


D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the

following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings;

and coupled joints.





SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

C. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. Sanitary Drain: Floor Sink.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.






12/8/16


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary

piping specialty components.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Josam Company.

2) MIFAB, Inc.

3) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch, Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe

test tee, or Stainless-steel tee with side cleanout as required to match connected piping.




12/8/16

5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass or cast-iron plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Josam Company.

2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.

5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk or Spigot.

8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy or Stainless steel.

11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:



the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee

as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass or cast-iron plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.




12/8/16

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zurn Model

Z415 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Or equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Anchor Flange: Required.

7. Clamping Device: Required.

8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Backwater Valve: Not required.

10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer’s standard coating.

11. Strainer Types by Drain Location:

a. Basis of Design: Zurn Model Types:

1) General Service: Type S.

2) Composition Type Floors: Type SL.

3) Resinous or Epoxy Type Floors: Adjustable strainer.

4) Indirect Drain Locations: Type I.

12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Polished Nickel bronze.

14. Top Shape: Round or Square.

15. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.

16. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

17. Trap Material: Cast iron or Copper.

18. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:



the following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.





12/8/16

2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch- thick, lead

flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot

reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

a. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

D. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe

extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

E. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

F. Vent Caps:




12/8/16

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include

vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.

4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights

and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.

3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-

inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-

phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum

thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:




12/8/16

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

J. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.




12/8/16

L. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.




12/8/16


A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.7 COMMISSIONING







ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 2333300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, electric, domestic-water heater, from

manufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to


C. Source quality-control reports.


E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency,





12/8/16


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label

commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.7 COORDINATION


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

b. Compression Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants, and






12/8/16

2.2 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bradford White Corporation.

b. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

2. Standard: UL 1453.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping

connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.

c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type.

f. Temperature Control: Electronic.

g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving

capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than

domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing

element that extends into storage tank.

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.: Series ST.

b. Flexcon Industries: PH Series.

c. Watts: Series PLT.




12/8/16

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-

installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating

pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include

dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than

NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure

unless otherwise indicated.

F. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original

design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange

units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on

domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified

in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with

requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."




12/8/16

D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end

drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing

Piping."

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting

and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting

the Work.




12/8/16


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters. Provide minimum 2

hours onsite training.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 22421313 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Toilet seats.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for water closets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and


1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.




12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.


indicated on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.

b. Kohler Co.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

d. Or equal.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Color: White.

3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A 1045 or ASME A112.4.3.

4. Flushometer Valve: FV-1.

5. Toilet Seat: TS-1.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves FV-1:



a. Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Or equal.


3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.




12/8/16

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats TS-1:



a. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company.

b. Olsonite Seat Co.

c. Or equal.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

3. Material: Plastic.

4. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty).

5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

6. Hinge: Check.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

8. Seat Cover: Not required.

9. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water

closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto

waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.




12/8/16

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet.

4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.




12/8/16


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

3.6 COMMISSIONING




END OF SECTION 224213.13



COMMERCIAL URINALS 22421316 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 224213.16 – COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.



B. CHPS Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and



A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals: Wall hung, bottom outlet, washout.




12/8/16



a. Kohler Co.

b. Or equal.

2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Drain: Separate removable chrome-plated dome strainer with chrome-plated,

NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece.

d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer and NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece.

e. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; bottom.

f. Color: White.

3. Flushometer Valve: FV-1.

4. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

b. Trap:

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with

0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall

flange.

5. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, urinal carrier with hanger and bearing

plates. Include rectangular, steel uprights.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves FV-1:



a. Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Or equal.


3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Consumption: 0.125 gal. per flush.

10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4.




12/8/16

11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 3/4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.




12/8/16

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required

to match urinals.



and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 22421613 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 224216.13 – COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories.

2. Faucets.




and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.

C. Pipe, pipe or plumbing fittings, fixtures, solder and flux installed in a system providing water




11 68 75.


NSF 372.


1. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted

lavatories.




12/8/16


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.





Section 11 68 75.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with back.



a. Kohler Co.

b. Or equal.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.

b. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

c. Color: White.

d. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Faucet: F-1.

4. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier. Include steel

uprights.

2.2 SOLID-BRASS, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.




12/8/16

B. Lavatory Faucets F-1: Manual-type, single-control mixing, solid-brass valve.



a. Kohler Co.

b. Moen Incorporated.

c. Or equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

4. Body Type: Centerset.

5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

6. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

7. Maximum Flow: 0.20 gal. per metering cycle.

8. Mounting Type: Deck, exposed.

9. Spout: Rigid type.

10. Drain: Not part of faucet.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BrassCraft Mfg.

Model OCR19B16A C, or equal:

B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

C. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

D. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

E. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, multi-turn, compression valve with inlet connection

matching supply piping.

F. Operation: Loose key.

G. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2.

2. ASME A112.18.6, braided -steel, flexible hose riser.

H. Refer to article, Waste Fittings, for stop, riser, and supply insulation.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.




12/8/16

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Keeney

Manufacturing Co. Model P.O. Plug 5680PC, or equal:

C. Trap:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide McGuire

Manufacturing Co. Model PW2125, pre-wrapped p-trap insulation kit, or equal.

a. Kit to include pre-insulated trap and trap arm, and two stop, riser, and supply

insulation sets.

2. Size: NPS 1-1/4.

3. Trap Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-

inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

4. Trap Insulation: Molded closed-cell vinyl, anti-microbial treated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




12/8/16

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







COMMERCIAL SINKS 22421616 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 224216.16 – COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins.

2. Sink faucets.

3. Supply fittings.

4. Waste fittings.







116875.


NSF 372.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing

fixtures.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.







12/8/16

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: One of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: One of each type and size installed.





Section 116875.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.



a. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

b. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

c. Or equal.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.

b. Shape: Square.

c. Nominal Size: 24 by 24 inches.

d. Height: 12 inches.

e. Tiling Flange: On two sides..

f. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.

g. Color: Manufacturers’ standard color.

h. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

4. Faucet: SBF-1.

2.2 SERVICE BASIN FAUCETS


Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets SBF-1: Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets.




12/8/16

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Moen Incorporated.

2) Speakman Company.

3) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

4) Or equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

4. Body Type: Widespread, wall-mounted.

5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

6. Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Maximum Flow Rate: 4.0 gpm.

8. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.

9. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.

10. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace.

11. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.

12. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BrassCraft Mfg.

Model OCR19B16A C, or equal:

B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

C. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

D. Supply Fittings:

1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching

water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.

2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with

inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.

a. Operation: Loose key.

3. Risers:

a. Size: NPS 1/2.

b. Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided -stainless-steel flexible hose riser.

E. Refer to article, Waste Fittings, for stop, riser, and supply insulation.




12/8/16

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dearborn Brass

Model 510-1, or equal.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

C. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

D. Trap: Dearborn Brass Model 510-1, or equal.

1. Size: NPS 1-1/4.

2. Trap Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with

0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

3. Trap Insulation: Molded closed-cell vinyl, anti-microbial treated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, and floors for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.



E. Seal joints between sinks and floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements





12/8/16

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.



A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

224223 - 1

12-8-16

SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall-mounted showers.

2. Grout.




and profiles, and finishes for showers.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower faucets to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL MOUNTED SHOWERS

A. Wall-Mounted Showers:



COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

224223 - 2

12-8-16


indicated on Drawings or comparable product by the following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company.

2. Description: Stainless-steel, wall-mounted, surface-enclosure shower fixture.

3. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.

4. Metal Nominal Thickness: 0.063 inch.

5. Number of Shower Nozzles: One.

6. Control: Pressure-balance valve with individual hot- and cold-water mixing-valve

operation.

7. Flow-Control Fitting: 2.0 gpm for shower head.

8. EPA WaterSense: Required.

9. Mounting: Wall bracket.

10. Supplies: NPS 3/4 copper tubing with valves.

11. Faucet: Supplied with shower.

12. Accessories (when scheduled on Drawings):

a. L-shaped grab bar, 18 gage stainless steel tubing with 11 gage flanges.

b. Wall-mounted, ADA compliant, phenolic shower seat.

c. Severe Service.

2.2 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before shower installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where showers will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.



COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

224223 - 3

12-8-16

B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with shower. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 220523, “General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping.”

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

E. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.


escutcheons requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316

"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers,

fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

224223 - 4

12-8-16

3.6 COMMISSIONING







DRINKING FOUNTAINS 224713 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 224713 – DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountain.





11 68 75.


NSF 372.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.


A. California Health and Safety Code Compliance: HSC 116875 for drinking fountains. Drinking

fountains shall be third-party certified by an approved laboratory as complying with California

Health and Safety Code Section 11 68 75.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMBINATION DRINKING FOUNTAIN/BOTTLE-FILLING STATIONS

A. Combination Drinking Fountain/Bottle-Filling Stations: Surface Mounted, Bi-level cooler with

electronic sensor operated bottle-filling station, accessible, for outdoor installation.




12/8/16



a. Or equal.

2. Standards: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G.

3. Drinking Fountains:

a. Cabinet: Bi-level with two attached cabinets and with a bi-level skirt kit, all

stainless steel.

b. Bubbler: One, vandal-resistant, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each

cabinet deck.

c. Control: Push button, vandal-resistant.

d. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.

e. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve. Refer to Article, Supply Fittings, in this

Section.

f. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap. Refer to

Article, Waste Fittings, in this Section.

g. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I water-cooler carrier.

h. Provide unit with ABS accessory apron when required for ADA compliance.

4. Bottle-Filler:

a. Cabinet: Stainless steel.

b. Control: Electronic sensor.

c. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.

d. Support: Mounting frame or brackets for attaching to substrate.

e. Displays:

1) Bottles Saved Counter: Indicates number of 12 oz. bottles saved by using

bottle filler.

2.2 SUPPLY FITTINGS


Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping. BrassCraft Mfg. Model OCR14 C, or equal.

E. Operation: Wheel handle, removable.

F. Risers:




12/8/16

1. NPS 3/8

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe.

2.3 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap: Dearborn Brass Model 510-1, or equal.

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-

inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install recessed drinking fountains secured to wood blocking in wall construction.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be

easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with





12/8/16

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Install ball shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve requirements

specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixtures, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide evidence of equipment certification to California Energy Code Section 110.1 or 110.2,

if not providing Electrically Commutated motors for HVAC fans sized below 1 hp and above

1/12 hp.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.




12/8/16

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.




12/8/16

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Motors for HVAC exhaust, transfer, and supply fans larger than 1/12 hp and smaller than 1 hp

shall be the following:

1. Electrically Commutated motor (EC type): Motor shall be brushless DC type specifically

designed for applications with heavy duty ball bearings and electronic commutation. The

motor shall be speed controllable down to 20 percent of full speed and 85 percent

efficient at all speeds. These motors shall also have the means to adjust motor speed for

either balancing or remote control. Exceptions:

a. Motors in fan-coils and terminal units that operate only when providing heating to

the space served.

b. Motors installed in space conditioning equipment certified under 2013 California

Energy Code Section 110.1 or 110.2.

C. Contractor’s Option: Motors scheduled on Drawings as single-phase, and larger than 1/12 hp

and smaller than 1 hp, for applications other than HVAC fans, may be EC type.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

E. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

F. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

G. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.




12/8/16

2.6 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Square D, Allen Bradley, or equal, in NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise specified or

required. Minimum starter size shall be Size 1. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where exposed to

outdoors.

B. Provide magnetic motor starters where required for all equipment provided under the

Mechanical Work. Starters shall be non-combination type. Provide part winding or reduced

voltage start motors where shown or as hereinafter specified. Minimum size starter shall be

Size 1.

1. All starters shall have the following:

a. Cover mounted hand-off-automatic switch. Starters installed exposed in occupied

spaces shall have key operated HOA switch.

b. Ambient compensated thermal overload.

c. Fused control transformer (for 120 or 24 volt service).

d. Pilot lights, integral with the starters. Starters located outdoors shall be in NEMA

IIIR enclosures.

2. Where three phase motors are provided for two-speed operation, provide two speed

motor starters.

3. Starters for single-phase motors shall have thermal overloads. NEMA I enclosure for

starters located indoors, NEMA IIIR enclosure for starters located outdoors.

4. Provide OSHA label indicating the device starts automatically.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING







HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.



4. Fastener systems.



1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for

trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for vibration

isolation devices.

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using


B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated according to California Building Code and ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.




12/8/16



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include

Product Data for components:




C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.




12/8/16

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made

from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts,

saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:




a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting

multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or

stainless steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc or hot-dipped galvanized.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless- steel

anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Stainless-

steel anchors shall be used outside building


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural

carbon-steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.




12/8/16

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from

the building structure.

B. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,

nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install

additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before

concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at

top of inserts.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.




12/8/16

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc

welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work;

and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior

Painting"

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment

that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal framing systems and attachments for

general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.




12/8/16

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated

or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension

of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2

to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow

off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

5. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension

of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

6. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,


7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated,


8. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For


10. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For


11. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

13. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30,

from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

14. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but

vertical adjustment is not necessary.

15. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24

if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

16. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2

to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required

in addition to expansion and contraction.

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping





12/8/16

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of

beams, channels, or angles.

2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of

beams.

3. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

4. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.

5. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

6. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.

7. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

8. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

9. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

10. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

11. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

12. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll

hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.




12/8/16

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit


system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and

limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of

stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected

equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-

adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in

concrete construction.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Open-spring isolators.

4. Housed-spring isolators.

5. Restrained-spring isolators.

6. Housed-restrained-spring isolators.

7. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

8. Resilient pipe guides.

9. Elastomeric hangers.

10. Spring hangers.

11. Restraint channel bracings.

12. Restraint cables.

13. Seismic-restraint accessories.

14. Mechanical anchor bolts.


1. Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing" for devices for plumbing

equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.




12/8/16

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by OSHPD or an agency


b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable

motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators, seismic restraints,

and vibration isolation bases complying with performance requirements, design criteria,

and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for

their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight,

operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators and

seismic and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment

mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment

mounted outdoors.

3. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind

restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and

values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate

association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By OSHPD or an agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and

the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and

seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the

vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.




12/8/16

B. Welding Certificates.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that

is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the CBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, or preapproval by another agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings.

Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If

preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.

Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs

must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Refer to structural Drawings.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Refer to structural Drawings

2. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by OSHPD or an

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they

are subjected.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:




12/8/16



the following:





2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.


6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed, and Waffle patterns.

2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



the following:





2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and

opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment

hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.

b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.4 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:



the following:




12/8/16






at rated load.





6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.5 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:



the following:






at rated load.






elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.



b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt, threaded mounting holes and

internal leveling device, and elastomeric pad.

2.6 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:




12/8/16



the following:





2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight

being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to

the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes and elastomeric pad.

c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.


at rated load.





2.7 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part

Telescoping Housing:



the following:






elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with

adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.



b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level

equipment.




12/8/16


at rated load.





2.8 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a

minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions.

2.9 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable

to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet

location requirements.

2.10 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:



the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-

rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel

contact.




12/8/16

2.11 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:



the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.


at rated load.





7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

2.12 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS




2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;

rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.




12/8/16

2.13 RESTRAINT CABLES





3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End

connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for

restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.14 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES






4. TOLCO.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted


C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers

to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and

size of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.15 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS




2. Hilti, Inc.






12/8/16

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations



3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within

specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. All seismic restraint devices shall be installed in accordance with their listings.

B. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

D. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate

snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.




12/8/16

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for

component.

E. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c.


F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by OSHPD or an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

K. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.


5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate

with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one

supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in

Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections. Comply with requirements




12/8/16

in Section 220516, “Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping” for flexible-hose

packless expansion joints for use at building seismic joints.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least

seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary

load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by

Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

3.7 COMMISSIONING







IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Acoustical ceiling labels.



B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:




12/8/16



the following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Marking Services, Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, or stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black.

4. Background Color: White.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS








C. Letter Color Red.

D. Background Color White.





12/8/16


by 3/4 inch.




lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS






B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to fit circumference of pipe and to

attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 DUCT LABELS







12/8/16





C. Letter Color: Black

D. Background Color: White.



by 3/4 inch.




lettering.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.5 VALVE TAGS






B. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain.




12/8/16

2.6 WARNING TAGS






B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL CEILING LABELS

A. Provide 1/16 inch thick white nameplate with black letters to identify access to concealed valves

or equipment requiring service where located above acoustical ceiling tiles. The nameplate shall

be 3/4 inch high by 2-1/2 inches wide. Coordinate the information to be engraved on each plate

so that it exactly matches the valve tag or equipment nameplate. The minimum letter height

shall be 1/4 inch. Install nameplate on the ceiling support of the tile providing access.

Nameplates shall be installed using double-faced 2 mil permanent acrylic adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.




12/8/16

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-orange background White letters on a safety-

purple background Black letters on a safety-white background White letters on a safety-

gray background White letters on a safety-black background.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow For hot-air supply ducts.




12/8/16

3. Green For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable

ceiling system.

3.6 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.

b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.

c. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a

safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white

letters on a safety-black background

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

3.8 COMMISSIONING







TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Domestic Water Piping Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)

1. National Standards for Total System Balance, latest edition.

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

1. Procedural Standards for Testing and Balancing of Environmental Systems, latest edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. The intent of this Section is to use the standards pertaining to the TAB specialist engaged to

perform the Work of this Contract, with additional requirements specified in this Section.

Contract requirements take precedence over corresponding AABC or NEBB standards

requirements. Differences in terminology between the Specifications and the specified TAB

organization standards do not relieve the TAB entity engaged to perform the Work of this

Contract of responsibility from completing the Work as described in the Specifications.

B. Similar Terms: The following table is provided for clarification only:

Similar Terms

Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term




12/8/16

TAB Specialist TAB Agency NEBB Certified Firm

TAB Standard National Standards for Testing

and Balancing Heating, Ventilat-

ing, and Air Conditioning Sys-

tems

Procedural Standards for Testing, Ad-

justing, and Balancing of Environ-

mental Systems

TAB Field Su-

pervisor

Test and Balance Engineer Test and Balance Supervisor

C. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

D. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. TAB Organization: Body governing practices of TAB Specialists.

G. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.



A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Provide list of similar projects completed by proposed TAB field supervisor.

2. Provide copy of completed TAB report, approved by mechanical engineer of record for a

completed project with similar system types and of similar complexity.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

1. Submit examinations report with qualifications data.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Interim Reports. Submit interim reports as specified in Part 3. Include list of system conditions

requiring correction and problems not identified in Contract Documents examination report.

E. Certified TAB reports.




12/8/16

1. Provide three printed copies of final TAB report. Provide one electronic file copy in PDF

format.

F. Sample report forms.

G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.

a. Instruments to be used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within a

period of one year, or less if so recommended by instrument manufacturer. and be

checked for accuracy prior to start of work.


A. Independent TAB Specialist Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of TAB work for this Project.

If TAB specialist loses certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately

notify the Architect and submit another TAB specialist for approval. All work specified

in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the TAB specialist shall be

invalidated if the TAB specialist loses certification, and shall be performed by an

approved successor.

B. To secure approval for the proposed TAB specialist, submit information certifying that the TAB

specialist is either a first tier subcontractor engaged and paid by the Contractor, or is engaged

and paid directly by the Owner. TAB specialist shall not be affiliated with any other entity

participating in Work of this Contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction.

In addition, submit evidence of the following:

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Full-time employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC

or NEBB.

a. TAB field supervisor shall have minimum 10 years supervisory experience in TAB

work.

2. TAB Technician: Full-time employee of the TAB specialist and who is certified by

AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

a. TAB technician shall have minimum 4 years TAB field experience.

C. TAB Specialist engaged to perform TAB work in this Project shall be a business limited to and

specializing in TAB work, or in TAB work and Commissioning.




12/8/16

D. TAB specialist engaged to perform TAB work shall not also perform commissioning activities

on this Project.

E. Certified TAB field supervisor or certified TAB technician shall be present at the Project site at

all times when TAB work is performed.

1. TAB specialist shall maintain at the Project site a minimum ratio of one certified field

supervisor or technician for each non-certified employee at times when TAB work is

being performed.

F. Contractor shall notify Architect in writing within three days of receiving direction resulting in

reduction of test and balance scope or other deviations from Contract Documents. Deviations

from the TAB plan shall be approved in writing by the mechanical engineer of record for the

Project.

G. TAB Standard:

1. Perform TAB work in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the

TAB agencies’ qualifications are approved unless Specifications contain different or

more stringent requirements:

a. AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, or

b. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental

Systems.

2. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB standard are

mandatory. Use provisions of the TAB standard, including checklists and report forms,

to the extent to which they are applicable to this Project.

3. Testing, adjusting, balancing procedures, and reporting required for this Project, and not

covered by the TAB standard applicable to the TAB specialist engaged to perform the

Work of this Contract, shall be submitted for approval by the design engineer.

H. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

I. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB specialist's forms approved by Architect.

J. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.




12/8/16

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide workmanship and performance warranty applicable to TAB specialist engaged to

perform Work of this Contract:

1. AABC Performance Guarantee.

2. NEBB Quality Assurance Program.

B. Refer to Division 01 Specifications for additional requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

C. Coordinate TAB work with work of other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contract Documents Examination Report:

1. TAB specialist shall review Contract Documents, including plans and specifications.

Provide report listing conditions that would prevent the system(s) from operating in

accordance with the sequence of operations specified, or would prevent accurate testing

and balancing:

a. Identify each condition requiring correction using equipment designation shown on

Drawings. Provide room number, nearest building grid line intersection, or other

information necessary to identify location of condition requiring correction.

b. Proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.




12/8/16

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

K. Report conditions requiring correction discovered before and during performance of TAB

procedures.

L. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if

different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. TAB plan shall be

specific to Project and include the following:

1. General description of each air system and sequence(s) of operation.

2. Complete list of measurements to be performed.

3. Complete list of measurement procedures. Specify types of instruments to be utilized and

method of instrument application.

4. Qualifications of personnel assigned to Project.

5. Single-line CAD drawings reflecting all test locations (terminal units, grilles, diffusers,

traverse locations, etc.

6. Air terminal correction factors for the following:

a. Air terminal configuration.

b. Flow direction (supply or return/exhaust).

c. Effective area of each size and type of air terminal.

d. Air density.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.




12/8/16

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Test each system to verify building or space operating pressure, including all stages of

economizer cycle. Maximum building pressure shall not exceed 0.03 inches of pressure.

C. Except as specifically indicated in this Specification, Pitot tube traverses shall be made of each

duct to measure airflow. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall

conform to ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, and ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC

Systems and Equipment.

1. Use state-of-the-art instrumentation approved by TAB specialists governing agency..

2. Where ducts’ design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 fpm/CFM, air

quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals served.

D. Test holes shall be placed in straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbow, bends,

take-offs, and other turbulence-generating devices.

E. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.




12/8/16

F. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

G. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

H. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

I. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

J. Check for airflow blockages.

K. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

L. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

M. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

N. Provide for adjustments or modifications to fan and motor sheaves, belts, damper linkages, and

other components as required to achieve specified air balance at no additional cost to Owner.

O. Automatically operated dampers shall be adjusted to operate as indicated in Contract

Documents. Controls shall be checked for proper calibration.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow. Alternative methods shall be examined for determining total CFM, i.e.,

Pitot-tube traversing of branch ducts, coil or filter velocity profiles, prior to

utilizing airflow values at terminal outlets and inlets.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.




12/8/16

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments

to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Check operation of relief air dampers. Measure total relief air quantity at each stage of normal,

economizer, power exhaust, or power exhaust economizer operation, as applicable to installed

equipment. Adjust relief air dampers to provide 100 percent relief in economizer mode. Ensure

that relief dampers close completely upon unit shutdown.

C. Check operation of outside air dampers. Measure total outside air quantity at each stage of

normal, economizer, power exhaust, or power exhaust economizer operation, as applicable to

installed equipment. Adjust outside air dampers to provide 100 percent outside air in

economizer mode. Ensure that outside air dampers close completely upon unit shutdown.

D. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate

the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to

adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

E. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading digital backflow compensating hood.

Use outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors only when direct-

reading hood cannot be used due to physical obstruction or other limiting factors. Final

report shall indicate where values listed have not been obtained by direct measurement.




12/8/16

F. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and

the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents, if included.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. Terminal air

velocity at five feet above finished floor shall not exceed 50 feet per minute in occupied

air conditioned spaces.

G. Do not overpressurize ducts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter manufacturer’s name, model number, size, type, and thermal-protection-element

rating.

a. Starter strip heater size, type, and rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,

serial number, and nameplate data.




12/8/16

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the condition of filters.

4. Check the condition of coils.

5. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report conditions requiring correction.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Conditions requiring correction noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and

determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment

manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5

percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or

decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.9 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Measure pressure drop across each backflow preventer assembly at design flows.

B. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement

pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.




12/8/16

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval

from Commissioning Authority and comply with requirements in Section 221123

"Domestic Water Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve

until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within range given in article, Tolerances.

C. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

D. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

E. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5

percent greater than indicated flow.

F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated

flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

H. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

I. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent and minus

0 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent.




12/8/16

3. Multiple outlets within single room: Plus 5 percent and minus 0 percent for total airflow

within room. Tolerance for individual outlets within a single room having multiple

outlets shall be as for “Air Outlets and Inlets”.

B. Set plumbing systems water flow rates within plus or minus 10 percent.

3.11 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and

balancing devices.

B. Interim Reports: Prepare periodic lists of conditions requiring correction and problems found in

systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building

floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing field supervisor. Report shall be co-signed by the

Contractor, attesting that he has reviewed the report, and the report has been found to be

complete and accurate.

2. The certification sheet shall be followed by sheet(s) listing items for which balancing

objectives could not be achieved. Provide explanation for failure to achieve balancing

objectives for each item listed.

3. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Project Performance Guaranty




12/8/16

6. Architect's name and address.

7. Engineer's name and address.

8. Contractor's name and address.

9. Report date.

10. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

11. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

12. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

13. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

d. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

4. Balancing stations.

5. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air distribution outlets and inlets shall be shown on keyed plans with designation for each outlet

and inlet matching designation used in Contract Documents and TAB test reports. Room

numbers shall be included in keyed plans and test reports. Where multiple outlets and inlets are

installed within a single room, a designation shall be assigned and listed for each outlet and inlet

in addition to room number.

F. Test Reports – General:

1. All test reports containing air or liquid flow data shall record flow values prior to system

adjustment in addition to required data listed for each test report.

G. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.




12/8/16

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

i. Return airflow in cfm.

j. Relief airflow in cfm.

k. Outdoor-air damper position, normal and economizer, power exhaust, or power

exhaust economizer modes, as applicable to installed equipment.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Relief-air damper position, normal and economizer, power exhaust, or power

exhaust economizer modes, as applicable to installed equipment.

H. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft.

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.




12/8/16


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

I. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup

equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.


f. Fuel type in input data.

g. Output capacity in Btu/h.

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.

m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.


a. Total air flow rate in cfm.

b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

d. Air temperature differential in deg F.

e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.

f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.

g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

j. Manifold pressure in psig.

k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.

l. Operating set point in Btu/h.

m. Motor voltage at each connection.

n. Motor amperage for each phase.

o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.

J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:




12/8/16

1. Fan Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.


f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:




12/8/16

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final air flow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and

include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.




12/8/16

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

N. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.13 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request

that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of Architect.

3. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be

rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour

business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than 10 percent, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.




12/8/16

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,

proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final

inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contact the TAB specialists’

governing organization for remedial action by the governing organization under the

workmanship and performance warranty. See article, Warranty.

3. If remedial action is not provided by the TAB specialists’ governing organization in a

timely manner, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete

the TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services

from the original TAB specialists’ final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

3.15 COMMISSIONING







DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, supply.

2. Indoor, return.

3. Indoor, outside air.


1. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-

vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Product Data for California Green Building Standards Code Compliance: For adhesives

and sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed

statement of VOC content and chemical components.

C. Product data for insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets,

adhesives, sealants, and coatings, indicating compliance with requirement that these

products contain less than 0.1 percent (by mass) polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca formulations.

D. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each

type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges

for each type of insulation.






12/8/16




jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of

insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements

indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by

testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,

mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed index of 50 or less.



A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION


Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application.

Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance

requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for

space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.




12/8/16

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," and "Indoor Duct and

Plenum Insulation Schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants

and coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or

deca formulations in amounts greater than 0.1 percent (by mass).

C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content

of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable


F. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the

manufacturing process.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-

applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-

Applied Jackets" Article.




a. CertainTeed Corporation.


c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.

e. Owens Corning.

H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum

applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket

requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.







12/8/16

a. CertainTeed Corporation.



d. Manson Insulation Inc.

e. Owens Corning.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for

bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.









2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less


3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A

for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.








VOC LEVEL IN SUBPARAGRAPH BELOW COMPLIES WITH CALGREEN AND LEED. USE

FOR ALL PROJECTS IN CALIFORNIA

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less









12/8/16

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply

with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.







2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-

mil dry film thickness.



5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient

services.










2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film

thickness.



5. Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.




12/8/16

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L

or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).





b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.


3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere

fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:











5. Color: Aluminum.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less



Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.

When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper

backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.




12/8/16


A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands

by 5 strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.





B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by

10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.





b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and

presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..




a. Alpha Associates, Inc.



B. Metal Jacket:





b. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

c. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.




12/8/16

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or Factory cut and

rolled to size.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.10 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.




a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.

b. Compac Corporation.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company.


e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.




7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:






2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;

0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020

inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted

to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.




12/8/16

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed

for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated.




1) AGM Industries, Inc.

2) Gemco.

3) Hardcast, Inc.

4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

5) Nelson Stud Welding.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank,

length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized

carbon-steel washer.





2) Gemco.

3) Hardcast, Inc.



3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.





2) Gemco.

3) Hardcast, Inc.



b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring

steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or

Monel.




12/8/16

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.




a. C & F Wire.

2.12 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according

to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that

will adversely affect insulation application.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even

surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.

Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in

either wet or dry state.






12/8/16

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation

on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment

to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier

mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal

insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended

by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and

wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along

both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to

receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at

4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and

joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its

nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and

cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

similar to butt joints.




12/8/16

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below

top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall

flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire

Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and

insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides

of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation

end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16

inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.

Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross

bracing.




12/8/16

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts

and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with

tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams

and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end

of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-

or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,

seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F

at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic

applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of

insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be

insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less

than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end

joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows

with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides

of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation

end joints, and 16 inches o.c.




12/8/16

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16

inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.

Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross

bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts

and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with

tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams

and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end

of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-

or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,

seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F

at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic

applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of

insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be

insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less

than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible

to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval

duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.


A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint

strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.




12/8/16

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with

stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied

jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the

"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.



3.8 COMMISSIONING




3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, supply, return, and outside air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with California

energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.



6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Supply-air, return-air, and outside-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket or Board: 2 inches thick. Minimum R-value = 4.2.




12/8/16


A. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

B. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch thick.




HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230716 - 1

10/8/16

SECTION 230716 – HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated:

1. Single-wall furnace vent and outdoor intake piping.


1. Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Product Data for California Green Building Standards Code Compliance: For adhesives and

sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed statement of VOC

content and chemical components.

C. Product data for insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives,

sealants, and coatings, indicating compliance with requirement that these products contain less

than 0.1 percent (by mass) polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca

formulations.

D. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections.



5. Detail field application for each equipment type.






10/8/16


jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates

of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.



A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION


Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.




10/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation

Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants and



C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable


F. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.



a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC).



d. Roxul Inc.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.



the following:


B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.



the following:


C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.




10/8/16



the following:


2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.




the following:










2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient

services.



the following:







10/8/16

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.



5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.



the following:







2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.



5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:










5. Color: Aluminum.









10/8/16


A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5

strands/sq. in. for covering equipment.



the following:




B. Metal Jacket:




b. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

c. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or Factory cut and rolled to size.

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:




10/8/16



the following:



2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.



the following:

a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a

corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.

Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods

for operating temperature range.




10/8/16

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.



F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

K. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

L. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.




10/8/16

M. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

N. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.


A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Do not field paint stainless-steel jackets.



B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by

removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.

Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the

"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate

to determine compliance.



3.7 COMMISSIONING







10/8/16

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating unit furnace vent and combustion air intake

insulation shall be the following:

1. High-Temperature, mineral-fiber blanket insulation.



field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Indoor, Indirect, Gas-Fired Heating and Ventilating Unit Furnace Flue:

1. Stainless steel.

3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE


field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. Install jacket with seam at bottom of flue

and seal watertight.

B. Indoor, Indirect, Gas-Fired Heating and Ventilating Unit Furnace Flue:

1. Stainless steel.




BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 230923 - 1 12/8/16

SECTION 230923 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the Building Automation

B. System (BAS) Contractor.

C. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated

work of other trades. Reference the Division 23 Sections for details.

D. The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules and

Drawings.

E. If the BAS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project

documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design

team.

DEFINITIONS

A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists

within a defined range of limiting values.

B. Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level

and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.

C. Building Automation System (BAS): The total integrated system of fully operational and

functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to

be provided by this Division BAS Contractor and to be interfaced to the associated work of

other related trades.

D. BAS Contractor: The Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be

the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the BAS

work.

E. Control Sequence: A BAS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical

computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control

objectives.

F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the

BAS software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled

variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with

target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing

considerations and the like.




G. BAS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BAS digital

processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and associated elements

individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated

sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.

H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BAS network.

I. BAS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all

BAS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and

ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BAS as required by this Division.

J. Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to

furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the

associated required services ready for operation.

K. Furnish: The term “Furnish” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean supply at

the BAS Contractor’s cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BAS

Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BAS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and

document.

L. Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the

BAS wiring and terminations.

M. Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at

the jobsite and mount.

N. Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a

defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BAS network

nodes.

O. Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of

programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital

process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BAS

industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BAS configurations.

P. The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as limiting

when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being

referenced.

Q. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic

interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are

to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents.

R. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division:

1. ADC - Analog to Digital Converter

2. AI - Analog Input

3. AN - Application Node

4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

5. AO - Analog Output




6. ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange

7. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers

8. AWG - American Wire Gauge

9. CPU - Central Processing Unit

10. CRT - Cathode Ray Tube

11. CZC - Commercial Zone Control

12. DAC - Digital to Analog Converter

13. DC - Digital Controller

14. DDC - Direct Digital Control

15. DI - Digital Input

16. DO - Digital Output

17. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

18. EMI - Electromagnetic Interference

19. FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System

20. GUI - Graphical User Interface

21. HOA - Hand-Off-Auto

22. ID - Identification

23. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

24. I/O - Input/Output

25. LAN - Local Area Network

26. LCD - Liquid Crystal Display

27. LED - Light Emitting Diode

28. MCC - Motor Control Center

29. NC - Normally Closed

30. NIC - Not In Contract

31. NO - Normally Open

32. OWS - Operator Workstation

33. OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature

34. PC - Personal Computer

35. RAM - Random Access Memory

36. RF - Radio Frequency

37. RFI - Radio Frequency Interference

38. RH - Relative Humidity

39. ROM - Read Only Memory

40. RTD - Resistance Temperature Device

41. SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw

42. SPST - Single Pole Single Throw

43. TBA - To Be Advised

44. TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

45. TTD - Thermistor Temperature Device

46. UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply

47. VAC - Volts, Alternating Current

48. VAV Variable Air Volume

49. VDC Volts, Direct Current

50. WAN Wide Area Network

51. XVGA - Extended Video Graphics Adapter




BAS DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be a complete system designed for scalable

implementation from small stand-alone use to large, networked systems. This functionality shall

extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the enterprise IT network shall be fully

IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the

facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that

the BAS will perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other

activities taking place on that LAN.

B. All points of user interface shall be on either local display, standard PCs with appropriate

software, a standard Web Browser or a combination of these methods.

C. Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, Servers shall be used for the

purpose of providing a location for extensive archiving of system configuration data, and

historical data such as trend data and operator transactions. All data will be stored in a database.

D. The work of the single BAS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all

Sections of this Division specification together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings

and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.

E. The BAS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software,

software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing,

installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing,

commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling,

administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and

patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned

in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and

commissioned BAS.

F. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer approved

employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment,

software, standards and configurations to be provided for this Project.

G. Manage and coordinate the BAS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project

schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or delay the

work of associated trades.

H. The BAS as provided shall incorporate, as required the following integrated features, functions

and services:

1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions.

2. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and

reporting functions.

3. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BAS functions.

4. Offsite monitoring and management access.

5. Energy management.

6. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems.




QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General

1. TTUSD has a (5) Year Master Agreement with EMCOR Services Nevada for ALL DDC

Controls Projects – Contact Scott Cooper 775-385-3773 (No Exceptions)

B. Workplace Safety and Hazardous Materials

1. Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. The BAS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety Certification

Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project.

3. The Contractor and its employees and sub-trades comply with federal, state and local

safety regulations.

4. The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety

programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the

training required by the OSHA having jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the

Safety Certification Manual.

5. Hazards created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any

further work proceeds.

6. Hazards observed but not created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be reported

to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. The Contractor shall

be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been eliminated.

7. The Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being

performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with the Project

safety requirements.

8. The Contractor’s safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the

handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in

compliance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction at the Project site.

9. The Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received training as

applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.

C. Quality Management Program

1. Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BAS Project Management.

The designated Project Manger shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and

related decisions on behalf of the BAS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager

shall:

a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and

other resources are available as needed.

b. Manage the financial aspects of the BAS contract.

c. Coordinate as necessary with other trades.

d. Be responsible for the work and actions of the BAS workforce on site.

REFERENCES

A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:




1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.

2. National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.

3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.

4. UL 916 Energy Management

B. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply.

C. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.

WORK BY OTHERS

A. The demarcation of work and responsibilities between the BAS Contractor and other related

trades shall be as outlined in the BAS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

BAS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX WORK FURNISH INSTALL Low Volt.

WIRING/TUBE

LINE

POWER

BAS low voltage and communication

wiring

BAS BAS BAS N/A

BAS conduits and raceway BAS BAS BAS N/A

Automatic dampers BAS 23 BAS N/A

BAS Current Switches. BAS BAS BAS N/A

BAS Control Relays BAS BAS BAS N/A

All BAS Nodes, equipment, housings,

enclosures and panels.

BAS BAS BAS 26

Smoke Detectors 26 26 26 26

Fire/Smoke Dampers 23 23 BAS 26

Fire Dampers 23

4

23 N/A N/A

VFDs Not Listed as by Unit Manufacture BAS 26 BAS 26

Fire Alarm shutdown relay interlock

wiring

26 26 26 26

Fire Alarm smoke control relay interlock

wiring

26 26 BAS 26

HV Unit controls BAS BAS BAS 26

Starters, HOA switches 26 26 N/A 26

Control damper actuators BAS BAS BAS 26

SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

1. The BAS contractor shall submit a list of all shop drawings with submittals dates within

30 days of contract award.

2. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall only

reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved

by the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance.




3. Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and Engineer in

the scheduling of the total BAS work.

4. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such

regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BAS Contractor where

filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the

Owner.

5. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall

include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item

description.

6. The BAS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review.

7. At a minimum, submit the following:

a. BAS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.

b. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.

c. Points schedule for each point in the BAS, including: Point Type, Object Name,

Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.

d. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus.

e. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities,

part numbers, descriptions, and optional features.

f. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper provided

under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: Code

Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size,

Mounting, and Actuator Type.

g. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under

this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number,

Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off

Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.

h. Details of all BAS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.

i. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and

description for all products including software.

RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the

Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and

Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media or DVD, and include the

following for the BAS provided:

a. Table of contents.

b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record

drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all

information supplied with the approved submittal.

c. Manufacturer’s product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including

software.

d. System Operator’s manuals.

e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.

f. BAS network diagrams.




g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.

2. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD or DVD shall be self-contained, and include

all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized

table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets.

Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.

B. On-Line documentation: After completion of all tests and adjustments the contractor shall

provide a copy of all as-built information and product data to be installed on a customer

designated computer workstation or server.

WARRANTY

A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:

1. Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BAS.

2. If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice

from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall

be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BAS Contractor at the cost of the

BAS Contractor.

3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that

replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall

be done during BAS Contractor’s normal business hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall use an open architecture and where applicable

support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BAS shall not be

limited to a single open communication protocol standard, but to also integrate third-party

devices and applications via additional protocol and through the latest software standards. The

system configuration shall be available for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf,

industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided networks.

B. The Building Automation System shall consist of the following:

1. Supervisory Controllers

2. Programmable Controllers (HVAC equipment, etc.)

3. Input, Output Modules

4. Distributed User Interfaces

5. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment

6. Other components required for a complete and working BAS

C. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and

functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while

re-using existing controls equipment.




D. The system architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm

generation and control execution. The failure of any single component or network connection

shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

E. Acceptable Systems

1. Tridium N4 with JCI Facility Explorer Field Controllers

2. No Exceptions

BAS ARCHITECTURE

A. Automation Network

1. The automation network shall be configured as a Client/Server network with a web server

operating on the Client’s LAN/WAN. The web browser interface is extended over the

LAN/WAN. Monitoring and control of the BAS is available using the web browser

interface.

2. The automation network shall include the option of a PC industry standard of Ethernet

TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products

available through normal PC vendor channels.

3. The BAS shall network multiple user interface clients, system controllers and systems

supervisors as required for systems operation.

4. The automation network option shall be capable of operating at a communication speed

of 100 Mbps.

5. Supervisory Controllers shall reside on the Automation Network

6. The automation network option will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks.

Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and

share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices.

B. Control Network

1. Supervisory Controllers shall provide management over the control network(s) and shall

support the following communications protocols:

a. BACnet® Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135- ) MS/TP and Ethernet/IP

2. The Supervisory Controller shall be BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) listed as B- BC

(BACnet Building Controller) and support the following data link options:

a. BACnet Internet Protocol (IP) (Annex J).

b. BACnet IP (Annex J) Foreign.

c. ISO 8802-3, Ehternet (Clause 7).

3. Control networks shall provide either “Peer-to-Peer,” Master-Slave, or Supervised Token

Passing communications, and shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 9600

baud.

4. Programmable Controllers shall reside on the control network.




5. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be provided for

each controller device (master or slave) that will communicate on the BACnet MS/TP

Bus.

6. The PICS shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

C. Integration

1. Hardwired

a. Freeze Stats and HVAC Duct Smoke Detectors Shall be Hardwired Shutdown

Sequence

2. BACnet Protocol Integration

a. The BACnet over Ethernet and BACnet MS/TP shall comply with the ASHRAE

BACnet standard 135-2004.

b. A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be

provided for all BACnet system devices.

c. The ability to command, share point object data, change of state (COS) data and

schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.

USER INTERFACE

A. Browser Based Operator Interface

1. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using standard

Web browser such as Internet ExplorerTM or Mozilla FirefoxTM. Systems requiring

additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client

machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.

2. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration

that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements

in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function

with the Building Automation System (BAS), shall not be acceptable.

3. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:

a. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user

attempts access, notice of access failure shall be displayed. Security using

authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be

implemented.

b. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a

Web page. Editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific

look or format.

c. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Supervisory Controller or the

server, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems

that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.

d. Real-time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without

requiring a manual “refresh” of the web page.

e. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access

privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:




1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules and setpoints in a

graphical manner.

2) Commands binary objects to start and stop.

3) View logs and charts.

4) View alarms.

f. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other

locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource

Locator (URL) for the desired link.

4. Alarms

a. Alarm feature shall allow user configuration of criteria to create, route, and manage

alarms and events. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be

routed to specific alarm recipients. The alarm management portion of the user

interface shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions:

1) Allow configuration to generate alarms on any numeric, binary, or data point

in the system.

2) Generate alarm records that contain a minimum of a timestamp, original

state, acknowledged state, alarm class and priority.

3) Allow the establishment of alarm classes that provide the routing of alarms

with similar characteristics to common recipients.

4) Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to manage alarms -

including sorting, acknowledging, and tagging alarms.

5. Reports and Summaries

a. Reports and Summaries shall be generated and directed to the user interface

displays, with subsequent assignment to printers, or disk. As a minimum, the

system shall provide the following reports:

1) All points in the BAS

2) All points in each BAS application

3) All points in a specific controller

4) All points in a user-defined group of points

5) All points currently in alarm

6) All BAS schedules

7) All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the like

b. Reports shall be exportable to .pdf, .txt, or .csv formats.

c. The system shall allow for the creation of custom reports and queries.

6. Schedules

a. A graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of building

operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be

provided:

1) Regular schedules




2) Repeating schedules

3) Exception Schedules

b. Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific

time use schedule.

c. It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule

including references to calendars.

d. Monthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of

holidays and special days. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the

pointing device or keyboard.

7. Password

a. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the system

manager to assign user interface control, display, and database manipulation

capabilities deemed appropriate for each user based on an assigned password.

b. Each user shall have the following: a user name, a password, and access levels.

c. The system shall provide the capability to require a password of minimum length

and require a combination of characters and numerical or special characters.

d. When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual characters

for display on the monitor.

e. The system shall provide unlimited flexibility with access rights. A minimum of

four levels of access shall be provided along with the ability to customize the

system to provide additional levels.

f. A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported.

g. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their

respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those

items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

h. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system

activity for each user.

i. All log data shall be available in .pdf, .txt, and .csv formats.

8. Dynamic Color Graphics

a. The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User

Interface.

b. The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime

function. The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics

documents (graphic definition files) to be generated and executed.

c. The graphics shall be able to display real-time data that is acquired, derived, or

entered.

d. Graphics runtime functions –Each graphic application shall be capable of the

following functions:

1) All graphics shall be fully scalable

2) The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio.

3) Multiple fonts shall be supported.

4) Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis.




e. Operation from graphics – It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and

states in systems controlled equipment within the Web browser interface.

f. Graphic editing tool – A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the

creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of

performing/defining all runtime binding.

9. Historical Data Collection

a. All numeric, binary or data points in the system database shall allow their values to

be logged over time (trend log). Each historical record shall include the point’s

name, a time stamp including time zone, and the point’s value.

b. The Supervisory Controller shall have the ability to store its historical data records

locally and periodically to a remote server on the network (archiving).

c. The configuration of the historical data collection shall allow for recording data

based on change of value or on a user-defined time interval.

d. The configuration of the historical data collection shall allow for the collection

process to stop or rollover when capacity has been reached.

e. A historical data viewing utility shall be provided with access to all history records.

This utility shall allow historical data to be viewed in a table or chart format.

f. The history data table view shall allow the user to hide/show columns and to filter

data based on time and date. The history data table shall allow exporting to .txt,

.csv, or .pdf file formats.

g. The historical data chart view shall allow different point histories to be displayed

simultaneously, and also provide panning and zooming capabilities.

10. Audit Log

a. For each log entry, provide the following data;

1) Time and date

2) User ID

3) Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands,

etc.

11. Database Backup and Storage

a. The user shall have the ability to backup the Supervisory Controller databases.

AUTOMATION NETWORK

A. Supervisory Controller

1. The Supervisory Controller shall be HTML5 and must provide the following hardware

features as a minimum:

a. Communications

1) 1. One 10/100 Mb Ethernet Port – RJ-45 connection

2) 2. One RS-232 port




3) 3. One RS-485 port (up to 57,600 baud)

4) 4. Optional internal auto-dial/auto-answer 56K modem.

a) Use for remote dial-in.

5) Expandable communications ports including LON, RS485, Modem,

Wireless Terminal Equipment Control

6) All required protocol drivers are included.

b. Battery Backup

1) Battery backup provided for all on board functions including I/O

2) Battery is monitored and trickle charged

3) Battery maintains processor operation through power failures for a pre-

determined interval, and then writes all data to flash memory, shuts the

processor down, and maintains the clock for three months.

c. Environment

1) \ Must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 ºC to 50 ºC (32

ºF to 122 ºF).

2) \ Must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 ºC and

60 ºC (32 ºF to 140 ºF).

3) Must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5% to 95% RH, non-

condensing

2. The Supervisory Controller shall be a fully user-programmable device capable of

providing all of the capability described in Section 2.3 Part A.

3. Automation network – The Supervisory Controller shall reside on the automation

network. Each Supervisory Controller shall support one or more sub-networks of

controllers.

4. The Supervisory Controller shall have the capability to provide secure communications

via SSL (Secure Socket Layer).

5. User Interface – Each Supervisory Controller shall have the ability to deliver a web based

user interface as previously described using HTML5. All computers connected physically

or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI.

6. Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The Supervisory Controller

shall continue to operate for a defined period after which there shall be an orderly

shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.

Flash memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data.

a. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system

shutdown conditions.

b. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the

controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention

through a normal soft-start sequence.

7. Certification – All controllers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).




DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

A. General Purpose Programmable Controllers (PCG)

1. The General Purpose Programmable Controller (PCG) shall be a fully user-

programmable, digital controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol.

a. The PCG shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-

135, Clause 9 on the controller network.

1) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for the PCG.

2) The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

2. The PCG shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary conflicts

between control functions at crossover points in their operational sequences. Suppliers

using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all

controlled functions in their submittals.

3. The PCG shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that

senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning

parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform

automatic tuning on command only shall not be acceptable

4. The PCG shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to

UL94-5VB.

5. The PCG shall include a removable base to allow pre-wiring without the controller.

6. The PCG shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following

conditions:

a. Power On

b. Power Off

c. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation

d. No Faults

e. Device Fault

f. Field Controller Bus - Normal Data Transmission

g. Field Controller Bus - No Data Transmission

h. Field Controller Bus - No Communication

i. Sensor-Actuator Bus - Normal Data Transmission

j. Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Data Transmission

k. Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Communication

7. The PCG shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points.

8. The PCG shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:

a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:

1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode

2) Analog Input, Current Mode

3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode

4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode




b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:

1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode

2) Pulse Counter Mode

c. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following

1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode

2) Analog Output, current Mode

d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following:

1) 24 VAC Triac

e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:

1) 1. Analog Output, Voltage Mode

2) 2. Binary Output Mode

9. The PCG shall have the ability to reside on a Field Controller Bus (FC Bus).

a. The FC Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting

BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

b. The FC Bus shall support communications between the PCGs and the Supervisory

Controller.

c. The FC Bus shall also support Expansion I/O (PCX) communications with the

PCG and with the Supervisory Controller.

d. The FC Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 15,000 Ft. between the PCG

and the furthest connected device.

10. The PCG shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and actuators

over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus).

a. The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting

BACnet Standard Protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

b. The SA Bus shall support up to 10 devices per trunk.

c. The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the PCG

and the furthest connected device.

11. The PCG shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct

wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the FC Bus or

the SA Bus.

12. The PCG shall support, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Chilled water/central plant automation applications including but not limited to:

1) The selection and sequencing of up to 8 chillers of different sizes.

2) The selection and sequencing of up to 8 (each) primary and secondary

chilled water pumps of varying pump capacities.

3) The selection and sequencing of up to 8 condenser water pumps.




4) The selection and sequencing of cooling towers and bypass valve, including

single speed, multi-speed, and Vernier control.

5) A proven and documented central cooling plant optimization program that

incorporates custom equipment efficiency profiles, without rewriting

software code, in order to meet the building load using the least amount of

energy as calculated.

6) The use of advanced control algorithms that apply equipment specific

parameters, including operational limits and efficiency profiles, in order to

determine equipment start and runtime preferences

7) The identification of the most efficient equipment combination and

automatic control of state and speed of all necessary equipment to balance

runtime, optimize timing and sequencing and ensure the efficiency and

stability of the central cooling plant

8) The control definition for the chiller plant in a single FX-PCG, as supported

by available memory and point Input/Output (I/O), or capable of being split

across multiple FX-PCGs

b. Heating central plant applications

c. Built-up air handling units for special applications

d. Terminal and packaged units

e. Special programs as required for systems control

13. The PCG shall support a Local Controller Display (DIS) either as an integral part of the

PCG or as a remote device communicating over the SA Bus.

a. The Display shall use a BACnet Standard SSPC-135, clause 9 Master-

Slave/Token-Passing protocol.

b. The Display shall allow the user to view monitored points without logging into the

system.

c. The Display shall allow the user to view and change setpoints, modes of operation,

and parameters.

d. The Display shall provide password protection with user adjustable password

timeout.

e. The Display shall be menu driven with separate paths for:

1) Input/Output

2) Parameter/Setpoint

3) Overrides

f. The Display shall use easy-to-read English text messages.

g. The Display shall allow the user to select the points to be shown and in what order.

h. The Display shall support a back lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable

contrast and brightens and automatic backlight brightening during user interaction.

i. The display shall be a minimum of 4 lines and a minimum of 20 characters per line

j. The Display shall have a keypad with no more than 6 keys.

k. The Display shall be panel mountable.

B. Programmable Controller Expansion I/O Modules (PCX)




1. The Programmable Controller Expansion I/O Module (PCX) provides additional inputs

and outputs for use in the PCG.

2. The PCX shall communicate with the PCG over the FC Bus or the SA Bus.

3. The PCX shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135,

Clause 9 on the controller network.

a. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for

the PCG.

b. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

4. The PCX shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to

UL94-5VB.

5. The PCX shall have a minimum of 4 points to a maximum of 17 points.

6. The PCX shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:

a. Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:

1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode

2) Analog Input, Current Mode

3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode

4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode

b. Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:

1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode

2) Pulse Counter Mode

c. Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following


2) Analog Output, current Mode

d. Binary Outputs - shall output the following:

1) 24 VAC Triac

e. Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:


2) Binary Output Mode

7. The PCX shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following

conditions:

a. Power On

b. Power Off

c. Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation

d. No Faults

e. Device Fault

f. Normal Data Transmission




g. No Data Transmission

h. No Communication

FIELD DEVICES

A. Network Sensors (NS-BTB-7003)

1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as

required by the systems sequence of operations:

a. Zone Temperature

b. Zone Humidity

c. Zone Setpoint

d. Zone CO2

e. Zone Occupancy

2. The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the Sensor-Actuator Bus

(SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

3. The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.

a. The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors (B-SS).

b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for

the NS.

c. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.

4. The Network Zone Temperature Sensors shall include the following items:

a. A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity and

Setpoint

b. An LED to indicate the status of the Override feature

c. A button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit and Celsius

d. A button to initiate a timed override command

e. Available in either surface mount or wall mount

f. Available with either screw terminals or phone jack

5. The Network Discharge Air Sensors shall include the following:

a. 4 inch or 8 inch duct insertion probe

b. 10 foot pigtail lead

c. Dip Switches for programmable address selection

d. Ability to provide an averaging temperature from multiple locations

e. Ability to provide a selectable temperature from multiple locations

6. The Network CO2 Zone Sensors shall include the following:

a. Available in either surface mount or wall mount

b. Available with screw terminals or phone jack




SYSTEM TOOLS

A. Supervisory Controller Toolset

1. Device embedded toolset shall provide the following capabilities in a graphical

environment using a standard Web browser:

a. Device and point management

b. Scheduling, alarming and trending setup

c. Creation and binding of graphics

d. Time management

e. User management

2. Toolset provides additional engineering capabilities including:

a. Editable table based point listings.

b. Automatically generated graphics for standard applications.

B. Programmable Controller Tool

1. The Programmable Controller Tool shall be capable of programming the Programmable

Controllers.

a. The Programmable Controller tool shall provide the capability to configure,

simulate, and commission all Programmable Controllers.

b. The Programmable Controller tool shall allow the application logic to be run

inSimulation Mode to verify its sequence of operation.

c. The Programmable Controller tool shall contain a library of standard applications

to be used for configuration.

C. Wireless Commissioning Converter

1. The converter shall provide a temporary wireless connection between the SA or FC Bus

and a wireless enabled portable PC.

2. The converter shall support downloading and troubleshooting Programmable Controllers

from the PC over the wireless connection.

3. The converter shall employ Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

4. The converter shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor-Actuator (SA)

or the Field Controller (FC) Bus.

5. The converter shall operate over a minimum of thirty (30) feet within a building.

6. The converter shall have LED indicators to provide information regarding the following

conditions:

a. Power - On/Off

b. Fault – Fault/No Fault

c. SA/FC Bus – Bus Activity/ No Bus Activity

d. Blue – Bluetooth Communication Established/ Bluetooth Communication Not

Established




INPUT DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS

A. General Requirements

1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input

devicesshall be provided to meet the system requirements.

B. Temperature Sensors

1. General Requirements:

a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary

and sequence of operations.

b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two- wire

1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.

c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their

associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and

A to D conversion:

Point Type Accuracy

Room Temp + +

Duct Temperature + +

All Others + +

2. Room Temperature Sensors

a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.

b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:

1) Setpoint adjustment providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range

2) Dial adjustment for setpoint value or warmer or cooler requests. The dial

shall also initiate temporary occupancy during unoccupied times.

3) A momentary override request push button for activation of after-hours

operation

4) Backlit LCD temperature display shall display temperature and setpoint with

units.

3. Outside Air Sensors

a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to

which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.

b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate

that surrounds the sensor element.

c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient

temperatures.

4. Duct Mount Sensors




a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct, and

be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly,

including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof

cover and gasket shall be used.

5. Averaging Sensors

a. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air temperature

stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used.

b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of

sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification

and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing

points per 12-foot long segment.

c. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing

string.

6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Setra.

C. Differential Pressure Transmitters

1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:

a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over- range

without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40%

over-range input.

b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA

output signal.

c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the

flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off valves in

the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and

Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection.

d. A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter.

Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

D. Smoke Detectors

1. Ionization type air duct detectors shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in Division 26

for installation under Division 23. All wiring for air duct detectors shall be provided

under Division 28, Fire Alarm System.

E. Status and Safety Switches

1. General Requirements

a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and

generate alarms at the BAS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety

switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to

shut down respective equipment.




2. Current Sensing Switches

a. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a

dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current

sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED

indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the

window of the device. It shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range.

b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other

miscellaneous motor loads.

c. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only

when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or

coupling shall indicate a negative run status.

d. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

OUTPUT DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS

A. Actuators

1. General Requirements

a. Damper actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the System

Description section.

2. Electronic Damper Actuators

a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.

b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the

sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized based on actuator

manufacturer’s recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and

damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall

permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers as required. All

actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return

unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have

external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction and a gear release to

allow manual positioning.

c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no

more than 15 VA and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4- 20

mA, and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC.

The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to

parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of

one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a

terminal strip in the control panel for troubleshooting purposes.

d. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply

and be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in

the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to

indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two-

position actuators, as specified in sequences of operations as “quick acting,” shall

move full stroke within 20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick

acting.




e. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Mamac.

B. Control Dampers

1. The BAS Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers. All automatic dampers shall be

sized for the application by the BAS Contractor or as specifically indicated on the

drawings.

2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for

normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so

that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure

drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.

3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type

arranged for normally open or normally closed operation as required.

4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum.

Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60”. Damper blades shall be 16-gauge

minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be 16-

gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be made

of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight

closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomer seals on the blade edges and flexible

stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48”x48” size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per

square foot when closed against 4” w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with

AMCA Std. 500.

5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall

be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure

exceeds 2.5” w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6” w.g. Acceptable manufacturers are

Johnson Controls D-7250 D-1250 or D-1300, Ruskin CD50, and Vent Products 5650.

6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face

velocities of 1500 FPM or below. Acceptable manufacturers are: Johnson Controls D-

1600, Ruskin CD36, and Vent Products 5800.

7. Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic

actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive at

least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist.

C. Control Relays

1. Control Pilot Relays

a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or

clips.

b. Mounting bases shall be snap-mount.

c. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided as appropriate for application.

d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120 VAC.

e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.

f. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Lectro

MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS

A. Local Control Panels




1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BAS manufacturer’s

standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an

assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully

enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.

2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as

specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so

forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function.

Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless

otherwise noted.

3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw

terminals.

4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring

shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.

6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused

on/off power switch, and required transformers.

B. Power Supplies

1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not

exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.

2. Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.

3. Output: 24 VDC.

4. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.

5. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.

6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.

7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the

power supply.

8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

BAS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Graphic Displays

1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as

indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be from a standard

design library.

2. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or

menu selection. .

B. Custom Reports:

1. Provide custom reports as required for this project:

C. Actuation / Control Type




1. Primary Equipment

a. Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein.

b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

2. Air Handling Equipment

a. All air handlers shall be controlled with a HVAC-DDC Controller

b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

3. Terminal Equipment:

a. Terminal Units (VAV, UV, etc.) shall have electric damper and valve actuation.

b. All Terminal Units shall be controlled with HVAC-DDC Controller)

INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. BAS Wiring

1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the

Building Automation System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BAS

Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26

Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of

Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this

section.

2. All BAS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BAS manufacturer

recommendations.

3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the

design responsibility of the BAS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the

incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BAS Contractor,

the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected

components.

4. Class 2 Wiring

a. All Class 2 (24 VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise

specified.

b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations.

c. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the

building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring

shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be

installed in accordance with local code requirements.

5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24 VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring

120 VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables,

panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and

conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

B. BAS Line Voltage Power Source




1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Automation System shall be taken from panel

boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26.

2. Circuits used for the BAS shall be dedicated to the BAS and shall not be used for any

other purposes.

3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.

C. BAS Raceway

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this

specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.

2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.

3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building

lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet

in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used

within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

D. Penetrations

1. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BAS conduits and raceways.

2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved fire resistive sealant.

3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed

raceway.

4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true,

and square.

E. BAS Identification Standards

1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the

enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

a. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and

troubleshooting.

F. BAS Panel Installation

1. The BAS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than

2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be

anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. The BAS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other

trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.

G. Input Devices

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

2. Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

H. HVAC Input Devices – Genera1




1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

2. Locate components of the BAS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

3. Outside Air Sensors

a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact

or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions

accurately.

b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover.

4. Duct Temperature Sensors:

a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and

be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly

including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature

stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.

d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element

holders.

5. Space Sensors:

a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.

b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the

plans.

6. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches:

a. Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.

I. HVAC Output Devices

1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendation. The

mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers,

airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.

2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum

system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the

entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot

positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel

blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

TRAINING SERVICES

A. The BAS contractor shall provide the following training services:

1. One day of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the

specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of




a review of the project as-built drawings, the BAS software layout and naming

conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.

COMMISSIONING







FLOW INSTRUMENTS 230923.14 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 230923.14 - FLOW INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Airflow measurement stations.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and

software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and

cable.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics; electrical characteristics; and furnished accessories indicating

process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control

signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical

power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including

temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product

specification sheets.

4. Installation instructions, including factors affecting performance.


1. Product data showing compliance with ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.





12/8/16

4. Include diagrams for air and process signal tubing.

5. Number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable, and tubing

ends.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for flow instruments, including the following.

a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Pressure drop at Project design and minimum flow conditions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For instruments to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Required Listings and Certifications:

1. The airflow measurement station shall be UL873 listed as an assembly.

a. Devices claiming compliance with the UL listing based on individual UL

component listing are not acceptable.

2. The airflow measurement station shall be BTL listed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Select and size products to achieve specified performance requirements.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.

2.2 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATIONS

A. Description: Duct mounted probe type airflow measurement stations with temperature and

airflow alarming capability for outside air intake applications. Airflow measurement devices




12/8/16

shall use the principle of thermal dispersion and provide one self-heated bead-in-glass

thermistor and one zero power bead-in-glass thermistor at each sensing node.

1. Thermal dispersion devices that indirectly heat a thermistor are not acceptable.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, or equal:

1. EBTRON, Inc., model GT(x)116-P+.

C. General:

1. Provide one airflow measurement station for each measurement location provided on the

plans, schedules and/or control diagrams to determine the average airflow rate and

temperature at each measurement location.

2. Each airflow measurement station shall be provided with a microprocessor-based

transmitter and one or more sensor probes.

3. Devices that have electronic signal processing components on or in the sensor probe are

not acceptable.

4. Airflow measurement shall be field configurable to determine the average actual or

standard mass airflow rate.

a. Actual airflow rate calculations shall have the capability of being adjusted

automatically by the transmitter for altitudes other than sea level.

5. Temperature measurement shall be field configurable to determine the velocity weighted

temperate or simple arithmetic average temperature.

D. Sensor Probes:

1. Sensor probes shall be constructed of gold anodized, 6063 aluminum alloy tube. Provide

316 stainless steel tube in lieu of 6063 aluminum alloy tube, for laboratory applications.

2. Sensor probe mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.

3. Probe internal wiring between the connecting cable and sensor nodes shall be Kynar

coated copper.

a. PVC jacketed internal wiring is not acceptable.

4. Probe internal wiring connections shall consist of solder joints and spot welds.

a. Connectors of any type within the probe are not acceptable.

b. Printed circuit boards within the probe are not acceptable.

5. Probe internal wiring connections shall be sealed and protected from the elements and

suitable for direct exposure to water.

6. Each sensor probe shall be provided with an integral, FEP jacket, plenum rated

CMP/CL2P, UL/cUL Listed cable rated for exposures from -67°F to 392 °F (-55° C to

200° C) and continuous and direct UV exposure.




12/8/16

a. Plenum rated PVC jacket cables are not acceptable.

7. Each sensor probe cable shall be provided with a connector plug with gold plated pins for

connection to the transmitter.

8. Each sensor probe shall contain one or more independently wired sensing nodes.

9. Sensor node airflow and temperature calibration data shall be stored in a serial memory

chip in the cable connecting plug and not require matching or adjustments to the

transmitter.

10. Each sensor node shall be provided with two bead-in-glass, hermetically sealed

thermistors potted in a marine grade waterproof epoxy.

a. Devices that use epoxy or glass encapsulated chip thermistors are not acceptable.

11. Each thermistor shall be individually calibrated at a minimum of 3 temperatures to NIST-

traceable temperature standards.

12. Each sensor node shall be individually calibrated to NIST-traceable airflow standards at a

minimum of 16 calibration points.

13. The number of independent sensor nodes provided shall be as follows:

Area ft2 [m2] # Sensor Nodes

≤ 0.5 [≤ 0.047] 1

> 0.5 & ≤ 1 [≤ 0.093] 2

> 1 & ≤ 2 [> 0.093 & ≤ 0.186] 4

> 2 & ≤ 4 [> 0.186 & ≤ 0.372] 6

> 4 & ≤ 8 [> 0.372 & ≤ 0.743] 8

> 8 & ≤ 12 [> 0.743 & ≤ 1.115] 12

> 12 & ≤ 14 [> 1.115 & ≤ 1.30] 14

> 14 [> 1.30] 16

a. A total of 4 probes shall be required for openings with an aspect ratio ≤ 1.5 and

with an area ≥ 25 ft2 (≥ 2.32 m2).

E. Transmitter:

1. A remotely located microprocessor-based transmitter shall be provided for each

measurement location.

2. The transmitter shall be comprised of a main circuit board and interchangeable interface

card.

3. All printed circuit board interconnects, edge fingers, and test points shall be gold plated.

4. All printed circuit boards shall be electroless nickel immersion gold (ENIG) plated.

5. All receptacle plug pins shall be gold plated.

6. The transmitter shall be capable of determining the average airflow rate and temperature

of the sensor nodes.




12/8/16

a. Separate integration buffers shall be provided for display airflow output, airflow

signal output (analog and network) and individual sensor output (IR-interface).

7. The transmitter shall be capable of providing a high and/or low airflow alarm.

8. The transmitter shall be capable of identifying an airflow measurement station

malfunction via the system status alarm and ignore any sensor node that is in a fault

condition.

9. The transmitter shall be provided with a 16-character, alpha-numeric, LCD display.

a. The airflow rate, temperature, airflow alarm and system status alarm shall be

visible on the display.

10. The transmitter shall be provided with two field selectable (0-5/0-10 VDC or 4-20mA),

scalable, isolated and over-current protected analog output signals and:

a. One isolated Ethernet (simultaneously supported BACnet Ethernet or BACnet IP,

Modbus TCP and TCP/IP) network connection.

11. Analog output signals shall provide the total airflow rate and be field configurable to

output one of the following:

a. Temperature.

b. Airflow alarm; or

c. System status alarm.

12. Network communications shall provide the average airflow rate, temperature, airflow

alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor node airflow rates and individual sensor

node temperatures.

13. The transmitter shall be powered by 24 VAC and use a switching power supply that is

over-current and over-voltage protected.

14. The transmitter shall use a “watchdog” timer circuit to ensure continuous operation in the

event of brown-out and/or power failure.

F. Performance:

1. Each sensing node shall have an airflow accuracy of ±2% of reading over an operating

range of 0 to 5,000 FPM (25.4 m/s).

a. Accuracy shall include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and

transmitter.

1) Devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy

specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter shall demonstrate

compliance with this requirement over the entire operating range.

b. Each sensing node shall have a temperature accuracy of ±0.15° F (0.1° C) over an

operating range of -20° F to 160° F. (-28.9° C to 71° C).




12/8/16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections


C. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of

connections before installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment

when subjected to forces indicated in structural contract documents.

D. Install ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before

proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that

could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent

condition.

E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262819 "Disconnect

Switches."

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Building Wire

and Cable."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 262719 "Surface

Raceways."




12/8/16

3.4 INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Mounting Location:

1. Rough-in: Outline instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and routing

cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location.

B. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-

pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets.

3.5 FLOW INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s placement guidelines.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and

tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at

points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Electrical Identification."

B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification and on face of ceiling

directly below instruments concealed above ceilings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign

materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

B. Wash and shine glazing.

C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine.

3.8 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Description:

1. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instruments for proper installation with respect to direction of flow, elevation,

orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact

performance.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material,

and support.

B. Flow Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that sensors are installed correctly with respect to flow direction.




12/8/16

2. Verify that sensor attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that processing tubing attachment is secure and isolation valves have been

provided.

4. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

5. Verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.

3.9 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Description:

1. The airflow measuring station shall not be adjusted to match field measurements without

approval from the consulting mechanical engineer when installations meet or exceed

manufacturer’s suggested placement guidelines. Field adjustment, when required shall be

accomplished using transmitter firmware that calculates adjustment gain and offset

coefficients based on one or two reference measurements.

2. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

3. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall

have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an

installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with

an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

4. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by

manufacturer.

5. If after-calibration-indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

6. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE

Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific

requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

B. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100

percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating

span using a precision-resistant source.

C. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.

D. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

E. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

F. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistance source.




12/8/16

3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

3.11 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain instrumentation and control devices.

3.12 COMMISSIONING







FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

12/8/16

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred

spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above

ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,

including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using







12/8/16

1. Piping specialties.

2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data

of selected models.

3. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and

elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for

multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the

same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion

joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply

with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is

shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items

involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated

with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to




C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.




12/8/16


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas

piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of

dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid

damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.

Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions

and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply

according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's

written permission.

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed

behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors

and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and

socket welding.




12/8/16

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground

joint, and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end

connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum

o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless

steel underground.

2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS BELOW GRADE

A. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion

type with dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with

ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M,

black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11

inlet.

b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,

black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating

covering. Vent casing aboveground.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.

d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.

e. Tracer wire connection.

f. Ultraviolet shield.

g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier

pipe.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.

3. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

4. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

5. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:




12/8/16

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-

1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials

appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.5 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various

services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with

ASME B16.33.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground

Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG"

permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.





b. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.




12/8/16

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.


9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.





b. Lee Brass Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Plug: Bronze.

4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.

5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.


A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured

for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4

mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased

in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is

buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.





12/8/16

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping

section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization

devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install

it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate

friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically

indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment

traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.




12/8/16

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for

roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including

service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not

install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or

capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3

inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of

drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below

grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

O. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas

piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel

pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment

conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators

may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,

clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts,

or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level

side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to

each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

HVAC Piping."




12/8/16

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


HVAC Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC

Piping."


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space

adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dryseal threading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes

and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at

field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.




12/8/16

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-

gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

F. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth

or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint

devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529

"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. .

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment

grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve

within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve

and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as

practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade,

except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.




12/8/16

3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and

exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with

materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.




1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 COMMISSIONING




3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line

risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:





12/8/16

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.15 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping

utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze plug valves, or PE valves conforming to CSA listing

requirements.

3.16 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

3. Bronze plug valve.




VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 232923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This specification covers complete a variable frequency drives (VFDs) designated on the

drawing schedules to be variable speed. All standard and optional features shall be included

within the VFD panel. The VFD shall be UL Type 1 for clean environments, or UL Type 12 for

dusty environments. The VFD shall have been evaluated by UL and found acceptable for

mounting in a plenum or other air handling compartment. Manufacturer shall supply a copy of

the UL plenum evaluation upon request.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated.

1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFDs.



B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated.

1. Include mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Required working clearances and required area above and around VFDs.

2. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent

structural and mechanical elements.

3. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.

4. Indicate field measurements.

B. Source quality-control reports.

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS – SECTION 23 29 23 Page 2

Tahoe Lake ES Modernization and Addition Project No. 15005 Architectural Nexus 11/16/2016


D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"


a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic

circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules.

d. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and

status and alarm points.

e. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been

installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor

nameplate, full-load currents.

f. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after

motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for

motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no

fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed.

5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.


A. The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied.

B. The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and labeled with this

rating.



C. To ensure adequate technical and factory support, VFDs manufactured by others and brand

labeled shall not be acceptable.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFDs that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. The complete VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months

from date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living

expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized on-site service. The

warranty shall be provided by the VFD manufacturer and not a third party. A written

warranty statement shall be provided with the submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Danfoss, Inc., VLC

HVAC Drive FC 102, or equal by the following:

1. ABB.

2. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VFDs:

A. VFDs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 DESCRIPTION

A. The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable

frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor current

shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain

desired motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate the need for

motor derating.

B. The VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated motor voltage, current, and

speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation

(with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data verifying that the motors will not

draw more than full load current during full load and full speed operation.

C. The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental

(displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.

D. The VFD shall have a dual 5 percent impedance DC link reactor on the positive and negative

rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD from power line

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457034147

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457034154



transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that do not provide full

harmonic filtering throughout the entire load range are not acceptable. VFDs with saturating

(non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3 percent AC line reactor to provide

acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic performance is most critical.

E. The VFD’s full load output current rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD

shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110 percent of rated current for

60 seconds and 120 percent of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while starting.

F. The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base speed

while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow driving direct

drive fans without high speed derating or low speed excessive magnetization, as would occur if

a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced speeds. Breakaway current of 160 percent

shall be available.

G. A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided standard in

the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motor’s speed and load

to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.

H. The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct drive fans.

I. Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks or damage

to the VFD.

J. An automatic motor adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and reactance to

optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the motor or de-couple the

motor from the load to perform the test.

K. Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFD’s power circuitry and control circuitry to

ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment from damage

caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop currents. VFDs not including either

galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O and discrete digital I/O shall include additional

isolation modules.

L. VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the used of an adjustable carrier

frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and VFD

operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not acceptable.

M. All VFDs shall contain integral EMI filters to attenuate radio frequency interference conducted

to the AC power line.

2.4 PROTECTIVE FEATURES

A. A minimum of Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor applications

shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate for changes in motor

speed.

B. Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit, output ground

fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over temperature. The VFD

shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.



C. Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage and

indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall be able to

be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while running at

reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded speed. This

function is independent of which input power phase is lost.

D. Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as

low as 90 percent of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output,

without faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70 percent of the nominal voltage.

E. Protect from over voltage. The VFD shall continue to operate without faulting with a

momentary input voltage as high as 130 percent of the nominal voltage.

F. The VFD shall incorporate a programmable motor preheat feature to keep the motor warm and

prevent condensation build up in the motor when it is stopped in a damp environment by

providing the motor stator with a controlled level of current.

G. VFD shall include a “signal loss detection” algorithm with adjustable time delay to sense the

loss of an analog input signal. It shall also include a programmable time delay to eliminate

nuisance signal loss indications. The functions after detection shall be programmable.

H. VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running. No

warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad.

I. VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed without VFD

fault or component damage.

J. Selectable over-voltage control shall be provided to protect the drive from power regenerated by

the motor while maintaining control of the driven load.

K. VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure motor

current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act as a motor

overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and identify which of the

output phases is low or lost.

L. If the temperature of the VFD’s heat sink rises to 80C, the VFD shall automatically reduce its

carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall also be possible to program the

VFD so that it reduces its output current limit value if the VFD’s temperature becomes too high.

M. In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program the VFD

to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during periods of excessive

load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without tripping.

N. The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized losses,

and increased fan life. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the fan(s) may be off even

when the VFD is running.

O. The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the date and

time of the alarm shall be recorded.



P. When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations, dry

pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be programmable to take

appropriate protective action when one of the above situations is detected.

2.5 INTERFACE FEATURES

A. Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided to start and stop the VFD and determine the source

of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password protect them

from undesired operation.

B. There shall be an “Info” key on the keypad. The Info key shall include “on-line” context

sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.

C. The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the VFD

is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System whether the VFD is

being controlled locally or by the Building Automation System.

D. Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely

mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against unauthorized

parameter changes.

E. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be identical and

interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.

F. To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFD’s

keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters to each

VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be possible to download from the

keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall provide visual indication of copy status.

G. Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English,

Spanish and French.

H. A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be

provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the

keypad is removed.

I. A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the

VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically

designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.

J. A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.

1. This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to

compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to

automatically select either the maximum or the feedback signal as the controlling signal.

It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as the average of all

feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.

2. The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.



3. For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root of

any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure air

flow.

4. The VFD’s PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This

allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near the

output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.

K. The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control damper and

valve positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset.

L. Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response to

contact closures.

M. Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall include at a minimum,

frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output energy, VFD

temperature in degrees, among others.

N. Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency drops

below set “sleep” level for a specified time, when an external contact commands that the VFD

go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the VFD may be

programmed to stop. When the VFD’s speed is being controlled by its PID controller, it shall

be possible to program a “wake-up” feedback value that will cause the VFD to start. To avoid

excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall be possible to program a

minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a minimum sleep time for the VFD.

O. A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a “system ready” signal to ensure that the

VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD

operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an output “run request”

signal to indicate to the external equipment that the VFD has received a request to run.

P. VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as inches of

water column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (°F).

Q. VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable to signal

this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. To

ensure against nuisance indications, this feature must be based on motor torque, not current, and

must include a proof timer to keep brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this

indication.

R. Standard Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs

1. Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the

systems control and safety interlock circuitry.

2. Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or additional

digital inputs.

3. Two programmable relay outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for remote

indication of VFD status.

a. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay / off delay time.



4. Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-reverse

acting.

a. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or

current signal.

b. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently

scalable from 0 to 10 V dc and 0 to 20 mA.

c. A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be

included to compensate for noise.

d. The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the value

of each analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,

5. One programmable analog current output (0/4 to 20 mA) shall be provided for indication

of VFD status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback

signal supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be

possible to scale the minimum and maximum values of this output.

6. It shall be possible through serial bus communications to read the status of all analog and

digital inputs of the VFD.

7. It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial

communication bus.

S. Optional Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs

1. It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog

and digital inputs and outputs.

2. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD’s control card.

3. The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There

shall be no need to manually configure the module.

4. Modules may include such items as:

a. Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs

b. Additional digital inputs

c. Additional analog outputs

d. Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs

5. It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all optional

analog and digital outputs of the VFD.

T. Standard programmable firefighter’s override mode allows a digital input to control the VFD

and override all other local or remote commands. It shall be possible to program the VFD so

that it will ignore most normal VFD safety circuits including motor overload. The VFD shall

display FIREMODE whenever in firefighter’s override mode. Firemode shall allow selection of

forward or reverse operation and the selection of a speed source or preset speed, as required to

accommodate local fire codes, standards and conditions.

U. A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD.

1. It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the VFD’s display.

2. Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall

be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions,

constant speeds, PID parameter setpoints and output relays. Is shall be possible to



program unique events that occur only during normal work days, others that occur only

on non-work days, and others that occur on specific days or dates. The manufacturer shall

provide free PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.

3. All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.

4. It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD

running hours, or VFD operating hours.

5. The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD

fault log.

V. The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system demand and

energy consumption over time.

W. The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface

capabilities. This shall include:

1. Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger values

2. Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra

3. Delay timers

4. A 20-step programmable structure

X. The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in closed loop set

point (PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and control the operation of 3

additional constant speed motor starters.

2.6 ELECTRO-MECHANICALLY CONTROLLED BYPASS (EMB)

A. Where scheduled on Drawings, provide VFD unit with bypass function.

B. Bypass Power Features:

1. Three-Contactor bypass shall be provided that allows operation of the motor via line

power in the event of a failure of the VFD. Motor control selection shall be through either

a VFD output contactor or a bypass contactor that is interlocked to ensure that both

contactors are not energized simultaneously.

2. Main input disconnect shall be provided that removes power from both the bypass and

VFD.

3. VFD-only, fast acting input fuses shall be provided.

4. Overload protection shall be supplied in bypass mode.

a. Adjustable current setting for complete motor protection when operating on line

power.

b. Overload protection shall include phase loss and phase imbalance protection.

c. Visual indication of an overload trip condition shall be displayed on the VFD

keypad.

d. Resetting an overload trip condition shall not require the opening of the enclosure

door for safety reasons and shall be accomplished via a digital input, door mounted

device (drive keypad), or over the serial communications.



5. A third contactor, the drive input contactor, shall be supplied. This allows powering of

the VFD with the motor off or operating in bypass mode for testing, programming and

troubleshooting purposes.

6. Main input motor rated fuses that protect the entire package shall be provided.

7. All panels shall be marked for 100,000 amp short circuit current rating.

C. Bypass Interface and Control Features:

1. Bypass or VFD selection shall be via a DRIVE – OFF –BYPASS – TEST selector

switch.

2. A BYPASS pilot light will illuminate when operating in bypass mode.

3. The TEST position shall allow the ability to supply power to the drive for testing

purposes while running the motor in bypass.

4. Selection of Bypass or VFD operation shall be by any one of the following: Manually via

the VFD keypad, remotely via a contact closure from the BMS system, commanded over

the communication network or automatic bypass operation based on VFD programming.

5. Bypass package shall include an External Safety interlock that will disable motor

operation in either bypass or VFD mode when open.

6. EMB control package shall be provided. This package includes the following features:

a. There shall be complete Common Start/Stop command when operating in either

Bypass or VFD mode. While operating in Bypass mode, the keypad shall allow the

selection of Hand or Remote motor starting. In Hand and Bypass modes, pushing

the keypad start button shall initiate motor operation via line power. When in

Remote and Bypass modes are selected, the motor shall start just as it would have

in VFD and Remote mode. This start source can be via either a hardwired start

command, the VFD’s real time clock or a command over BAS communication.

Bypass packages that only allow common remote start/stop command when this

command is hardwired to the package are not acceptable.

b. Selectable Run Permissive logic shall operate in either VFD or bypass operation.

When activated, any command to start the motor, in either Hand Bypass, Remote

Bypass, Hand VFD or Remote VFD shall not start the motor, but instead close a

relay contact that is used to initiate operation of another device, such as an outside

air damper. A contact closure from this device shall confirm that it is appropriately

actuated and the motor shall then start.

c. Firemode operation input shall be available. When closed, the motor shall run in

bypass mode regardless of operating mode selected and will ignore calls to stop.

These include the opening of the external safety interlock circuit or the tripping of

the motor overload.

D. Additional Protective Features:

1. In additional to the power and operational protective features listed above, each bypass

shall include the following:

a. Low voltage contactor operation shall be maintained to 70% of the package’s

nominally rated voltage. This will ensure VFD operation on low voltage conditions

that would otherwise be interrupted due to contactor dropout.

2. Low voltage contactor operation shall be maintained to 70% of the package’s nominally

rated voltage. This will ensure VFD operation on low voltage conditions that would

otherwise be interrupted due to contactor dropout.



2.7 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

A. The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be

connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without a

need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:

1. Johnson Controls Metasys N2

2. Modbus RTU

3. Siemens FLN

B. Optional communication shall include:

1. LonWorks Free Topology (FTP)

2. BACnet MS/TP

C. VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to the

VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete setup and

access of the VFD and logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to

communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting VFD communications to

the building management system.

D. The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to power the

VFD’s control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the building

automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.

2.8 ADJUSTMENTS

A. The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in 0.5 kHz

increments to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also

be programmable to automatically reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal

loading.

B. Four independent setups shall be provided.

C. Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for a total of 16.

D. Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times. Acceleration and

deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to 3,600 seconds.

E. Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current from

the VFD reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current produced by the VFD

will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD. If desired, it

shall be possible to program a timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after a programmed

time period.

F. If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for

automatic or manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit, over

temperature, and VFD overload.



G. The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the time

between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.

H. An automatic “start delay” may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time, the

VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC braking

current if desired.

I. Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the

load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided. Semi-automatic

setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.

2.9 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. All optional features shall be built and mounted by VFD manufacturer. All optional features

shall be UL listed by the VFD manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL label.

B. All panels shall be marked for their short circuit current rating in compliance with UL.

2.10 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient temperature, continuous, full speed, full load operation:

1. -10 to 45°C (14 to 113°F) through 125 HP @ 460 and 600 volt, through 60 HP @ 208

volt

2. -10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F) 150 HP and larger

B. 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

C. Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.

D. AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10 percent of nominal with full output.

E. No side clearance shall be required for cooling.

F. All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom.

G. All VFDs shall be plenum rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.



C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections

before VFD installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating

handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by

bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For

controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Electrical

Hangers and Supports."

B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFDs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply

with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls

for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFD.

F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.

G. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load

amperes after motors are installed.

H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven

equipment.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply

with requirements in Division 26 specifications."



B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices

that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for

safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature

cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 260553 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate.

3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions

with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and

adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply,

feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit.

4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed

Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test

parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.



8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and

describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and

observations made after remedial action.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event

recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to

Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay

pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit

breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor

nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-

down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until

motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times

for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow

starting of a motor, notify Architect before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges

F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial

Completion.



3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs. Provide 4 hours onsite training.

B. Harmonic filtering. The VFD supplier shall, with the aid of the buyer’s detailed electrical power

single line diagram showing all impedances in the power path to the VFDs, perform an analysis

to initially demonstrate the supplied equipment will met the IEEE recommendations after

installation. If, as a result of the analysis, it is determined that additional filter equipment is

required to meet the IEEE recommendations, then the cost of such equipment shall be included

in the drive supplier quotation.

3.10 COMMISSIONING





6/06



METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 232113 – METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.

7. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, flexible ducts, and fabric duct air

dispersion system.


A. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.



1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:




12/8/16

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic

restraints, and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.

3. Reinforcement details and spacing.

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and

supports and seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.

B. Welding certificates.




12/8/16



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal

Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK

A. Construct and install all sheet metal ductwork in accordance with the California Mechanical

Code for 2 inches static pressure for supply air, and 2 inches minimum for return and exhaust

air unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

1. Where not in conflict with the California Mechanical Code, construct and install all sheet

metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

(Metal and Flexible). Where applicable for HVAC work, construct and install sheet

metal work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

2. Provide variations in duct size, and additional duct fittings as required to clear

obstructions and maintain clearances as approved by the Architect at no extra cost to the

Owner.

3. Gauges, joints and bracing shall be in accordance with the California Mechanical Code.

4. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with the more stringent

of the following standards, except as noted herein.

a. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

b. California Mechanical Code

5. Provide beading or cross breaking for all ductwork inside building. Provide cross

breaking for ductwork exposed to weather.

6. At the contractor's option, ductwork may be fabricated using the Ductmate, Nexus,

Quickduct, Transverse Duct Connection (TDC), Pyramid-Loc duct connection systems,

or equal. Fabricate in strict conformance with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and in accordance with California Mechanical Code.

a. Seal flanged ends with pressure sensitive high density, closed cell neoprene or

polyethylene tape gasket, Thermo 440, or equal.

b. Provide metal clips for duct connections, except at breakaway connections for fire

dampers and fire smoke dampers. Provide corner clips at each corner of duct,

through bolted, at all locations except at breakaway connections for fire dampers

and fire smoke dampers. Where used on locations exposed to weather, provide

continuous metal clip at top and sides of duct, with 1 inch overhang for top side.

B. Design and installation standards:




12/8/16

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) for all work in this section.

2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and ANSI/NFPA 90B, "Standard for the

Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

3. California Mechanical Code.

C. Fabricate all ductwork with sheet metal. Fiberglass ductwork will not be accepted for use on

this project.

D. Duct sizes indicated are external sizes.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A924 and ASTM A653, Coating

Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to

view.

1. Provide mill certification for galvanized material at request of the Project Inspector.

F. Applicable Leakage Classes:

Pressure Class Leakage Class

Round Duct Rectangular Duct

2"W.G. or less 12 12

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Rectangular Duct Fabrication:

1. Fabricate ducts for 2 inch pressure class with minimum duct gauges and reinforcement as

follows, except as otherwise noted:

Duct Dimension Minimum Gauge Joint Reinforcement Per CMC

Through 12" 26 Not Required

13" through 18" 24 Not Required

19" through 30" 24 C/4

2. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts and to comply with duct requirements as

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line

radius equal to 1.5 times associated duct width. Fabricate to include single thickness

turning vane in elbows where space does not permit the above radius or where square

elbows are shown. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20

degrees for expanding tapers. Turning vanes shall be E-Z Rail II, Durodyne, or equal.




12/8/16

3. Fabricate round supply connections at rectangular, plenum type fittings using spin-in type

fittings, complete with extractor and volume control damper. Refer to Paragraph

“DAMPERS” for damper requirements.

4. Provide drive slip or equivalent flat seams for ducts exposed in the conditioned space or

where necessary due to space limitations. On ducts with flat seams, provide standard

reinforcing on inside of duct. Duct connection to outlet on exposed duct shall be full size

of outer perimeter of outlet flange.

5. Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes and be

mounted tight against adjacent surface with flat hangers. Remove all fabrication labels

from ductwork.

6. Provide 20 gauge minimum for ductwork exposed within occupied spaces.

B. Rectangular Internally Insulated Duct Fabrication:

1. Provide internal duct lining where indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of 10'-0"

length in each direction from the fan, fan casing, or unit casing. Line all transfer ducts.

a. [Where ductwork is exposed to weather or outside the building insulation

envelope, provide 2 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density internal lining with matte

facing, with an R-Value of 8.0 minimum.]

b. Where ductwork is within the building insulation envelope, lining shall be 1”

thick, 1-1/2 pound density, with R-value of 4.2 minimum.

c. [Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes and

be mounted tight against adjacent surface with flat hangers. Remove all

fabrication labels from ductwork.

d. Where installed exposed in the conditioned space, duct shall be minimum 20 gauge

with 1 inch insulation layer (minimum R-value – R-4.2).]

e. Cement duct liner in place with nonflammable, non-hardening duct adhesive. Seal

all raw edges of insulation inside ductwork with adhesive, including longitudinal

liner edges.

f. Provide metal nosing at all locations where liner is preceded by unlined metal.

g. Provide sheet metal weld pins and washers or clinch pins and washers on all

ductwork on 12 inch intervals with the first row within 3 inches of the leading edge

of each piece of insulation and within 4 inches of corners. No use of adhesive

mounted pins will be considered.

1) Install clinched pin fasteners with properly adjusted automatic fastening

equipment. Manual installation will not be considered.

2) Install weld pins with properly adjusted automatic fastening equipment.

Installation shall not damage the galvanized coating on the outside of the

duct.

h. All ductwork, adhesives, lining, sealant, flex duct and the like shall have a flame

spread of 25 or less and developed smoke rating of 50 or less when tested in

accordance with one of the following test methods: NFPA 255, ASTM E84, or UL

723.

i. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, or

equal:




12/8/16

Manufacturer: Product:

Johns Manville Duct Liner PM

CertainTeed Corporation

ToughGard

Fosters Adhesive

85-62

Swifts Adhesive

7336

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Round and Oval Ductwork Fabrication:

1. Round and oval duct and fittings shall be spiral lockseam or longitudinal seam as

indicated in table below. Provide couplings to join each length of duct.

a. At contractors’ option, round or oval ductwork may be utilized in place of

rectangular ductwork shown on Drawings, provided available space allows

installation of round or oval ductwork without compromising space required for

installation of products and systems of other trades.

1) Round or oval ductwork utilized in place of rectangular ductwork shown on

Drawings shall be sized to have a static pressure loss equivalent to

rectangular duct shown on Drawings.

2) Unlined round or oval duct shall not be utilized in place of rectangular

internally lined ductwork shown on Drawings.

2. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts and to comply with duct requirements as

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line

radius equal to 1.5 times associated duct width. Provide two-piece, die-stamped,

45-degree to 90-degree elbows for sizes up to 12 inches; five-piece, 90-degree elbows for

sizes 12 inches and above; conical tees; and conical laterals. All reducers shall be placed

after a tap has been made on the duct main. Reducers shall be long-taper style.

3. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A

653 by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed.

Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture

Up to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam

15" to 23" 24 Spiral Lockseam




12/8/16

24" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam

4. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion welded butt seam for longitudinal seam duct.

5. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous welds

along seams at exposed ducts. Provide spot weld bonded seams at concealed ducts.

Diameter Minimum Gauge

3" to 36" 20

38" to 50" 18

6. [Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes and be


from ductwork.

7. Provide 20 gauge minimum for ductwork exposed within occupied spaces.]

B. Round Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Where ductwork is exposed to weather or outside

the building insulation envelope, construct with outer pressure shell, 2 inch thick (Minimum R-

value = R-8) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Where ductwork is within the building

insulation envelope, construct with outer pressure shell, 1 inch thick (minimum R-value = R4.2)

insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet steel

complying with ANSI/ASTM A 653, of spiral lockseam construction (use longitudinal seam for

over 59 inches), in minimum gauges listed in table below. Where installed exposed in the

conditioned space: duct and fitting outer pressure shell shall be minimum 20 gauge with 1 inch

insulation layer (minimum R-value = R-4.2), and perforated inner liner.

Nominal Duct Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner

3" TO 12" 26 gauge 24 gauge

13" TO 24" 24 gauge 24 gauge

25" to 34" 22 gauge 24 gauge




12/8/16

1. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous weld

along seams of outer shell at exposed ducts. Provide spot weld bonded seams at

concealed ducts.

Nominal Duct Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner



Over 48" 16 gauge 24 gauge

2. Inner Liner: Perforate with 3/32 inch holes for 22 percent open area. Provide metal

spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.

3. [Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes and be


from ductwork.

4. Where installed exposed in the conditioned space, duct shall be minimum 20 gauge with

1 inch insulation layer (minimum R-value – R-4.2).]

5. All ductwork, adhesives, lining, sealant, flex duct and the like shall have a flame spread

of 25 or less and developed smoke rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with

one of the following test methods: NFPA 255, ASTM E84, or UL 723.



a. Sheet Metal Div., McGill AirFlow, LLC., Acousti-k27

b. Semco Duct and Acoustical Products, Inc.

c. Air Systems Manufacturing, Inc. - Las Vegas

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.




12/8/16

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch

wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.




12/8/16

2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES




2. Hilti, Inc.


4. Loos & Co., Inc.


6. TOLCO.


B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications

shall be as defined in reports by the Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for

the State of California or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be

subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel

channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment

to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching

components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized or ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end

connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed

for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-

cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted


F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts

with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.




12/8/16

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

F. Provide lined ductwork in accordance with this specification for supply and outside-air ducts

within 10 feet of unit duct connection.




12/8/16

3.3 DUCT SEALING AND LEAK TESTING

A. Seal Class: All ductwork shall receive Class A seal.

B. New Duct Systems: All duct systems (supply, return, outside air intake, and exhaust), except

those exposed in the conditioned space, shall be sealed and leak tested to a leakage rate not to

exceed 6% of the fan flow of the system. The leakage rate shall be confirmed through field

verification and diagnostic testing in accordance with the procedures set forth in the 2013

California Building Energy Efficiency Standards Reference Appendices.

C. Alterations to Existing Duct Systems or Space Conditioning Equipment: All duct systems

(supply, return, outside air intake and exhaust), except those exposed in the conditioned space,

shall be sealed and leak tested in strict conformance with the requirements of the 2013]

California Building Energy Efficiency Standards. The leakage rate shall be confirmed through

field verification and diagnostic testing in accordance with the procedures set forth in the 2013]

California Building Energy Efficiency Standards Reference Appendices.


A. Comply with California Mechanical Code, and SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic

forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with California Building Code and

ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c.





12/8/16

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and

seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by the Office of Statewide Health

Planning and Development for the State of California or an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to

structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling.

Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during

drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications

conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.


5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."






12/8/16

B. Leakage Tests:

1. New Construction: All duct systems (supply, return, outside air intake, and exhaust),

except those exposed in the conditioned space, shall be sealed and leak tested to a leakage

rate not to exceed 6 % of the fan flow of the system. The leakage rate shall be confirmed

through field verification and diagnostic testing in accordance with the procedures set

forth in the 2013 California Building Energy Efficiency Standards Reference

Appendices.

2. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

3. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

4. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

5. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC

Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with

Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.




12/8/16

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions

after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.10 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC."




12/8/16

3.11 COMMISSIONING







AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Turning vanes.

3. Duct-mounted access doors.


5. Flexible ducts.

6. Duct accessory hardware.

7. Fabric Air Duct Dispersion System.


1. Section 233723 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.



1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include

breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other

construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and

method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the

following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




12/8/16


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-

mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"

and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants,



B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a

No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish

for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel

ducts.




12/8/16

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:




a. McGill AirFlow LLC.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Pottorff.

d. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in

ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized or Stainless-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic or Stainless-steel sleeve.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating

shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 TURNING VANES



the following:




12/8/16

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. METALAIRE, Inc.

4. SEMCO Incorporated.

5. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;

support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct

mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with

perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in

Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger

dimensions.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS



the following:

1. Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc.


3. Elgen Manufacturing.

4. Pottorff.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and

Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for

duct pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash

locks.




12/8/16

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two

compression latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct

pressure class.

3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-

pressure ducts.

4. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg.

5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.

6. Hinge: Continuous piano.

7. Latches: Cam.

8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.

9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS



the following:


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide

attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or

0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.




12/8/16

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS



the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.


B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene oraluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

4. Insulation R-value: R-6.0 for ductwork installed within the building insulation

envelope, R-8.0 for ductwork installed outside the building insulation envelope..

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band

with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

2.8 FABRIC DUCT AIR DISPERSION SYSTEM

A. Duct: Fabric duct shall be constructed of inherently fire resistant polyester fabric

complying with flame spread and smoke development index requirements of NFPA 90A

when evaluated in accordance with UL 723 or other standard acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Treated or laminated fabric is not acceptable. Fabric shall be

classified according to ICC AC167 and UL 2518. Fabric weight shall be minimum

[6.75][ ] oz./sq. yd. as tested per ASTM D3776. Duct shall be designed for inlet static

pressure range of 0.25-3.0 in. wg. Fabric shall withstand without damage temperature

range of 0-180 degrees F. Fabric air permeability shall be [0.5][ ] CFM per sq. ft. when

tested according to the requirements of ASTM D737.

1. Linear vent shall consist of round, open orifices in duct fabric, sized and spaced

per Drawings, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Duct color shall be selected by Architect from among manufacturers’ available

colors.

B. Duct Shape Retention System: Provide duct with shape retention system consisting of

removable, round, 360 degree hoops, placed inside duct and spaced at 5 ft. o.c., or as

recommended by fabric duct system manufacturer.

C. Duct Connections: Provide fabric duct system with hardware for duct inlet connection to

metal duct. Inlet connection shall include zipper for removal or maintenance of duct.

Duct sections and end caps shall be provided with zippers for connection, removal, and




12/8/16

maintenance, number and location as normally provided by the manufacturer for the size

and arrangement of duct as shown on Drawings.

D. Provide system with airflow, pressure control, and balancing devices as shown on

Drawings and Drawing schedules.

E. Mounting: Provide fabric duct system with hardware for galvanized cable suspension

system detailed on Drawings. Provide hanger attachment points on fabric duct, with

locations compatible with duct suspension system detailed on Drawings.

F. Warranty: Provide with manufacturers’ minimum 10 year warranty.

G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


1. DurkeeSox.

2. DuctSox.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw

cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of

length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to

gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel ducts.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install

dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat

channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.




12/8/16

F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and

maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. At drain pans and seals.

3. Downstream from manual volume dampers and equipment.

4. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall

fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible

links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for

access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access

doors installed downstream from dampers.

5. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

6. Upstream from turning vanes.

7. Control devices requiring inspection.

8. Elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

H. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

I. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

K. Connect diffusers to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct

clamped or strapped in place.

L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. Install draw band at inner liner

material, and a second draw band over the outer vapor barrier material.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

N. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment.

Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement

during start and stop of fans.

O. Installation of Fabric Duct Air Dispersion System:

1. Install fabric duct system in accordance with the requirements of the

manufacturer, and per Drawings details.




12/8/16

a. Air handler and associated ductwork shall be clean and free of particulate

matter at the time of fabric duct connection and pressurization of duct

system.

2. Fabric duct shall be cleaned according to manufacturers’ instructions, if soiled

during installation, prior to Project handover to District.



1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement

and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

3.3 COMMISSIONING







HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.

2. Centrifugal wall ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.





12/8/16


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

Installers of the items involved:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.


4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Provide evidence of equipment certification to California Energy Code Section 110.1 or

110.2, if not providing Electrically Commutated motors for HVAC fans sized below 1 hp

and above 1/12 hp.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency,



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear

the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations

with actual equipment provided.




12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants,



2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenheck

Fan Corporation, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Coolair Corporation.

2. Loren Cook Company.

3. PennBarry.

4. Or equal.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle, or galvanized steel,

mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air

upward, with rain and snow drains. Include grease collector for kitchen hood

exhaust applications.

2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb

base; factory set to close when fan stops.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenheck

Fan Corporation, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Coolair Corporation.


3. PennBarry.

4. Or equal.




12/8/16

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi

inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Accessories:

1. Electrically Commutated Motor: Minimum 85 percent efficient. Speed

controllable down to 20 percent of full speed, and controlled by potentiometer

dial mounted at motor or by 0-10 VDC signal.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall

sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. For single-phase fan motors sized larger than 1/12 hp and smaller than 1 hp, refer to

article, Single-Phase Motors, in Section 230513, Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating

Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to

AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed

of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.




12/8/16

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices

specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Building Wire and Cable."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper

thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect

switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive

system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.




12/8/16

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan

to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

D. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 COMMISSIONING







DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adjustable bar registers and grilles.

2. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers,

registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.


4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.





12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. General:

1. Provide aluminum or stainless steel outlets and inlets in areas of high moisture.

2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Adjustable Bar Register:



the following:

a. Carnes Company.

b. Krueger.

c. Nailor Industries Inc.

d. Price Industries.

e. Titus.

2. Material: Steel.

3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

4. Frame: 1-1/4 inches or 1 inch wide.

5. Mounting: Concealed.

B. Adjustable Bar Grille:



the following:

a. Carnes Company.

b. Krueger.



e. Titus.

2. Material: Steel.




C. Fixed Face Register:




12/8/16



the following:

a. Carnes Company.

b. Krueger.



e. Titus.

2. Material: Steel.


4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.



D. Fixed Face Grille:



the following:

a. Carnes Company.

b. Krueger.



e. Titus.

f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.


4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.

5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches.

6. Mounting: Concealed..

7. Accessory: Filter.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,

"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."




12/8/16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Install balancing damper on duct branches to individual outlets.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

D. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,

before starting air balancing.

3.4 COMMISSIONING







HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 232723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 2 - GENERAL




2.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof Hoods.


A. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, ventilator

attachments to curbs, and curb attachments to roof structure.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water

intrusion.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of

the items involved:

1. Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.

2. Sizes and locations of roof openings.

B. Welding certificates.




12/8/16


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

2.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

B. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel unless

otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants, and



3.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark

units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances

made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter

sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and

secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.




12/8/16

3.3 ROOF HOODS



1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.


4. PennBarry.

B. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figures 6-6 and 6-7.

C. Materials: Galvanized-steel sheet, minimum 0.064-inch-thick base and 0.040-inch-thick hood;

suitably reinforced.

D. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.

E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds,

mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to

ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied

over it.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

D. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.

Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

E. Label gravity ventilators according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification

for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying

a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,

or dissimilar metals.

G. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no

evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the

factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.




12/8/16

4.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

4.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

4.4 COMMISSIONING







PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 234100 – PARTICUALTE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pleated panel filters.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; operating

characteristics; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and

final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification;

furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For air filters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of

components.

2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts

and anchorages.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide one complete set(s) of filters for each filter bank. If system includes

prefilters, provide only prefilters.




12/8/16


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for

methods of testing and rating air-filter units.

C. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLEATED PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type,

disposable air filters with holding frames.




a. AAF International.

b. Camfil Farr.

c. Flanders Corporation.

B. Filter Unit Class: UL 900, Class 2.

C. Media: Interlaced glass or synthetic fibers or Cotton and synthetic fibers coated with

nonflammable adhesive.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).





3. Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent.

4. Separators shall be bonded to the media to maintain pleat configuration.

5. Welded wire grid shall be on downstream side to maintain pleat.

6. Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass.

7. Support members on upstream and downstream sides to maintain pleat spacing.

D. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer with metal grid on

outlet side and steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, with pull and retaining handles sealed

or bonded to the media.




12/8/16

E. Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners; suitable for

bolting together into built-up filter banks.

1. Minimum MERV Rating: 8, when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter

holding frames to substrate.

B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

C. Install filter gage for each filter bank. Filter gages are specified in Section 230923

“Building Automation System.”

D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Install filter

gages on filter banks with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from

filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible

position. Adjust and level inclined gages.

F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.



1. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.

B. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling

and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

3.4 COMMISSIONING







12/8/16




GAS VENTS

235123 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 235123 – GAS VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall vents.




and profiles, and finishes for product.

B. Shop Drawings: For vents.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.



connection.

3. Detail fabrication and assembly of hangers and seismic restraints.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints

and seams in vents.

B. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.



GAS VENTS

235123 - 2

12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL VENTS – GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNIT

APPLICATION



1. Heat-Fab, Inc. (Selkirk Corporation), model Saf-T Vent EZ Seal.

2. Or Equal.

B. Description: Single-wall metal vents tested and listed according to UL 1738 for Category 3

appliances, with positive pressure. Welded seams and fittings with integral silicone seal, and

joint closure system.

C. Material: ASTM A 959, Type AL29-4C stainless steel.

D. Accessories: Elbows, drain tees, appliance connectors, terminations, storm collars, support

assemblies, listed thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and

designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.

1. Termination: Manufacturer and model approved by duct furnace manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 APPLICATION

A. Single Wall Gas Vent: Gas-fired heating and ventilating unit furnaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS

A. Comply with requirements of boiler and vent system manufacturers.

B. Comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights

according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

C. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.



GAS VENTS

235123 - 3

12/8/16

D. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all

accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

E. Lap joints in direction of flow.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SINGLE WALL VENTS

A. Comply with requirements of furnace and vent system manufacturers.

B. Comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights

according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all

accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

D. Lap joints in direction of flow.

E. Insulate combustion air and vent piping according to Section 230716, “HVAC Equipment

Insulation.”

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23733316 - 1

12/8/16

SECTION 237333.16 - INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.


A. Product Data: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating and

ventilating unit.




C. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating and

ventilating unit.

1. Signed, sealed, and prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.



connection.

4. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas-fired heating and ventilating units, as well as

procedures and diagrams.

5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.





12/8/16


A. Startup service reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired heating and ventilating units to include in





1. Filters: One set(s) for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each unit.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. Unit shall be ETL design certified to ANSI Z83.8, “Gas Unit Heater and Gas-Fired Duct

Furnaces.

E. Unit shall be ETL certified to UL 1995/CSA C22.2, No. 236 “Heating and Cooling Equipment,

and UL 795 “Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment.”

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect, gas-fired

heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five

years from date of Substantial Completion.




12/8/16

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants, and



2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. REZNOR; Thomas & Betts Corporation, a member of ABB Group.

2. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company.

3. Or equal.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, controls,

filters, and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed inside the building.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.4 UNIT CONFIGURATION

A. All unit(s) shall have right side access, when looking into the discharge, and include:

1. Furnace section(s) controls.

2. Blower section containing a supply blower and motor with bottom support to provide

rigidity. The blower connection shall be flexible with 1/4 inch gasket to prevent sound

transmission into the supply ductwork.

3. Electrical section isolated from the supply air stream including a hinged access door.

Separate conduit entry points shall be provided for both high and low voltage electrical

connections. Provisions must be included for side access electrical connections for slab

mounted units and bottom electrical connections for roof curb mounted units.

2.5 INDOOR SEPARATED COMBUSTION VENTING ARRANGEMENT

A. The unit casing shall be designed for the venting/combustion air arrangement to be separated

from the room atmosphere. The unit shall have a factory mounted power exhauster enclosed in

the unit casing to prevent the motor from being subjected to the room atmosphere. The unit

shall also include a factory mounted differential pressure switch designed to prevent pilot and

main burner ignition until positive venting has been proven. A removable gasketed door shall




12/8/16

contain both the vent and combustion air connection collars to allow for servicing of the power

exhauster.

2.6 UNIT CASINGS

A. The duct furnace(s) unit casing shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge aluminized steel.

B. The duct furnace(s) shall include separate access doors for the power exhauster, electrical

controls, and gas train to allow for simplified service of the unit(s).

C. All duct furnace doors shall be fully gasketed to prevent infiltration of the room air into the

combustion process.

D. The blower sections shall be constructed of not less than 18 gauge aluminized steel.

E. All blower section exterior casing parts shall be painted with a baked-on gray-green polyester

powder paint (7mil thickness) for corrosion resistance.

F. All blower section access side doors shall have heavy duty, draw tight, quarter turn latches.

G. Blower sections shall include 1 inch, 1-1/2 lb density acoustical and thermal insulation. The

insulation shall be made of glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin and overlaid with a

fire-resistant black acrylic coating for additional strength. The acrylic coating must meet the

requirements of ASTM C 665 for fungi resistance.

2.7 FURNACE SECTION

A. The heat exchanger(s) shall be made of 20 gauge 409 stainless steel tubes and headers. The

thermal efficiency of the unit(s) shall be a minimum of 80% efficient for all air flow ranges

resulting in a temperature rise range of 20°F-60°F.

B. Each heat exchanger tube shall be individually and directly flame-fired. The heat exchanger

tube shall be contoured and dimpled to provide efficient heat transfer and crimped to allow for

thermal expansion and contraction. The flue collector box shall be made of 20 gauge

aluminized steel.

C. The heat exchanger(s) seams and duct connections shall be certified to withstand 3.0” W.C.

external static pressure without burner flame disturbance.

D. The burner(s) shall be made of the same material as the heat exchanger with a thickness of not

less than 28 gauge. Burner(s) shall have non-clogging, slotted ports with a stainless steel

separator strip designed for good lighting characteristics without noise of extinction for both

natural and propane gas. The burner(s) shall be located for service removal without

disconnecting the main gas supply piping.

E. The bottom of the unit shall be angled for draining any condensation to the center of the unit.

The condensation shall be removed through the connection of a drain to the knockout opening

in the bottom pan. The drain pan shall be constructed of 20 gauge 409 stainless steel.




12/8/16

F. The gas manifold piping shall allow for gas piping connection on the side of the unit for slab

mounted units and through the unit bottom for suspended units. The manifold shall include a

ground joint union for ease of servicing of the orifices without removing the burner assembly or

main gas valve string.

G. The orifices shall be provided on both natural and propane gas with adjustable air shutters for

controlling the primary air mixture.

H. The ignition controller(s) shall be 100 percent shut-off with continuous retry for natural gas.

I. The gas pressure shall be between 6-7 inches W.C for natural gas.

J. The solid state ignition system shall intermittently light the pilot each time the system is

energized. Once the pilot is proven, the main gas valve shall open and allow gas flow to the

main burner.

K. The unit gas controls shall be provided with the following:

1. Electronic Modulation - 0-10 Vdc External Input. Allows for control of the duct furnace

firing rate by a Building Management System (BMS). Utilizes an electronic

modulating/regulating gas control, combination gas valve, an ignition control, modulating

signal conditioner, and an inverted 0-10 Vdc input signal provided by a BMS (0 Vdc

being high fire and 10 Vdc being low fire). The gas controls can modulate the gas flow

between 40 percent and 100 percent full fire. When the BMS thermostat (supplied by

others) is satisfied, the BMS heat contact (supplied by others) opens to cut power to the

combination gas valve which prevents gas flow to both the main and pilot burners.

2. A 1/8” manifold pressure tap shall be located after all valves to test the manifold pressure

directly before the main burner orifices.

3. The unit shall be provided with a single gas control transformer to step down the supply

voltage to 24V.

4. For 460V and 575V units, a step down transformer from line voltage to 115V shall be

provided for operation of the power exhauster motor.

5. Automatic reset high limit switch.

6. A mild temperature thermostat used to automatically lock out the gas controls when the

outdoor temperature reaches the desired set point.

7. The unit shall include a high altitude kit for 6500 foot elevation above sea level.

L. Provide unit with horizontal concentric vent termination kits as indicated on Drawings.

2.8 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical components shall carry UL, ETL, or CSA listing.

B. The unit shall be supplied with a disconnect switch to disconnect power to the unit for

servicing. The disconnect switch style shall be dead front fusible.

C. A single step down transformer shall be provided for all unit controls.




12/8/16

2.9 BLOWER SECTION

A. The blower motor shall meet the following requirements:

1. The blower motor type shall be single-speed, totally enclosed (TE), NEMA Premium

Efficiency.

2. The motor wiring shall be in flexible metal BX conduit.

3. The motor shall be provided with an adjustable motor sheave to allow for minor

adjustment of the blower rpm at the job site.

4. The motor shall be controlled by a factory supplied variable frequency drive.

5. The unit shall contain a single supply blower that is supported from the bottom to prevent

the blower flanges supporting the weight of the motor. The blower shall be a double

width, double inlet (DWDI) forward curved, belt driven, assembly with heavy duty,

pillow block ball bearings.

6. The blower assembly shall include motor and blower vibration isolation using rubber-in-

shear grommets.

7. The unit shall be provided with a filter rack with 2” Farr 30/30® filters, or equal. The

30/30 has a rating of MERV 8 when evaluated per ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. A dirty filter pressure switch with an adjustable pressure switch with pick-up tubes to monitor

the filter pressure drop and energize a remote panel light if the set pressure is exceeded.

B. A circuit analyzer consisting of 10 lights that step through the sequence of operation for service

personnel.

C. Accessory Control Devices:

1. Refer to schedule on Drawings.

2.11 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:

1. Remote Thermostat: Adjustable room thermostat with temperature readout.

B. Building Automation System Interface: Refer Section 230923, “Building Automation System,”

and control diagrams and sequences of operation on Drawings.

2.12 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."




12/8/16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of indirect-fired heating and

ventilating units.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment installation.

C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes,

fan wheels, and other components.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

C. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect-fired

heating and ventilating units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


1. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and union and with sufficient clearance for burner

removal and service. Make final connections of gas piping to unit with corrugated,

stainless-steel tubing flexible connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26

equipment connections.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Duct Connections: Connect ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units with flexible

duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for

flexible duct connectors.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Building Wire and Cable."




12/8/16


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:

a. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber.

b. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.

c. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

d. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

e. Verify that filters are installed.

f. Purge gas line.

g. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

h. Verify bearing lubrication.

i. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding.

j. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

k. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

3. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

4. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer.

5. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust

burner for peak efficiency:

a. Measure gas pressure at manifold.

b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.

c. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing

rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

6. Calibrate thermostats.

7. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

8. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

9. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and

normal and emergency shutdown.

10. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

11. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes. Inspect the

following:




12/8/16

a. High-limit heat.

b. Alarms.

12. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and

adjust belt tension.

13. Verify drain-pan performance.

14. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.

3.8 COMMISSIONING



Commissioning Requirements.” Provide minimum 4 hours onsite training.




TRUCKEE, CA

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 1

SECTION 260010 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Table of Contents, Division 26 - Electrical:

SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE

260010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

260090 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

260519 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING

260529 ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

260531 CONDUIT

260533 BOXES

260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

260926 LOW-VOLTAGE NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL

262719 SURFACE RACEWAYS

262726 WIRING DEVICES

262816 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

262819 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

B. Work included: This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for

Division 26. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this

Section to supplement the requirements specified in Division 01.

1. Quality assurance.

2. Definition of terms.

3. Submittals.

4. Coordination.

5. Record documents.

6. Operation and maintenance manuals.

7. Project management and coordination services.

8. Rough-in.

9. Electrical installation.

10. Cutting, patching, painting and sealing.

11. Field quality control.

12. Cleaning.

13. Project closeout.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work

and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a

complete and operable installation.

1. General and supplementary conditions: Drawings and general provisions of Contract and

Division 01 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 26 Sections.

2. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the

installation of underground conduit, in-grade pull boxes, vaults, lighting pole

foundations, etc. Refer to Division 31, Earthwork.

3. Concrete Work: Include forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast-in- place concrete, finishing

and grouting as required for underground conduit encasement, light pole foundations,

pull box slabs, vaults, housekeeping pads, etc. Also includes setting of floor boxes in

existing concrete slabs, saw-cutting of existing slabs and grouting of conduits in saw-cut.

Refer to Division 03, Concrete.

4. Miscellaneous metal Work: Include fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding

and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, lighting fixtures, panelboards,

distribution boards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc. Refer to Division 05,

Miscellaneous Metals.

5. Miscellaneous lumber and framing Work: Include wood grounds, nailers, blocking,

fasteners and anchorage for support of electrical materials and equipment. Refer to

Division 06, Rough Carpentry.

6. Moisture protection and smoke barrier penetrations: Include membrane clamps, sheet

metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealant as required for waterproofing of

conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors, ceiling slabs

and foundation walls. All penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade shall be

taped and made vaportight. Refer to Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

7. Access panels and doors: Required in walls, ceilings and floors to provide access to

electrical devices and equipment. Refer to Division 08, Access Doors also, Division 05,

Metals.

8. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for

electrical cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, etc. where indicated as field

painted in this Division. Refer to Division 09, Painting.

9. Lighting fixture supports: Provide slack fixture support wire for lighting fixtures

installed in acoustical tile or lay-in suspended ceilings. Refer to Division 09, Acoustical

Treatment.

D. Work furnished and installed under another Division requiring connections under this

Division includes but is not limited to:

1. Electric motors.

2. Package mechanical equipment: fans, fan coil units, pumps, boilers, compressors, etc.

3. Flow switches and valve monitors for sprinkler system.

4. Temperature control panel(s). (Line voltage only)

5. Electric signage.



TRUCKEE, CA


6. Electric door locks.

7. Electric heat trace tape.

8. Door hold-open/release devices.

9. Variable frequency drive units.

10. Chiller starters.

11. Motorized roll down/sliding doors and grills.

E. Items furnished under another Division, but installed and connected under this Division

includes but is not limited to:

1. Wall mounted control stations for motorized roll down and sliding doors.

2. Electric fire sprinkler water flow bells.

3. Speed control switches for ceiling exhaust fans.


A. Reference to Codes, Standards, Specifications and recommendations of technical societies,

trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such

publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Such codes or standards

shall be considered a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.

B. When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent than is

specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred authority

for reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Contract Documents. The Contract

Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

C. Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the latest edition

of all governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following

minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. CaliforniaElectric Code (CEC).

2. CaliforniaBuilding Code (CBC).

3. California Fire Code (CFC).

4. California Mechanical Code (CMC).

D. Standards: Equipment and materials specified under this Division shall conform to the

following standards where applicable:

ACI American Concrete Institute

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers

ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

FS Federal Specification

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories



TRUCKEE, CA


E. Independent Testing Agency qualifications:

1. Testing Agency shall be an independent testing organization that will function as an

unbiased authority, professionally independent of Manufacturer, Supplier and Contractor,

furnishing and installing equipment or system evaluated by Testing Agency.

2. Testing Agency shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices,

installations and systems.

3. Testing Agency shall meet Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) requirements for accreditation of independent testing laboratories, Title 9, Part

1907.

4. On-site technical personnel shall be currently certified by the International Electrical

Testing Association in electrical power distribution system testing.

5. Testing Agency shall use technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing

services.

6. Contractor shall submit proof of above Testing Agency qualifications with bid

documentation upon request.

F. All base material shall be ASTM and/or ANSI standards.

G. All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall conform to NEMA standards and

the NEC and bear the UL label where such label is applicable.

H. Certify that each welder performing Work has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests

for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.

1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. The following list of terms as used in the Division 26 documents shall be defined as follows:

1. "Provide": Shall mean furnish, install and connect unless otherwise indicated.

2. "Furnish": Shall mean purchase and deliver to Project site.

3. "Install": Shall mean to physically install the items in-place.

4. "Connect": Shall mean make final electrical connections for a complete operating piece

of equipment.

5. "As directed": Shall be as directed by the Owner or their authorized Representative.

6. "Utility Companies": Shall mean the company providing electrical, telephone or cable

television services to the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Format: Furnish in format as noted in Division 01.

B. Submittals shall consist of detailed Shop Drawings, Specifications, block wiring diagrams,

"catalog cuts" and data sheets containing physical and dimensional information, performance

data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication and material finish. Clearly

indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional

accessories which are included and those which are excluded. Each submittal shall be labeled

with the Specification Section Number and shall be accompanied by a cover letter or shall

bear a stamp stating that the submittal has been thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and is



TRUCKEE, CA


in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Cover letters shall list

in full the items and data submitted. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute

grounds for rejection of data.

C. The Contractor shall submit detailed Drawings of all electrical equipment rooms and closets

if the proposed installation layout differs from the construction documents. Physical size of

electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings shall match those of the electrical equipment

that is being submitted for review, i.e.: switchboards, panelboards, transformers, control

panels, etc. Minimum scale: 1/4" = 1'- 0". Revised electrical equipment layouts must be

approved prior to release of order for equipment and prior to installation.

D. The Manufacturer shall recommend the method of anchoring the equipment to the mounting

surface and shall provide the Contractor with the assembly dimensions, weights and

approximate centers of gravity.

E. All re-submittals shall include a cover letter that lists the action taken and revisions made to

each Drawing and equipment data sheet in response to Submittal Review Comments.

Resubmittal packages will not be reviewed unless accompanied by this cover letter. Failure

to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package.

F. Shop Drawings for the following systems must be prepared via a computer aided drafting

(CAD) system for submission by the Contractor. The Engineer in either Autocad Release 14

or DXF file format can provide files of the electrical Contract Documents to the Contractor.

1. Low-voltage lighting control, Section 260926

G. Independent Testing Agency report:

1. Testing Agency shall provide 3 copies of the complete testing report.

2. Test report shall include the following:

a. Summary of Project.

b. Description of equipment.

c. Equipment used to conduct the test.

1) Type.

2) Manufacturer.

3) Model number.

4) Serial number.

5) Date of last calibration.

6) Documentation of calibration leading to NIST standards.

d. Description of test.

e. Test results, as compared to Manufacturers or industry accepted standards and

tolerances.

f. Conclusion and recommendation.

g. Signature of responsible test organization authority.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. Furnish completed test report to Engineer no later than 30 days after completion of

testing, unless otherwise directed.

H. Substitutions:

1. All requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure

outlined in Division 01.

2. Where items are noted as "or equal," a product of equal design, construction and

performance will be considered. Contractor must submit to the Engineer all pertinent test

data, catalog cuts and product information required substantiating that the product is in

fact equal to that specified. Only one substitution will be considered for each product

specified.

3. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes

or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of

quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment, which in the opinion

of the Engineer is equal in quality, utility and appearance, will be approved as

substitutions to that specified.

4. Whenever any material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with a Federal

specification, an ASTM standard, an ANSI specification, UL rating or other association

standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the Manufacturer certifying that

the product complies with the particular standard specification. When requested by the

Engineer, support test data to substantiate compliance shall be submitted by the

Contractor at no additional cost.

5. Substitutions shall be equal, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, to the specified

product. The burden of proof of such shall rest with the Contractor. When the

Architect/Engineer in writing accepts a substitution, it is with the understanding that the

Contractor guaranteed the substituted article or material to be equal to the one specified

and dimensioned to fit within the construction. Approved substitutions shall not relieve

the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the Work or from any

provisions of the Specifications.

6. The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses in connection with the substitution

materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of the substitution on the

Contractor, Subcontractor's or other Contractor's Work. No substitution of material,

processes or equipment shall be permitted without written authorization of the

Architect/Engineer. Any assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution

prior to acceptance by the Engineer are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be so

notified, within sufficient time, as delineated in Division 01, prior to the Bid Opening to

allow the issuance of an Addendum.

2. If, in the event that time does not permit notification or clarification of discrepancies

prior to the Bid Opening, the following shall apply: The Drawings govern in matters of

quantity and the Specifications govern in matters of quality. In the event of conflict

within the Drawings involving quantities or within the Specifications involving quantities



TRUCKEE, CA


or within the Specifications involving quality, the greater quantity and higher quality

shall apply. Such discrepancies shall be noted and clarified in the Contractor's Bid. No

additional allowances will be made because of errors, ambiguities or omissions that

reasonably should have been discovered during the preparation of the Bid.

B. Project conditions:

1. Examination of Project site: The Contractor shall visit the Project site and thoroughly

review the locale, working conditions, conflicting utilities and the conditions in which the

Electrical Work will take place. Verify all existing conditions in the field. No

allowances will be made subsequently for any costs that may be incurred because of any

error or omission due to failure to examine the Project site and to notify the Engineer of

any discrepancies between Contract Documents and actual Project site conditions.

2. Underground Utility Surveys: Prior to commencing any underground work, the

Contractor shall perform independent surveys of the existing underground utilities and

infrastructure in all areas of anticipated underground electrical work.

3. Protection: Keep conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and other openings closed to

prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover fixtures, equipment, devices and apparatus and

protect them against dirt, paint, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and during

construction period. Prior to final acceptance, restore to original condition any fixture,

apparatus or equipment damaged including restoration of damaged factory applied

painted finishes. Protect bright finished surfaces and similar items until in service. No

rust or damage will be permitted.

4. Supervision: Contractor shall personally or through an authorized and competent

representative constantly supervise the Work from beginning to completion and, within

reason, keep the same foreman and workmen on the Project throughout the Project

duration.

C. Preparation:

1. Drawings:

a. Layout: General layout indicated on the Drawings shall be followed except where

other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

b. Accuracy: Drawings for the Work under this Section are essentially diagrammatic

within the constraints of the symbology applied.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide Project Record Drawings as described herein:

1. Drawings shall fully represent installed conditions including actual locations of outlets,

true panelboard connections following phase balancing routines, correct conduit and wire

sizing as well as routing, revised fixture schedule listing Manufacturers and products

actually installed and revised panel schedules. Contractor shall record all changes in the

Work during the course of construction on blue or black line prints. These prints shall be

made subject of monthly review by the Owner's Representative to ascertain that they are

current. If not current monthly payments may be withheld.

2. Record Drawings shall be the transfer of information on these prints to the construction

documents via computer aided drafting (CAD) process. A set of CAD files of the



TRUCKEE, CA


electrical documents will be provided to the Contractor in either Autocad Release 14 or

DXF file format.

3. Record drawing submissions shall be provided to the Engineer to review upon the

completion of the following phases of Work:

a. All underground installation.

b. Building electrical rough-in.

c. Final electrical installation.

4. Include in the record drawing submission shop drawings with all updated installation

information.

5. A single set of half size prints of the Record Drawings shall be submitted for review.

Upon receipt of the Engineer's review comments, corrections shall be made and the

Contractor shall provide the following:

a. Two sets of full size prints.

b. Four sets of half size prints.

c. One set of full size reproducibles.

d. DXF files of Drawings.

B. Panel schedules:

1. Typewritten panel schedules shall be provided for panelboards indicating the loads

served and the correct branch circuit number. Schedules shall be prepared on forms

provided by the Manufacturer and inserted in the pocket of the inner door of each

panelboard.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prior to Project closeout furnish to the Owner, six (6) hard back 3-ring binders containing all

bulletins, operation and maintenance instructions, part lists, service telephone numbers and

other pertinent information as noted in each Section all equipment furnished under Division

26. Binders shall be indexed into Division Sections and labeled for easy reference. Bulletins

containing more information than the equipment concerned shall be properly stripped and

assembled.

1.8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SERVICES

A. Overview: Contractor shall provide a Project Manager/Engineer for the duration of the

Project to coordinate the Division 26 Work with all other trades. Coordination services,

procedures and documentation responsibility shall include, but shall not be limited to the

items listed in this Section.

B. Review of Shop Drawings prepared by other Subcontractors:

1. Obtain copies of all Shop Drawings for equipment provided by others that require

electrical service connections or interface with Division 26 Work.

2. Perform a thorough review of the Shop Drawings to confirm compliance with the service

requirements contained in the Division 26 Contract Documents. Document any

discrepancy or deviation as follows:



TRUCKEE, CA


a. Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy.

b. Provide a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy.

3. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

a. Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material.

b. Date of your review.

c. Indication if follow-up coordination is required.

C. Request for information (RFI):

1. Thoroughly review the Contract Documents prior to the preparation and submission of an

RFI. If an RFI is submitted, attach 8 1/2" x 11" copies of all relevant documents to

clarify the issue.

2. Prepare and maintain an RFI log indicating the following information:

a. RFI number and brief summary of the issue.

b. Date of issuance and receipt of response.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Contractor shall verify lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be

responsible for the accuracy of the setting out of Work and for its strict conformance with

existing conditions at the Project site.

B. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements for

the actual equipment to be connected.

C. Refer to equipment specification in Divisions 22 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Preparation, sequencing, handling and installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's

written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or accepted

equal except as otherwise specified. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Shop Drawings prepared by Manufacturer.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for electrical installations.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-

in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring

positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting height is not detailed or dimensioned, contact the Architect for direction

prior to proceeding with rough-in.



TRUCKEE, CA


7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised

service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each

service.

8. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are indicated

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement

of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment and materials installations with other building

components.

12. Provide access panel or doors where devices or equipment are concealed behind finished

surfaces. Furnish and install access doors per the requirements of Division 08.

13. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to other systems

that are required to maintain a specified slope.

14. Conform to the National Electrical Contractors’ Association "Standard of Installation" for

general installation practice.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING, PAINTING AND SEALING

A. Structural members shall in no case be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that will

impair their structural value. Cutting of holes, if required, shall be done with core drill and

only with the approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer.

B. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent

installations.

C. Application of joint sealers:

1. General: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturers' printed application instructions

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent

requirements apply.

2. Installation of fire-stopping sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and other

accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and

walls, to provide fire-stops and fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly

in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by

testing and inspecting agency.


A. General testing requirements:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. The purpose of testing is to ensure that all tested electrical equipment, both Contractor

and Owner supplied, is operational and within industry and Manufacturer’s tolerances

and is installed in accordance with design Specifications.

2. Tests and inspections shall determine suitability for energization.

3. Perform tests in presence of the Owner's Representative and furnish test equipment,

facilities and technical personnel required to perform tests.

4. Tests shall be conducted during the construction period and at completion to determine

conformity with applicable codes and with these Specifications.

B. Tests: In addition to specific system test described elsewhere, tests shall include:

1. Equipment operations: Test motors for correct operation and rotation.

2. Lighting control circuits: Test lighting circuits for correct operation through their control

devices.

3. Alarm and interlock systems: Produce malfunction symptoms in operating systems to

test alarm and interlock systems. In addition, all specific tests described in the fire alarm

system shall be performed.

4. Circuit numbering verification: Select on a random basis various circuit breakers in the

panelboards and cycle them on and off to verify compliance of the typed panel directories

with actual field wiring.

5. Voltage check:

a. At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the system that

has been installed under this Contract. During test, energize all installed loads.

b. Adjust taps on transformers to give proper voltage, which is 118 to 122 volts for 120

volt nominal systems and proportionately equivalent for higher voltage systems. If

proper voltage cannot be obtained, inform the Owner and the serving Utility

Company.

C. Contractor shall provide test power required when testing equipment before service

energization and coordinate availability of test power with General Contractor after service

energization. The Contractor shall provide any specialized test power as needed or specified

herein.

D. Testing safety and precautions:

1. Safety practices shall include the following requirements:

a. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.

b. OSHA.

c. NSC.

d. NFPA 70E.

2. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized and grounded except where

otherwise specifically required ungrounded by test procedure.

E. Calibration of test equipment:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. Testing Agency shall have calibration program that assures test instruments are

maintained within rated accuracy.

2. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

a. Field instruments: Analog, 6 month maximum; Digital, 12 months maximum.

b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months.

c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor.

3. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment.

4. Records, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested, must be kept

up-to-date.

5. Up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures shall be maintained for test

instrument.

6. Calibration standards shall be of higher accuracy than instrument tested.

7. Equipment used for field testing shall be more accurate than instrument being tested.

F. Coordinate with General Contractor regarding testing schedule and availability of equipment

ready for testing.

G. Notify Owner and Engineer one week in advance of any testing.

H. Any products which fail during the tests or are ruled unsatisfactory by the Owner's

Representative shall be replaced, repaired or corrected as prescribed by the Owner's

Representative at the expense of the Contractor. Tests shall be performed after repairs,

replacements or corrections until satisfactory performance is demonstrated.

I. Testing Agency shall maintain written record of tests and shall assemble and certify final test

report. All test results/reports shall be submitted to the Electrical Engineer for review.

J. Include all test results in the maintenance manuals.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Prior to energizing of electrical equipment, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior

of enclosures from construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's approved

methods and materials.

B. Upon completion of Project, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

both the interior and exterior of all electrical equipment per Manufacturers approved methods

and materials. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.

C. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.

3.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Training: At the time of completion, a period of not less than 4 hours shall be allotted by the

Contractor for instruction of building operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all

systems. This 2 hours training is in addition to any instruction time called out in the

Specifications for specific systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the

Contractor making all necessary arrangements with Manufacturer’s Representative. The

equipment Manufacturer shall be requested to provide product literature and application



TRUCKEE, CA


guides for the users' reference. Costs, if any, for the above services shall be paid by the

Contractor.

B. Special tools: Provide one of each tool required for proper operation and maintenance of the

equipment provided under this Section. All tools shall be delivered to the Owner at the

Project completion.

C. Keying: Provide two keys for each lock furnished under this Section and turn over to Owner.




TRUCKEE, CA

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260090 - 1

SECTION 260090 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work included: Labor and equipment necessary to complete the demolition required for the

item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:

1. Selective Electrical demolition

2. Selective Telecommunications demolition

3. Selective Fire Life Safety demolition


A. Disconnection, removal and relocation of all wiring, light fixtures, outlets, conduit, devices,

panels and all other types of equipment as described on Drawings.

B. Purpose is to remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment necessary for patching and extending Work, as specified in other

Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly review conditions in the area of demolition prior to commencing

Work to ensure complete understanding of existing installation in relationship to demolition

Work.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Remove all wiring, light fixtures, outlets, conduit, fire alarm panels, security panels, devices

and all other types of equipment indicated to be removed. Devices that are to be removed

may require reworking conduit and wiring in order to maintain service to other devices. If

removed devices are on walls or ceilings that are to remain, blank coverplates are to be

installed on outlet boxes.

B. Where remodeling interferes with circuits in areas that are otherwise undisturbed, circuits

shall be reworked as required.

C. Existing devices and circuiting that are indicated are indicated only for informational

purposes. Contractor shall visit the Project site and shall verify conditions as they exist and

shall remove, relocate and/or rework any electrical equipment or circuits affected (whether

indicated or not) due to removal of existing walls, ceilings, etc. Coordinate all Work with

that of other trades.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. All equipment, fixtures, devices, etc., which are removed shall be delivered to the Owner for

disposition. All items which are removed and not wanted by the Owner and which are not

reused shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally removed from the

Project site.

E. Cutting and patching necessary for the removal of Electrical, communication and Fire Life

Safety Work shall be included.

F. Remove and replace lighting fixtures, rework, relocate or replace conduit and wiring and do

other Work required by the installation of new ductwork, piping, etc., above the ceiling.

Coordinate with other trades and verify the extent of the Work.

3.3 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned light fixtures. Remove conduits, wiring, boxes, brackets,

stems, hangers and other accessories.

B. All lamps and ballasts shall be recycled/disposed of, in accordance with California DTSC and

EPA Guidelines.

3.4 COMMUNICATIONS

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned equipment racks, patch panels, termination hardware,

intercom headend, clock headend, associated devices and panels. Remove conduits, wiring,

boxes, brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.

3.5 FIRE ALARM

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned fire alarm devices and panels. Remove conduits, wiring,

boxes, brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.

3.6 SECURITY ALARM

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned security alarm devices and panels. Remove conduits,

wiring, boxes, brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.

3.7 OUTLETS

A. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit

servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that

are not removed.

3.8 CONDUIT

A. Remove abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes.

Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces.

3.9 WIRING

A. Removed abandoned wiring to source of supply

3.10 EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Electrical distribution system: Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.

Obtain permission from Owner's designated representative at least 72 hours before partially

or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to

maintain service in areas adjacent to Work area.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Fire alarm system: Maintain the existing system in service. Disable system only to make

temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to Work area(s). Notify Owner

and Fire Supervisory Service at least 72 hours before partially or completely disabling the

system.

C. Security alarm system: Maintain the existing system in service. Disable system only to make

temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to Work area(s). Notify Owner

and Fire Supervisory Service at least 72 hours before partially or completely disabling the

system.

D. Telephone system: Maintain the existing system in service throughout construction. Disable

system only to make temporary connections where necessary to maintain service in areas

adjacent to Work area(s). Notify Owner and Telephone Utility at least 72 work week hours

before partially or completely disabling the system.

E. Intercom and clock system: Maintain the existing system in service if required. Disable

system only to make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to Work

area(s). Notify Owner and at least 72 hours before partially or completely disabling the

system.

3.11 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that shall remain.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace

damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed

circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaries: Remove lenses and lamps and clean all exposed surfaces and lenses.




TRUCKEE, CA

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 – BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation

required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:

1. Building wire.

2. Cable.

3. Wiring connections and terminations.

B. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related

Work and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to

produce a complete installation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards

except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. Federal Specifications (FS):

FS J-C-30A; Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation).

FS W-S-610C; Splice Conductor.

FS HH-I-595C; Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

UL 44; Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.

UL 62; Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire.

UL 83; Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.

UL 183; Manufactured Wiring Systems.

UL 310; Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals.

UL 486A & B; Wire Connectors.

UL 486C; Splicing Wire Connectors.



TRUCKEE, CA


UL 486D; Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in

Damp or Wet Locations.

UL 493; Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch

Circuit Cables.

UL 510; Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape.

UL 854; Service-Entrance Cables.

UL 1569; Metal-Clad Cables.

UL 1581; Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible

Cords.

3. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA):

NEMA WC-5; Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission

and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

NEMA WC-7; Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated Wire and

Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical

Energy.

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

IEEE 82; Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated

Conductors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical

Requirements, the following items:

1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all

physical and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all

listed standards.

2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the

proposed application.

3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.

4. Final test results.




TRUCKEE, CA


A. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new,

unused and currently under production.

B. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless

otherwise submitted.

C. Independent Testing Agency qualifications: Refer to Section 260010: Basic Electrical

Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance

with all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1. Building wire:

a. America Insulated Wire Corp.

b. Rome Cable.

c. Southwire Company

2. Metal-Clad:

a. AFC Cable Systems

b. Southwire Company

c. Encore Wire

3. Flexible Cords and Cables:

PART 3 - CAROL CABLE COMPANY.

a. PWC Corp.

b. ITT Royal Electric.

2. Wiring connectors and terminations:

a. 3M Company.

b. Ideal.

c. Blackburn-Holub.

d. Burndy.



TRUCKEE, CA


e. Thomas & Betts Corp.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.

3.2 BUILDING WIRE

A. Conductor material:

1. Provide annealed copper for all wire, conductor and cable, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Wire AWG #10 and larger shall be stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wire AWG #12 and smaller may be solid, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Insulation material:

1. All insulated wire, conductor and cable shall be 600 volt rated unless otherwise

noted on the Drawings.

2. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5.

3. Rubber-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 3.

4. Feeders and branch circuits larger than 6 AWG: Type THW, XHHW or dual rated

THHN/THWN.

5. Feeders and branch circuits 6 AWG and smaller: Type TW, THW, XHHW or dual

rated THHN/THWN.

6. Service Entrance: Type RHW or THWN.

7. Control Circuits: Type THW or dual rated THHN/THWN.

8. Identify system conductors as to voltage and phase connections by means of color-

impregnated insulation.

3.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. MC Cable shall be an armored assembly of two or more dual rated THHN/THWN

conductors. A full sized green insulated ground wire.

B. MC Cable sheath shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strip,

spirally wound and formed to provide an interlocking design.

C. Conductors shall be color-coded for the correct phase and voltage as specified herein.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. Fittings: Connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast

malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Fittings shall be

UL listed for use with MC Cable type specified.

3.4 ARMORED CABLE (AC)

A. AC cable is not allowed on this project.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES (TYPE'S')

A. Provide flexible cords and cables of size, type and arrangement as indicated on the

Drawings.

B. Type 'S' flexible cords and cables shall be manufactured in accordance with NEC Article

400 and composed of two or more conductors and a full size green insulated ground

wire with an outer jacket of rubber or neoprene as noted.

C. Flexible cords and cables shall be fitted with wire mesh strain relief grips either as an

integral component of the connector or as an independently supported unit.

D. Suspended flexible cords and cables shall incorporate safety spring(s) unless otherwise

noted.

3.6 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Bolted pressure connectors: Provide wide range-taking connectors with cast bronze

compression bolts, designed for parallel taps, tees, crosses or end-to-end connections.

B. Electrical spring wire connectors:

1. Provide multi-part construction incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated square

cross-section steel spring enclosed in a steel sheet with an outer jacket of plastic and

insulating skirt.

2. Self-striping pigtail and tap U-contact connectors shall not be used.

C. Push-in wire connectors:

1. Multi-port push-in wire connectors are not allowed on this project.

D. Compression type terminating lugs:

1. Provide tin-plated copper high-compression type lugs for installation with hand or

hydraulically operated circumference-crimping tools and dies as stipulated by the

lug Manufacturer or as indicated on Drawings. Notch or single point type crimping

is NOT acceptable.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Two hole, long barrel lugs shall be provided for size (4/0) and larger wire where

terminated to bus bars. Use minimum of three crimps per lug, on sizes where

possible.

E. Splicing and insulating tape: Provide black, ultraviolet proof, self-extinguishing, 7 mil

thick vinyl general purpose electrical tape with a dielectric strength of 10,000 volts

suitable for temperatures from minus 18 degrees C to 105 degrees C. Federal Spec. HH-

I-595, Scotch 33+ or equal minimum.

F. Insulating putty:

1. Provide pads or rolls of non-corrosive, self-fusing, one-eighth inch thick rubber

putty with PVC backing sheet. Scotch vinyl mastic pads and roll or equal.

2. Use putty suitable for temperatures from minus 17.8 degrees C to 37.8 degrees C

with a dielectric strength of 570-volts/mil minimum.

G. Insulating resin:

1. Provide two-part liquid epoxy resin with resin and catalyst in pre-measured, sealed

mixing pouch. Scotchcast 4 or equal for wet or underground vaults, boxes, etc.

splices or terminations.

2. Use resin with a set up time of approximately 30 minutes at 21.1 degrees C and with

thermal and dielectric properties equal to the insulating properties of the cables

immersed in the resin.

H. Terminal strips:

1. Provide box type terminal strips in the required quantity plus 25% spare. Install in

continuous rows in terminal cabinets.

2. Use the box type terminal strips with barrier open backs and with ampere ratings as

required.

3. Identify all terminals with numbering sequence being used for a particular system.

I. Crimp type connectors:

1. Provide insulated fork or ring crimp terminals with tinned electrolytic copper-brazed

barrel with funnel wire entry and insulation support

2. Fasten crimp type connectors or terminals using a crimping tool recommended by

the connector Manufacturer.

3. Provide insulated overlap splices with tinned seamless electrolytic copper barrel

with funnel wire entry and insulation support.



TRUCKEE, CA


4. Provide insulated butt splices with tinned seamless electrolytic copper barrel with

center stop; funnel wire entry and insulation support.

J. Cable ties: Provide harnessing and point-to-point wire bundling with nylon cable ties.

All cable ties shall be installed using tool supplied by Manufacturer of ties.

K. Wire lubricating compound:

1. UL listed for the wire insulation and conduit type and shall not harden or become

adhesive.

2. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.

L. Bolt termination hardware:

1. Bolts shall be plated, medium carbon steel heat-treated, quenched and tempered

equal to ASTM A-325 or SAE grade 5; or silicon bronze alloy ASTM B-9954 Type

B.

2. Nuts shall be heavy semi-finished hexagon, conforming to ANSI B18.2.2, threads to

be unified coarse series (UNC), class 2B steel or silicon bronze alloy.

3. Flat washers shall be steel or silicon bronze, Type A plain standard wide series,

confirming to ANSI B27.2. SAE or narrow series shall not be used.

4. Belleville conical spring washers shall be hardened steel, cadmium plated or silicon

bronze.

5. Each bolt connecting lug(s) to a terminal or bus shall not carry current exceeding the

following values:

a. 1/4" bolt - 125 amps

b. 5/16" bolt - 175 amps

c. 3/8" bolt - 225 amps

d. 1/2" bolt - 300 amps

e. 5/8" bolt - 375 amps

f. 3/4" bolt - 450 amps

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 EXAMINATION



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of wire and

cable installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.

Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

4.2 APPLICATION

A. All wire, conductor and cable with their respective connectors, fittings and supports

shall be UL listed for the installed application and ambient condition.

B. Feeders and branch circuits in wet locations shall be rated 75 degree C.

C. Feeders and branch circuits in dry locations shall be rated 90 degree C.

D. Minimum conductor size:

1. Provide minimum AWG #12 for all power and lighting branch circuits.

2. Provide minimum AWG #14 for all line voltage signal and control wiring unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Color coding:

1. For 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire systems:

a. Phase A - Black

b. Phase B - Red

c. Phase C - Blue

d. Neutral - White

e. Ground - Green

2. For 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire systems:

a. Phase A - Brown

b. Phase B - Orange

c. Phase C - Yellow

d. Neutral - Gray

e. Ground - Green

3. Switch leg individually installed shall be the same color as the branch circuit to

which they are connected, unless otherwise noted.



TRUCKEE, CA


4. Travelers for 3-way and 4-way switches shall be a distinct color and pulled with the

circuit switch leg or neutral.

4.3 WIRING METHODS

A. Install wires and cables in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as

indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install all single conductors in raceway system, unless otherwise noted.

C. Parallel circuit conductors and terminations shall be equal in length and identical in all

ways.

D. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the

conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with

conductors larger than #10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so

there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

E. Provide #10 AWG pig tails on all 20A and 30A wiring devices served by #8 AWG

conductors and larger.

F. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes or

handholes. Group and bundle with tie wrap each neutral with its associated phase

conductor where more than one neutral is present in a conduit.

G. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the CEC Article 300.

Provide split wedge type fittings, which firmly clamp each individual cable and tighten

due to cable weight.

H. Neatly form, train and tie the cables in individual circuits. For panelboards, cabinets,

wireways, switches and equipment assemblies.

I. Seal cable or wire, entering a building from underground between the wire or cable and

conduit, where it exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound, i.e. duct

seal or equal.

J. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of size, ampacity

rating, material, type and class for applications and for services indicated. Use

connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than the wires that are being

terminated.

K. Stranded wire shall be terminated using fitting, lugs or devices listed for the application.

However, in no case shall stranded wire be terminated solely by wrapping it around a

screw or bolt.

L. Flexible cords and cables supplied, as part of a pre-manufacturer fixture or unit

assembly shall be installed according to Manufacturers published installation

instructions.



TRUCKEE, CA


4.4 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS

A. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the

weather and all mechanical Work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Pull

all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Exercise care in pulling conductors so

that insulation is not damaged. Use UL listed, non-petroleum base and insulating type

pulling compound as needed.

B. Completely mandrel all underground or concrete encased conduits prior to installing

conductors.

C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

D. Do not use block and tackle, power driven winch or other mechanical means for pulling

conductors of size smaller than AWG #1.

E. Wire pulling:

1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation

during pulling of cables.

2. Use rope made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.

3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling

eyes attached directly to the conductors.

4. Pull in together multiple conductors or cables in a single conduit.

F. Install and test all cables in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and warranty.

4.5 MC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Use of MC Cable is restricted as follows:

1. Do not use MC Cable for feeders.

2. Do not use MC Cable for homeruns back to panel.

3. Do not install MC Cable above inaccessible ceiling space.

4. Do not install exposed MC Cable.

B. Install MC Cable in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions and in strict

accordance with NEC Article 330. Follow Manufacturer's explicit instructions when

connecting the cable to fittings and boxes. Connectors shall be firmly secured to the

cable, but not over-tightened. Connector shall be firmly attached to the metal boxes.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. Support cables every 6 feet and within 12 inches of boxes, per CEC Article 330, using

separate spring metal clip or metal cable ties (not steel tie wire) for each cable. Cables

shall not be bundled together.

D. Suspended ceiling drop wire may be used to directly support a maximum of two

separate MC Cables.

E. Provide separate drop wire above accessible ceiling, to support more than (2) two MC

Cables.

F. Do not rest cables on ceiling tiles or allow contact with mechanical piping systems.

G. Bend the cable per NEC Article 330.

H. Provide separate sleeves and/or fire barriers where cable penetrated firewalls, unless

cable is UL listed for the application.

4.6 WIRE SPLICES, JOINTS AND TERMINATION

A. Join and terminate wire, conductors and cables in accordance with UL 486A, C, NEC

and Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

C. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without

perceptible temperature rise.

D. Splices and terminations shall be made mechanically and electrically secure.

E. Where it's determined that unsatisfactory splice or terminations have been installed,

remove the devices and install approved devices at no addition cost.

F. Terminate wires in Terminal Cabinets, relay and contactor panels, etc. using terminal

strip connectors.

G. Insulate spare conductors with electrical tape and leave sufficient length to terminate

anywhere in the panel or cabinet.

H. Install cable ties and maintain harnessing.

I. Encapsulate splices in exterior outlets, pullboxes and junction boxes using specified

insulating resin kits. Make all splices watertight for exterior equipment and equipment

in pump rooms.

J. Connections/splices in underground pull boxes shall be watertight.

K. Make up all splices and taps in accessible junction or outlet boxes with connectors as

specified herein. Pigtails and taps shall be the same color as the feed conductor. Form



TRUCKEE, CA


conductor prior to cutting and provide at least six (6) inches of tail and neatly packed in

box after splice is made up.

L. Branch circuits (#10 AWG and smaller):

1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable spring pressure cable type, 600 volt,

105-degree C. with integral insulation, approved for copper conductors.

2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.

3. The number, size and combination of conductors as listed on the Manufacturers

packaging shall be strictly complied with.

M. Feeder circuits: (#6 to 750 MCM)

1. Join or tap conductors from #6 AWG to 750 MCM using bolted pressure connectors

or insulate mechanical compression (hi-press) taps with pre-molded, snap-on

insulating boots or specified conformable insulating pad and over wrapped with two

half-lapped layers of vinyl insulating tape starting and ending at the middle of the

joint.

2. Terminate conductors from size #6 AWG to 750 MCM copper using bolted pressure

or mechanical compression lugs in accordance with Manufacturer recommendation

or as specified elsewhere.

3. Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall

have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire.

4. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location,

voltage and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the conductor level that

is being joined.

N. Termination hardware assemblies:

1. AL/CU lugs connected to aluminum plated or copper buss, shall be secured using a

steel bolt, flat washer (two per bolt), Belleville washer and nut.

2. Copper lugs connected to copper bus, shall be secured using silicon bronze alloy

bolt, flat washer (two per bolt), Belleville washer and nut.

3. The crown of Belleville washers shall be under the nut.

4. Bolt assemblies shall be torque to Manufacturer recommendation. Where

manufacture recommendation are not obtainable, the following values shall be used:

a. 1/4" - 20 bolt at 80-inch pounds torque.

b. 5/16" - 18 bolt at 180-inch pounds torque.



TRUCKEE, CA


c. 3/8" - 16 bolt at 20-foot pounds torque.

d. 1/2" - 13 bolt at 40-foot pounds torque.

e. 5/8" - 11 bolt at 55-foot pounds torque.

f. 3/4" - 10 bolt at 158-foot pounds torque.

4.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Section 260553: Electrical Identification for additional requirements.

B. Securely tag all branch circuits. Mark conductors with specified vinyl wrap-around

markers. Where more than two conductors run through a single outlet, mark each

conductor with the corresponding circuit number.

C. Color code conductors size #8 and larger using specified phase color markers and

identification tags.

D. Provide all terminal strips with each individual terminal identified using specified vinyl

markers.

E. In manholes, pullboxes and handholes, provide tags of the embossed brass type and also

show the cable type and voltage rating. Attach the tags to the cables with slip-free

plastic cable lacing units.


A. Independent testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent

Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing required herein.

Independent Testing Agency shall meet the requirements as outlined in Section 260010:

Basic Electrical Requirements.

B. Prefunctional testing:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare cable data with Contract Documents.

b. Inspect exposed sections of wires and cables for physical damage and proper

connections.

c. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections with calibrated torque wrench

in accordance with Manufacturer’s published data.

d. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indention.



TRUCKEE, CA


e. Verify visible cable bend meet or exceed ICEA and Manufacturer’s minimum

allowable bending radius.

f. If cables are terminated through window type current transformers, make an

inspection to verify neutral and ground conductors are correctly placed for

operation of protective devices.

g. Ensure wire and cable identification has been installed as specified herein.

2. Electrical testing:

a. Contractor shall perform feeder and branch circuit insulation test after

installation and prior to connection to utilization devices such as fixtures,

motors or appliances. Testing shall be as follows:

1) 100% of all feeders 100 amp rated and above.

2) 50% of all feeders smaller than 100 amps

3) 10% of all branch circuits at each individual panelboard

b. Perform insulation-resistance test using megohm meter with applied potential of

1000V DC for a continuous duration of 60 seconds. Test conductors phase-to-

phase and phase-to-ground. Conductors shall test free from short-circuit and

ground faults.

c. Perform continuity test of all feeder and branch circuits to ensure correct cable

connections. Test all neutrals for improper grounds.

d. Contractor shall furnish instruments, materials and labor for these tests.

3. Test values: Investigate resistance values less than 50 megohms.

4. Furnish test results in typewritten report form for review and inclusion in the

operation and maintenance manuals.




TRUCKEE, CA

GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Power system grounding.

2. Site lighting grounding.

3. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.

4. Safety ground grid and/or mat.

B. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work


complete installation.

1. Division 05: Building Steel.

2. Division 22: Cold Water Piping.

1.2 REFERENCES




UL 467; Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

IEEE No. 142; Recommended Practice for Grounding of industrial and

Commercial Power Systems.

IEEE No. 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.


A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment as described

herein and indicated on Drawings.

B. Ground each separately derived system neutral as described herein and indicated on

Drawings.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, the complete electrical installation including the neutral

conductor, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, cabinets and equipment shall be

completely and effectively grounded in accordance with all code requirements, whether or

not such connections are specifically indicated or specified.

D. Resistance:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. Resistance from the main switchboard ground bus through the ground electrode to earth

shall not exceed 5 OHMS unless otherwise noted.

2. Resistance from the farthest panelboard, switchboard, etc. ground bus through the ground

electrode to earth shall not exceed 20 OHMS

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical

and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.

2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed

application.



A. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new, unused

and currently under production.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with

all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1. Ground Bushings, Connectors, Jumpers and Bus:

a. O-Z/Gedney.

b. Erico

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.


2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. Refer to Specification Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable for conductor

specifications.

B. General purpose insulated:

1. UL approved and code sized copper conductor, with dual rated THHN/THWN insulation,

color identified green.

2. Where continuous color-coded conductors are not commercially available, provide a

minimum 4" long color band with green, non-aging, plastic tape in accordance with

NEC/CEC.

C. Bare conductors in direct contact with earth or encased in concrete: #2/0 AWG copper

minimum, U.O.N.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. Bonding pigtails: Insulated copper conductor; identified green, sized per code and provide

with termination screw or lug. Provide solid conductors for #10 AWG or smaller and

stranded conductors for #8 AWG or larger.

2.3 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Plated malleable iron or steel body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating

throat and lay-in grounding lug.

2.4 CONNECTIONS TO PIPE

A. For cable to pipe: UL and NEC/CEC approved bolted connection.

2.5 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS OR SPLICES

A. Where required by the Drawings, grounding conductors shall be spliced together, connected

to ground rods or connected to structural steel using exothermic welds or high pressure

compression type connectors.

1. Exothermic welds shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod and for cable

to structural steel surfaces. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type

of weld.

2. High-pressure compression type connectors shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-

ground rod connections.

2.6 EXTRA FLEXIBLE, FLAT BONDING JUMPERS

A. Where required by Code, indicated on the Drawing, and specified herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of grounding

system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding electrodes:

1. Metal underground water pipe: Cold water metal piping system: Where the underground

cold water service line is metal, indirect contact with the earth for 10 feet or more, the

Contractor shall install a grounding electrode conductor from the main incoming cold

water line ahead of the meter and extend to the main building reference ground bus in the

main electrical room. The electrode shall be sized per NEC/CEC Article 250. Electrode

connection should be accessible.

2. Provide additional “supplemental grounding” electrodes, per the CEC.

B. Grounding electrode conductor: Provide grounding electrode conductor as indicated on the

Drawings or sized per NEC/CEC Article 250, whichever is greater.

C. Separately derived electrical system grounding:

1. Ground each separately derived system per requirements in NEC/CEC Article 250 as a

minimum, unless greater requirements are required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

D. Equipment bonding/grounding:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. Provide a NEC/CEC sized insulated copper ground conductor in all 120VAC through 600

VAC feeder and branch circuit distribution conduits and cables.

2. Provide a separate grounding bus at panelboards, switchboards, and motor control

centers. Connect all metallic enclosed equipment so that with maximum fault current

flowing, shall be maintained at not more than 35 volts above ground.

3. Conduit terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at panelboards,

cabinets, gutters, etc. shall have grounding bushings and bonding jumpers installed

interconnecting all such conduits.

4. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, pipe

connections to water meters, dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping system.

5. Provide internal ground wire in flexible conduit connected at each end via grounding

bushing.

6. Provide external ground wire wrapped around flexible conduit and terminate to

connectors designed for the purpose.


A. Independent Testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent

Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing required herein.

B. Pre-functional testing:

1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents for their review prior to the

commencement of ground testing.


a. The Testing Agency shall inspect the grounding electrode and connections prior to

concrete encasement, burial or concealment.

b. Check tightness and welds of all ground conductor terminations.

c. Verify installation complies with the intent of the Contract Documents




TRUCKEE, CA

ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 – ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Conduit supports.


3. Fastening hardware.




1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete. Concrete equipment pads.

2. Division 05: Miscellaneous metals. Hangers for electrical equipment.

3. Division 09: Ceiling suspension systems. Slack fixture support wires.

1.2 REFERENCES




UL 2239; Hardware for the Supports of Conduit, Tubing and Cable.


A. Provide devices specified in this Section and related Sections for support of electrical

equipment furnished and installed under Division 26.

B. Provide support systems that are adequate for the weight of equipment, conduit and wiring to

be supported.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein.


application.





TRUCKEE, CA






C. All exterior exposed hangers, supports, and hardware shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Concrete fasteners:

a. Phillips "Red-Head".

b. Remington.

c. Ramset.

2. Concrete inserts and construction channel:

a. Unistrut Corp.

b. GS Metals "Globe Strut."

c. Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.

3. Conduit straps:

a. O-Z/Gedney.

b. Erico "Caddy" Fastening Products.



2.2 CONCRETE FASTENERS

A. Provide expansion-shield type concrete anchors.

B. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers. Obtain approval by Architect and

Structural Engineer prior to use.

2.3 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Provide pressed galvanized steel, concrete spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting

square or rectangular support nuts of ¼ inch to ½ inch diameter thread for rod support.

2.4 THREADED ROD

A. Provide steel threaded rod, sized for the load unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in

the Specifications.

2.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL

A. Provide 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch (nominal), 12 gauge galvanized steel channel with 17/32-

inch diameter bolt holes and 1-1/2 inch on center in the base of the channel.



TRUCKEE, CA


2.6 CONDUIT STRAPS

A. One hole strap, steel or malleable iron, with malleable iron clamp-back spacer for surface

mounted wall and ceiling applications.

1. Use malleable strap with spacers for exterior and wet locations.

2. Use steel strap without spacers for interior locations.

B. Steel channel conduit strap for support from construction channel.

C. Steel conduit hanger for pendant support with threaded rod

D. Steel wire conduit support strap for support from independent #12 gauge hanger wires.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of supporting

device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 03, Cast-in-place

concrete.

B. Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support the

equipment loads.

C. Where indicated on the Contract Documents, install freestanding electrical equipment on

concrete pads.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install supporting devices as noted throughout Division 26.

B. Electrical device and conduit supports shall be independent of all other system supports that

are not structural elements of the building, unless otherwise noted.

C. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using

precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

D. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster or gypsum board

partitions and walls.

E. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.

F. Use self-drilling anchors, expansion anchor or preset inserts on concrete surfaces.

G. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.

H. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit or acoustical

ceiling suspension wires.

I. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the Architect or

Structural Engineer.

J. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a

neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.



TRUCKEE, CA


K. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide

additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately

support cabinets and panels.

L. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and

panelboards in stud walls.

M. All exterior exposed hangers, supports, and hardware shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and

elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.5 WOOD SUPPORTS

A. Wood supports are not allowed on this project.

3.6 ANCHORAGE

A. All floor mounted, free standing electrical equipment such as transformers, switchboards,

distribution boards, and motor control centers, and etc. shall be securely fastened to the floor

structure.

B. Anchorage of electrical equipment shall comply with the seismic requirements as outlined in

Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.




TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 1

SECTION 260531 – CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings.

2. PVC insulated rigid steel conduit and fittings.

3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.

4. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

5. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

6. Miscellaneous conduit fittings and products.




1. Division 01: Cutting and patching.

2. Division 07: Sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Division 09: Painting. Exposed conduit and other devices.

1.2 REFERENCES




FS WW-C-563; Electrical Metallic Tubing.

FS WW-C-566; Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit.

FS WW-C-581; Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.

FS W-C-1094A; Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid.

2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):

ANSI C80.1; Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.

ANSI C80.3; Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.


UL 1; Flexible Metal Conduit.

UL 6; Rigid Metal Conduit.

UL 360; Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 2

UL 514B; Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings.

UL 635; Insulating Bushings.

UL 797; Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel.

UL 1242; Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel.


NEMA RN1; PVC Externally coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Requirements the following items:




application.

3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide written instructions for raceway

products requiring glues, special tools or specific installation techniques.





otherwise submitted and approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Metal conduit:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.

b. Triangle PWC, Inc.

c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).

f. Alflex Corp.

g. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.

h. Anaconda.

2. Fittings:

a. Appleton Electric Co.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 3

b. OZ/Gedney.

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).

3. Penetration seals:

a. GPT/EnPro (Link Seal)


2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)

A. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL

6.

B. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings and elbows: Only materials of steel or

malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging

into the metal wall of an enclosure.

C. Three piece couplings: Electroplated, cast malleable iron.

D. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C

minimum.

E. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and

steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw.

F. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat

rated 150 degrees C.

G. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.

2.3 PVC INSULATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PVC GRS)

A. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and

NEMA RN-1 with nominal 20 or 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and bonded

to the exterior of the conduit.

B. Fittings: Conduit couplings and connectors shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel

conduit and shall be factory PVC coated with an insulating jacket equivalent to that of the

coated material.

2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Conduit: Shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded continuously

along the longitudinal seam and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Conduit shall conform

to ANSI C80.3 Specifications and shall meet UL requirements.

B. Set screw type couplings: Electroplated, steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed concrete tight.

Use set screw type couplings with four setscrews each of conduit sizes over 2 inches.

Setscrews shall be of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of

conduit for positive grounding.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 4

C. Set screw type connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron UL listed concrete tight

with male hub and insulated plastic throat, 150 degree C temperature rated. Setscrew shall be

same as for couplings.

D. Raintight couplings: Electroplate steel or cast malleable iron; UL listed raintight and

concrete tight, using gland and ring compression type construction.

E. Raintight connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed raintight and

concrete tight, with insulated throat, using gland and ring compression type construction.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strip, spirally

wound and formed to provide an interlocking design and conforming to UL 1. Aluminum

flexible metallic conduit is not allowed on this project.

B. Fittings: Connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable

iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Exception: Pressure cast screw-in

connectors shall be acceptable for fixture connection in suspended ceilings and cut-in outlet

boxes within existing furred walls.

2.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strips, interlocking

spirally wound, covered with extruded liquidtight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and

conforming to UL 360. Provide conduit with a continuous copper-bonding conductor wound

spirally between the convolutions.

B. Fittings: Connector body and gland nut shall be of cadmium plated steel or cast malleable

iron, with tapered, male, threaded hub; insulated throat and neoprene "O" ring gasket

recessed into the face of the stop nut. The clamping gland shall be of molded nylon with an

integral brass push-in ferrule.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS

A. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps

with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings

shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.

B. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC

coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable iron

locking collar.

C. Expansion fittings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel

body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement (2"

in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall be

UL listed for wet or dry locations.

D. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with

internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel

bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75-inch deflection, expansion or contraction in any

direction and allow 30-degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight,

moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit shall

comply with UL467 and UL514.

E. Fire rated penetration seals:



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 5

1. UL building materials directory classified.

2. Conduit penetrations in fire rated separation shall be sealed with a UL classified fill, void

or cavity material.

3. The fire rated sealant material shall be the product best suited for each type of penetration

and may be a caulk, putty, composite sheet or wrap/strip.

F. Standard products not herein specified:

1. Provide listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein specified

for approval prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.

2. Listing shall include Manufacturers name, part numbers and a written description of the

item indicating type of material and construction.

3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material and construction to similar

items herein specified.

G. Under-slab Conduits and Fitting: Provide in accordance with Section 260543 Underground

Ducts and Structures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of conduit system

installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not

commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS) shall be used in the following applications:

1. For feeders and branch circuits located indoors, concealed or exposed above suspended

ceilings, in damp/wet locations, in crawl spaces, in attics, chases, furred spaces,

equipment rooms, loading docks or in hazardous locations in accordance with NEC and

local Codes.

2. For feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete floors and walls when not in

contact with earth.

B. PVC insulated galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in the following applications:

1. Use 40-mil coating for feeders and branch circuits in damp or wet locations.

2. Use 20 or 40 mil for feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete walls or slabs in

contact with earth.

3. Use 40-mil for all below grade penetrations through floor slabs on grade or exterior

walls.

C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC): Shall be used for the same application as galvanized rigid

steel conduit as specified herein, except for hazardous locations prohibited by CEC, NEC or

Local Codes.

D. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall be used exposed or concealed for interior electrical

feeders 4" and smaller, interior power and lighting branch circuits and low tension



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 6

distribution system where run above suspended ceilings, in concrete slabs and walls not in

contact with earth; in stud walls, furred spaces and crawl spaces.

E. Flexible metallic conduit (FMC): Shall be used only in dry locations for connections from an

adjacent outlet box or conduit to all motors, transformers, vibrating equipment or machinery,

controllers, solenoid valves, float and flow switches or similar devices and to lighting fixtures

installed in suspended ceilings, minimum sizes shall be 3/8" for lighting fixtures and control

wiring and 1/2" for motor and transformer connections. U.O.N.

F. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit (LFMC): Shall be used in wet or damp locations for

connections from adjacent outlet box or conduit to all motors, transformers, vibrating

equipment or machinery, controllers, solenoid valves, float and flow switches or similar

devices. These areas are typically food preparation and dishwashing areas, sump wells,

loading docks, pump rooms, exterior areas, etc. Minimum sizes shall be 1/2".

G. Under-slab Conduits and Fitting: Provide in accordance with Section 260543 Underground

Ducts and Structures.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated with

ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas and shall not

unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipe, nor prevent removal of ceiling tiles or panels, nor

block access to mechanical or electrical equipment.

B. Where practical, install conduits in groups in parallel vertical or horizontal runs and at

elevations that avoid unnecessary offsets.

C. All conduits shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of columns and beams,

whether routed exposed, concealed above suspended ceiling or in concrete slabs.

D. Conduits shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot water, steam line or

other heat producing source or three inches from such lines when crossing perpendicular to

the runs.

E. Exposed conduit installation shall not encroach into the ceiling height headroom of walkways

or doorways. Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and below steam

piping.

F. In long runs of conduit, provide sufficient pull boxes inside buildings to facilitate pulling

wires and cables, with spacing not to exceed 150 feet. Support pull boxes from structure

independent of conduit supports. These pull boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.

G. Provide all reasonably inferred standard conduits fitting and products required to complete

conduit installation to meet the intended application whether noted, indicated or specified in

the Contract Documents or not.

H. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum six feet of flexible metal

conduit or MC cable extending from a junction box to the fixture or manufactured wiring

system.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on

Drawings and as specified herein.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 7

B. Minimum Conduit Size: Unless otherwise noted herein or on Drawings, minimum conduit

size shall be 1/2" for interior applications and 3/4" for exterior and underground applications.

C. All conduit sizes indicated on the Drawings are sized for copper conductors with

THHN/THWN insulation. If conductor type or size is changed the Contractor shall be

responsible for resizing conduits upward to meet Code.

D. In general, all conduit work shall be concealed where possible. Exceptions shall be electrical,

communication and mechanical rooms, exposed ceiling areas, and parking garages.

E. Conduit connections to motors and surface cabinets shall be concealed, with the exception of

electrical, communication and mechanical rooms, or unless exposed Work is clearly called

for on the Drawings.

F. Install conduits in complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.

G. Install conduit free from dented, bruises or deformations. Remove and replace any damaged

conduits with new undamaged material.

H. Conduits shall be well protected and tightly covered during construction using metallic

bushings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends.

I. In making joints in rigid steel conduit, ream conduit smooth after cutting and threading. Coat

all field-threaded joints with UL approved conductive type compound to ensure low

resistance ground continuity through conduit and to prevent seizing and corrosion.

J. Clean any conduit in which moisture or any foreign matter has collected before pulling in

conductors. Paint all field-threaded joints to prevent corrosion.

K. In all empty conduits or ducts, install a “True Tape” conduit measuring tape line to provide

overall conduit length for determining length of cables/conductors for future use.

L. Conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout. Install code

size, insulated, copper, green-grounding conductors in all conduit runs for branch circuits and

feeders. This conductor is not indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 260526:

Grounding and Bonding.

M. Metallic conduit shall not be in contact with other dissimilar metal pipes (i.e. plumbing).

N. Make bends with standard conduit bending hand tool or machines. The use of any item not

specifically designed for the bending of electrical conduit is strictly prohibited.

O. A run of conduit between terminations at wire pulling points shall not contain more than the

equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees, total).

P. Conduits shall not be installed on top of the roof or within the roofing material section.

3.5 PENETRATIONS

A. Locate penetrations and holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections

such as footings, beams, wall, etc. Penetrations are acceptable only when the following

occurs:

1. Where indicated on the Structural Drawings.

2. As approved by the Structural Engineer prior to construction and after submittal of

Drawing showing location, size and position of each penetration.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 8

B. Cutting or holes:

1. Cut holes through concrete, masonry block or brick floors and floors of structure with a

diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual

hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Structural Engineer as

required by limited working space. Obtain the approval of the Structural Engineer prior

to drilling through structural sections.

2. Provide sleeves or “can outs” for cast-in-place concrete floors and walls. Following

conduit installation, seal all penetrations using non-iron bearing, chloride free, non-

shrinking, dry-pack grouting compounds; or fire rated penetration-sealing materials.

3. Cut holes for conduit penetrations through non-concrete and non-masonry walls,

partitions or floors with a hole saw. The hole shall be only as large as required to

accommodate the size of the conduit.

4. Provide single piece escutcheon plates around all exposed conduit penetrations in public

places.

C. Sealing:

1. Penetrations shall be constructed in accordance with Section 078400 Fire Stopping and

078413 Penetration Fire Stopping.

2. Non-rated penetrations: Pack opening around conduits with non-flammable insulating

material and seal with gypsum wallboard taping compound.

3. Fire stop: Where conduits, wireways and other electrical raceways pass through fire

rated partitions, walls, smoke partitions or floor; install a UL classified fire stop material

to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely

fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.

D. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal

clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Division 07: Sealants and

Caulking.

1. Install specified watertight conduit entrance seals (Link Seal by GPT/EnPro or approved

equal) at all below grade wall and floor penetrations.

2. Conduits penetrating exterior building walls and building floor slab shall be PVC coated

rigid galvanized steel.

3. For roof penetrations furnish and install roof flashing, counter flashing and pitch-pockets

as specified under Roofing and Sheet Metal Sections of the Specifications.

4. Provide membrane clamps and cable sealing fittings for any conduit that horizontally

penetrates the waterproof membrane.

5. Conduits that horizontally penetrate a waterproof membrane shall fall away from and

below the penetration on the exterior side a minimum of two times the conduit diameters.

3.6 CONCEALED IN CONCRETE

A. Installation of conduit in concrete slabs is not allowed on this project..

B. Installation of conduit in structural concrete must be approved by the Structural Engineer.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 9

C. Where nonmetallic conduit or tubing is used, raceways must be converted to PVC coated

rigid steel conduit before rising above floor except that:

1. Conduit for utility company services shall be in accordance with the utility company’s

requirements.

2. Conduit terminating in free standing equipment may be nonmetallic provided that the pull

distances / calculated pull tension is such that the conduit will not be damaged when

conductors are pulled into the conduit.

D. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved

portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

3.7 MAKE COUPLINGS AND CONNECTIONS WATERTIGHT.TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS

A. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for

the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings

except as otherwise indicated.

B. Raceways shall be joined using specified couplings or transition couplings where dissimilar

raceway systems are joined.

C. Conduits shall be securely fastened to cabinets, boxes and gutters using two locknuts and an

insulating bushing or specified insulated connectors. Where joints cannot be made tight, use

bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where terminations

are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity.

Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. In-

stall grounding bushings or bonding jumpers on all conduits terminating at concentric or

eccentric knockouts.

D. Conduit terminations exposed at weatherproof enclosures and cast outlet boxes shall be made

watertight using specified connectors and hubs.

E. Install specified cable sealing bushings on all conduits originating outside the building walls

and terminating in switchgear, cabinets or gutters inside the building. Install cable sealing

bushings or raceway seal for conduit terminations in all grade level or below grade exterior

pull, junction or outlet boxes.

F. Raceway seal: Inject into wire filled raceways, pre-formulated rigid 2 lbs. density

polyurethane foam which expands a minimum 35 times its original bulk. Foam shall have the

physical properties of water vapor transmission of 1.2 to 3.0 perms; water absorption less

than 2% by volume, fungus and bacterial resistant. Foam shall permanent seal against water,

moisture, insects and rodents. Install raceway sealing foam at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations to prevent passage of water

vapor (such as refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air-conditioned spaces,

etc.).

2. Where conduits enter buildings from below grade.

G. Install expansion couplings where any conduit crosses a building separation or expansion

joint as follows:

1. Conduits three inches and larger, shall be rigidly secured to the building structure on

opposite sides of a building expansion joint and provided with expansion or deflection

couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 10

2. Conduits smaller than three inches shall be rigidly secured to the building structure on

opposite sides of a building expansion joint with junction boxes on both sides of the joint.

Connect conduits to junction boxes with 15 inches of slack flexible conduit. Flexible

conduit shall have a copper green ground-bonding jumper installed. For concrete

embedded conduit, use expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for three

inches and larger conduits.

H. Use short length (maximum of 6ft) of the appropriate FMC or LFMC conduit for connections

to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment,

cramped quarters or noise transmission. Provide liquidtight flexible metal conduit for

installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity-laden atmosphere, corrosive

atmosphere, water hose or spray wash-down operations and locations subject to seepage or

dripping of oil, grease or water. Provide a green ground wire with FMC or LFMC conduit.

3.8 SUPPORTS

A. Provide supports for raceways as specified in Section 260529: Electrical Hangers and

Supports.

B. All raceways systems shall be secured to building structures using specified fasteners, clamps

and hangers spaced according to the NEC.

C. Support single runs of conduit using one-hole pipe straps. Where run horizontally on walls in

damp or wet locations, install "clamp backs" to space conduit off the surface.

D. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported using "trapeze" hangers fabricated from specified

construction channel, mounted to 3/8-inch diameter, and threaded steel rods secured to

building structures. Fasten conduit to construction channel with standard one-hole pipe

clamps or the equivalent. Provide lateral seismic bracing for hangers.

E. Individual 1/2" and 3/4" conduits installed above suspended ceilings may be attached to the

ceiling's hanger wire using spring steel support clips provided that not more than two

conduits are attached to any single support wire.

F. Support exposed vertical conduit runs at each floor level, independent of cabinets or switches

to which they run, by means of acceptable supports.

G. Fasteners and supports in solid masonry and concrete:

1. Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. After concrete installation:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than ¼ inch bolt size and not less than 1-1/8 inch

embedment.

b. Power set fasteners not less than ¼ inch diameter with depth of penetration not less

than three inches.

c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete

ceilings.

H. Hollow masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. Bolts supported only by masonry block are not

acceptable.

I. Metal structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and

approved for the application.



TRUCKEE, CA

CONDUIT 260531 - 11




TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 – BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

2. Pull and junction boxes.




1. Division 08: Access doors. Wall and ceiling access doors.

1.2 REFERENCES


except as otherwise indicated or specified.

1. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturer Association:

ANSI/NEMA OS-1; Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box

Supports.

ANSI/NEMA OS-2; Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box

Supports.

NEMA 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

UL 50; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

UL 514A; Metallic Outlet Boxes.

UL 1773; Termination Boxes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS






application.





TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 2







TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Outlet and junction boxes:

a. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

b. Thomas & Betts Corp.

c. Raco, Inc.

2. Cast boxes:

a. Appleton Electric Co.

b. Crouse-Hinds.

3. Pullboxes:

a. Circle AW Products.

b. Hoffman Engineering Co.


2.2 OUTLET BOXES

A. Standard outlet box:

1. Provide galvanized, one-piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type box of size and

configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings.

2. 4-inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep shall be minimum box size.

3. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.

B. Concrete box:

1. Provide galvanized steel, 4-inch octagon rings with mounting lugs, backplate and adapter

ring as required.

2. Select height as necessary to position knockouts above concrete reinforcing steel.

3. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.

C. Tile box:

1. Provide outlet boxes for installation in tile or concrete block walls.

2. Standard outlet boxes with raised, square corners and device covers are acceptable.

3. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.

D. Cast metal outlet body:

1. Provide four inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs

as required.



TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 4

2. Provide boxes with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and neoprene cover

gaskets.

E. Conduit outlet body: Provide Cadmium plated cast iron alloy, oblong conduit outlet bodies

with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasket, cast iron covers.

2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet metal pull and junction box:

1. Provide standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use

minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 boxes, sized to Code requirements

with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located 6 inches on centers.

2. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast metal pull and junction box: Provide standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes

wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron boxes with bolt-on,

interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets.

C. Flush mounted pullboxes and junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head

cover retaining screws, prime coated.

2.4 FLOOR BOXES

A. Refer to Section 262726: Wiring Devices for floor mounted service boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of box installation

to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not commence

with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install all outlet boxes flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except where boxes are

installed in mechanical and electrical rooms, in cabinetry, above accessible ceilings or where

exposed Work is called for on the Drawings.

B. Locate pullboxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above removable ceilings or

exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.

C. Install outlet boxes at the locations and elevations indicated on the Drawings or specified

herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit

coordination requirements of other trades.

D. Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways unless otherwise indicated.

E. Locate outlet boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems, adjacent to

openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures.

F. Do not install outlet boxes back-to-back, separate boxes by at least 6". In fire rated walls

separate boxes by at least 24" and wall stud.

G. Adjust position of outlet boxes in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines.

Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for boxes.



TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 5

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on


B. Locate electrical boxes as indicated on Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire

pulling, equipment connections and Code compliance.

C. Install junction or pullboxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than

360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the

cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.

D. Install raised covers (plaster rings) on all outlet boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended or

exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

E. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

F. Provide cast metal boxes with gasketed cast metal cover plates where boxes are exposed in

damp or wet locations.

G. Provide precast concrete boxes in exterior planting areas, walkways, roads etc.

H. Provide an access panel in permanent ceiling or wall where boxes are installed and will be

inaccessible.

I. For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes to

prevent condensation in boxes.

J. For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and

mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required location

for equipment served.

K. Use conduit outlet bodies to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit

direction only. Do not make splices in conduit outlet bodies.

L. Add additional sheet rock as necessary to maintain original fire rating of walls where boxes

are installed.

M. Install galvanized steel coverplates on boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings

and on surface mounted outlets.

3.4 SUPPORTS

A. Provide boxes installed in metal stud walls with brackets designed for attaching directly to

the studs or mount boxes on specified box supports.

B. Mount boxes, installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster

construction, to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.

C. Support boxes independently of conduit system.

D. Support boxes, installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels, directly

from the structure above wherever pendant mounted lighting fixtures are to be installed from

the box.

E. Support boxes, mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings, directly from the structure

above.



TRUCKEE, CA

BOXES 260533 - 6

F. Box supports between studs shall be adjustable box mounting brace type, manufactured by

Hubbell/Raco or approved equal.




TRUCKEE, CA

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Electrical equipment nameplates.

2. Panelboard directories.

3. Wire and cable identification.

4. Buried electrical line warnings.

5. Junction box identification.

6. Inscribed device coverplates.




1. Division 09: Painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS




2. Schedules for nameplates to be furnished.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Conduit and wire markers:

a. Thomas & Betts Corp.

b. Brady.

c. Griffolyn.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Inscription Tape:

a. Kroy.

b. Merlin.


2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Type NP: Engraved, plastic laminated labels, Signs and Instruction Plates. Engrave stock

melamine plastic laminate 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 square inches or 8

inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved nameplates shall have white letters

and be punched for mechanical fasteners.

B. Color and letter height as specified in Part 3: Execution.

2.3 LEGEND PLATES

A. Type LP: Die-stamped metal legend plate with mounting hole and positioning key for panel

mounted operator devices, i.e. motor control pilot devices, hand-off-auto switches, reset

buttons, etc.

B. Stamped characters to be paint filled.

2.4 BRASS TAGS

A. Type BT: Metal tags with die-stamped legend, punched for fastener.

B. Dimensions: 2" diameter 19 gauge.

2.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES (400 AMP OR LESS)

A. Directories: A 6" x 8" minimum size circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic

covering shall be provided inside the inner panel door.

B. Circuit numbering: Starting at the top, odd numbered circuits in sequence down the left hand

side and even numbered circuits down the right hand side. Multi-section panelboards shall

have continuous consecutive circuit numbers, i.e. Section 1 (circuit numbers 1-42), Section 2

(circuit numbers 43-84), Section 3 (circuit numbers 85-126).

2.6 WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKERS

A. Provide self-adhering, pre-printed, machine printable or write-on, self-laminating vinyl wrap

around strips. Blank markers shall be inscribed using the printer or pen recommended by

Manufacturer for this purpose.

2.7 CONDUCTOR PHASE MARKERS

A. Colored vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3/4" wide, for identification of phase conductors. Scotch

35 Brand Tape or equal.

2.8 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKER

A. 6-inch wide, yellow polyethylene tape, with continuous black imprinting reading "Caution -

Buried Electric Line Below".

2.9 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATES

A. Coverplate material shall be as specified in Section 262726: Wiring Devices.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Methods of inscription: (Unless otherwise noted)

1. Type-on-tape:

a. Imprinted or thermal transfer characters onto tape lettering system.

b. Tape trimmer.

c. Matte finish spray-on clear coating.

2. Engraving:

a. 1/8" high letters.

b. Paint filled letters finished in black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of identification

device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.


3.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Installation:

1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

3. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.

B. Provide type 'NP' color coded nameplates that present, as applicable, the following

information:

1. Equipment designations as indicated on the drawings.

2. Amperage, KVA or horsepower rating, where applicable.

3. Voltage or signal system name.

4. Source of power or control.

5. Examples:

a. Boards: EHD2A; 1200A; 277/480V, 3PH, 4W; Served from: ATS1A

b. Transformers: ETX2A; 150KVA; 480V pri. - 120/208V, 3PH, 4W sec.; Served

from: EHD2A; Load Served: EL2A

c. Disconnects or Individual Motor Starters: EF-1; 20HP; 480V,3PH,3W; Served

from MCC1A

d. Signal: STB3C; Public Address System; Served from STB2C

C. Nameplates for normal power system distribution equipment and devices are to be black.

Nameplates for standby and emergency power distribution equipment are to be red.

D. Minimum letter height shall be as follows:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. For panelboards, switchboards, battery panels motor control center, etc.: ½ inch letters to

identify equipment designation. Use ¼ inch letters to identify voltage, phase, wires, etc.

2. For individual circuit breakers, switches and motor starters in panelboards, switchboards

and motor control centers use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8-

inch letters to identify all other.

3. For individual mounted circuit breakers, disconnect switches, enclosed switches and

motor starters use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8" letters to

identify all other.

4. For transformers use 1/2 inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use ¼ inch

letters to identify primary and secondary voltages, etc.

5. For equipment cabinets, terminal cabinets, control panels and other cabinet enclosed

apparatus use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation.

3.3 LEGEND PLATES

A. Provide panel-mounted operators devices such as pilot lights, reset buttons, “HAND-OFF-

AUTO” switches, etc.

3.4 BRASS TAGS

A. Provide type BT tags for individual ground conductors to exposed ground bus indicating

connection i.e. "UFER", "Cold water bond", etc.

B. Provide tags for all feeder cables in underground vaults and pull boxes.

C. Provide tags for empty conduits in underground vault, pull boxes and stubs.

3.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES (400 AMP OR LESS)

A. Provide typewritten directories arranged in numerical order denoting loads served by room

number or area for each circuit.

B. Verify room numbers or area designation with Project Manager.

C. Mount panelboard directories in a minimum 6" x 8" metal frame under clear plastic cover

inside every panelboard.

3.6 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboards, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes

and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting

circuits and with control wire number as indicated on equipment Manufacturer's Shop

Drawings for control wiring.

B. Provide colored phase markers for conductors as noted in Section 260519: Building Wire

and Cable. Apply colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance

of 3 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last

two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Do not cover cable

identification markings by taping.

3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKERS

A. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal and communications lines,

install continuous underground plastic line marker, located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches



TRUCKEE, CA


below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line marker.

3.8 JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION

A. The cover of junction, pull and connection boxes for both power and signal systems, located

above suspended ceilings and below ceilings in non-public areas, shall be clearly marked

with a permanent ink felt pen. Identify the circuit(s) (panel designation and circuit numbers)

contained in each box, unless otherwise noted or specified.

3.9 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATE

A. General:

1. Lettering type: Helvetica, 12 point or 1/8" high.

2. Color of characters shall be black.

3. Locate the top of the inscription ½” below the top edge of the coverplate.

4. Inscription shall be centered and square with coverplate.

B. Application:

1. Provide inscribed coverplates for devices as outlined below:

a. Receptacles.

b. Outlets in surface raceways.

c. Multi-ganged (four or more) switch arrangement.

d. Special purpose switches, i.e. projection screens, shades, exhaust fans, etc.

e. Telecommunication outlets.

2. Type-on-tape inscriptions shall be provided for the following devices:

a. Receptacles.

b. Outlets in surface raceways.

c. Telecommunication outlets.

3. Engraved inscriptions shall be provided for the following devices:

a. Multi-ganged switches.

b. Special purpose switches.

4. Type-on-tape installation:

a. Tape shall be trimmed to the height of the letters.

b. Trim tape length to 1/4 inch back from each edge of coverplate.

c. Contractor hands shall be clean or covered with surgical type glove prior to

application of tape. Tape installations with visible fingerprints or smudges will not

be acceptable.




TRUCKEE, CA

LOW VOLTAGE NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL 260926 - 1

SECTION 260926 – LOW VOLTAGE NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Room controllers or network power/relay packs.

2. Wallbox dimmers and switches.

3. Occupancy sensors.

4. Daylight sensors.

5. Receptacle control device.

6. I/O modules.

7. Relay panel.

8. BACnet interface module.

9. Emergency lighting control.

10. Network components and cabling.

11. System software.




1. Division 25 - Energy management control system (EMCS): Lighting control interface.

1.2 REFERENCES




NEMA 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

NEMA ICS 1; Industrial Control and Systems.

NEMA ICS 4; Terminal Blocks and Industrial use.

NEMA ICS 6; Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.


UL 50; Cabinets and Boxes.

UL 773A; Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control.

UL 916; Energy Management.



TRUCKEE, CA



A. Provide a complete lighting control system consisting of stand-alone components, capable of

being networked together enabling digital communication. Devices shall be individually

addressable.

B. The lighting control system shall provide time-based, sensor-based (occupancy, daylighting),

and manual (on/off, dimming) lighting control.

C. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to

function in some default capacity even if network connectivity to the greater system is lost.

D. The system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.

E. The system shall not require any centrally hardwired switching equipment.

F. The system shall be capable of wireless, wired, or hybrid wireless/wired architectures.

G. Space Control Requirements: Unless otherwise noted on the plans, provide a minimum

application of lighting controls as follows:

1. Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual or Partial ON functionality in all spaces

except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free

operation is desirable and Automatic ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate.

Provide Manual ON occupancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room,

meeting room, or classroom. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight

may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.

2. Receptacle Control: Provide automatic shut off of non-essential plug loads in all spaces

required by the 2013 Building Energy Efficiency Standards. Provide Automatic-ON of

plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single

shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area.

3. Daylit Areas – Provide daylight-responsive automatic control in all spaces (conditioned

or unconditioned) where daylight contribution is available as defined by the 2013

Building Energy Efficiency Standards :

a. All luminaires within each code-defined primary and secondary daylight zone or

skylit zone shall be controlled separately from luminaires.

b. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric

light) levels that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant

local building energy codes.

c. Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas

marked on drawings.

d. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings.

Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when

daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps

back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full-on prior to dimming.

4. Classrooms shall instead have at least four (4) pre-set lighting scenes unless otherwise

specified, including a scene conducive to AV presentations. Classroom occupancy

sensors shall turn off the room’s HVAC when the space is vacant.



TRUCKEE, CA


5. Spaces with moveable walls shall include controls that can be reconfigured when the

room is partitioned.

1.4 SUBMITTALS





2. Describe system operation, equipment and dimensions and indicate features of each

component.


application.

4. Shop Drawings to include:

a. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing location of and conduit routing to all

devices.

b. Point-to-Point wiring diagram in block or riser format showing all low-voltage

lighting control components, conduit and wire types and sizes with cable legend.

5. Furnish structural calculations for equipment anchorage as described in Section 260010:



7. Complete bill of materials listing all components.

8. Warranty.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section

260010: Basic Electrical Requirements to include the following:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

2. A detailed explanation of the operation of the system.

3. Instructions for routine maintenance.

4. Pictorial parts list and part numbers.

5. Shop drawings to include the following:

a. Floor plans showing lighting fixture layout, and layout of all network lighting control

devices.

b. Show network communication cablings and pre-fabricated lengths.

c. Indicate device addresses.

d. Riser diagram indicating system backbone and headend connections.

6. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributors.

7. Final testing report.



TRUCKEE, CA







1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Addressable lighting control components shall not be delivered to the Project site

until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is

not acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to

Manufacturer at no cost to Owner.

B. Storage: Store in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain

factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water,

construction debris and traffic. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation.

C. Handling: Handle in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to

prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not

be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 5 year parts and labor

warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty

shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.

1.9 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Upon completion of installation, a factory trained dealer service representative shall perform

initial start-up of the dimming system. Sufficient time shall be allowed to properly check the

system out and perform required minor adjustments before the Engineer's witnessed test shall

begin.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Network lighting control system:

a. SensorSwitch “nLight”.

b. Wattstopper “Digital Light Management” (DLM).

c. Douglas “Dialog Room Controller”.

d. Eaton/Cooper “Room Controller”.


2.2 GENERAL

A. All components of the network lighting control system shall connect via Class 2 low voltage

cable; Cat-5 cabling with RJ-45 connectors, or 2-wire non-polarized data line.



TRUCKEE, CA


2.3 ROOM CONTROLLERS OR NETWORK POWER/RELAY PACKS

1. Provide universal voltage (120V or 277V), plenum rated, network room controllers or

power packs for control of each lighting zone indicated on the plans. Quantity of devices

required within each room may vary by manufacturer.

2. The room controller/power pack shall provide Class 2 power to other devices connected

to the system.

3. Each device shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays, rated as follows:

a. 20A Suitable for General Purpose Loads @ 120/277/247VAC

b. 20A Suitable for Standard Ballasts and Tungsten Loads @ 120/277VAC

c. 16A Suitable for Electronic Ballasts @ 120/277VAC

d. 0.5HP @120/277Vac

4. Provide devices with 0-10V control output for dimming applications.

5. The device shall mount to an electrical junction box via threaded chase nipple.

6. Locate room controllers/power packs above accessible ceiling space, preferably in front

of doorway. Identify the location of the device with type-on-tape visible from below the

ceiling.

2.4 WALLBOX DIMMERS AND SWITCHES

A. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.

B. All devices shall provide toggle switch (on/off) control. Dimming control and low

temperature/high humidity operation are available options.

C. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback.

D. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall be made available with custom button labeling

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSOR

A. General:

1. Occupancy sensors shall comply with the latest edition of the California Building Energy

Efficiency Standards, California Building Code, Part 6 and be certified by The California

Energy Commission. All sensors shall be listed in the most current directory of Certified

Occupancy Sensing Devices or be on file with the CEC.

2. Occupancy sensors shall be dual-technology type infrared/ultrasonic.

3. All sensors shall have an adjustable time delay for turning off lights and a sensitivity

adjustment.

4. All sensors shall be ceiling mounted and shall operate at low-voltage, maximum 24VDC

input, 40mA current draw. Sensors shall be powered via the system.

5. Units shall be furnished to cover the areas being controlled. No allowance shall be given

for providing sensors improperly sized for the square footage of the controlled area.

B. Color: Device color shall be white, unless otherwise noted.

C. Ceiling mounted single-directional sensors:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. Sensor shall have a minimum coverage of up to 900 square feet.

2. Operation shall be automatic "ON" and automatic "OFF".

3. Time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. Set adjustment at 10 minutes.

Set sensitivity adjustment at maximum.

4. For use in small office areas.

D. Ceiling mounted omnidirectional sensors:

1. Sensor shall have a minimum coverage of up to 1000 square feet.

2. Operation shall be automatic "ON" and automatic "OFF".

3. Time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 15 minutes. Set adjustment at 10 minutes.

Set sensitivity adjustment at maximum.

4. For use in larger open office areas.

2.6 DAYLIGHT SENSOR

A. Interior day-light harvesting dimming control sensors:

1. Automatically dims 0–10VDC fluorescent dimming ballasts.

2. Closed loop control for natural daylight harvesting.

3. The sensor shall continuously monitor the ambient light level.

4. One sensor shall permit different outputs to switch and/or control light levels as ambient

light changes. Light levels shall be controlled by ‘sensor only’ or in combination with a

time schedule or with a dimming switch.

5. Sensor shall be capable of setting a maximum light level which cannot be exceeded

during Natural Daylight operations.

6. Dimming sinks up to 20mA.

7. Self-calibrating set-points.

8. Digital set-point control.

9. Push-button programmable.

10. Green LED status indicator.

11. 100 hour lamp burn-in timer mode.

2.7 RECEPTACLE CONTROL DEVICE

1. Provide a networked single-relay controller or power pack for control of 120V

receptacles where required by the 2013 Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

Receptacle control may be accomplished by a relay in the Room Controller if option is

available from the manufacturer.

2.8 INPUT/OUTPUT “I/O” MODULES

A. General:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. The universal I/O module provides an interface between lighting components such as

ballasts, contact closures, occupancy sensors and photocell sensors to the system

communication network.

2. The I/O module automatically detects and addresses the type of device to which it is

wired and establishes two-way communication between the ECU and itself. Individually

addressable, the I/O module enables each lighting component to be independently

controlled and configured.

3. When connected to fixture ballast, the I/O module can switch a fixture “on” or “off” via a

relay contained in the module as well as deliver a low-voltage dimming signal to any

conventional 0-10V dimming ballast.

4. When connected to an occupancy sensor or photocell sensor, the I/O module provides

power to operate the device and relays sensor information from the device to the ECU.

The I/O module can also be connected to power relays or switch packs to enable

switching of larger electrical loads.

5. In the event of a power failure, I/O modules connected to light fixtures shall default to the

“on” state at full light output.

B. Specifics:

1. Voltage compatibility: Universal voltage control to 347VAC maximum.

2. Recommended relay rating: 300 watts, 120-347VAC for local switching.

3. Primary relay rating: 6.5A, 120-277V or 4.5A, 347-480V with up to 2 ballasts.

4. Compatibility with electronic dimming ballasts using 0 to 10VDC dimming signals.

5. Power:

a. Supplies 12 to 24VDC, 40mA maximum for occupancy sensors.

b. Supplies 10VDC, 25mA for photocell sensors.

6. Control signal: Supplies 0-10VDC, 25mA maximum dimming signal to attached ballast

or receives control signal from attached sensor.

7. Two RJ45 connectors for communication network connection.

8. Memory: Retains all system settings in non-volatile memory.

C. Mounting:

1. The I/O module is easily mounted to a lighting fixture or electrical junction box knock-

out via threaded hub base with lock-nut.

2. Mounts to standard ½” knock-out.

D. Environmental Specifications

1. Operating Temperature Range: 0ºC to 40ºC

2. Relative Humidity: 20% to 90% non-condensing

2.9 RELAY PANEL



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Addressable relay panel that fully integrates with the addressable control system, consisting

of individual relays, control module, power supplies, network connection interface, DIN rail

supports and cabinet.

B. Cabinet: NEMA 1 enclosure sized to accept up to 24 relays. Enclosure shall be 19" high x

18” wide x 4” deep minimum.

C. Cover: Standard surface mount, hinged, lockable cover with windows for viewing relay

status indicators. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the rear of the cover.

D. Interior: DIN rail supports for relays and circuit board back control module pre-wired to

relays. Each relay can be addressed as individual zone or as part of a larger zone and is

controlled through the software.

E. Control relays: Heavy-duty momentary pulsed mechanically latching contactors. Operating

voltage is 24VAC; contacts are rated at 20 amps at 120 or 277VAC. They shall attach to the

interior DIN rail support and pre-wire to circuit board.

F. Control module: The control module is mounted in the center of the panel with 12 relays on

either side and is wired to each individual relay. Each relay is addressable via the control

module can be controlled independently via the system software.

G. Power supply: 120/277VAC input transformer with 24VAC, 60Hz, 1.6A (40VA) Class II

power supplies output.

H. Network connection: Class 2 wiring input.

2.10 BACNET INTERFACE

A. The lighitng control system shall be capable of networking to a central BACnet based

management system. This capability may be integral to the Room Controller device, or via a

separage BACnet interface module. BACnet interface shall include the following functions:

1. Enables the integration of the control system with any BACnet compatible building

automation system. The control system operates autonomously while lighting status,

lighting levels and energy usage are all shared and possible controlled via BACnet.

Connection between the two systems is established via BACnet/IP.

2. Enables BACnet switching and dimming control.

3. Provides load shedding control over the lighting system, meeting the 2013 Building

Energy Efficiency Standards requirements for Automatic Demand Response.

4. Shares occupancy sensor information obtained by the control system with a BACnet

client for HVAC system integration.

5. Utilizes a centralized BACnet time schedule.

B. The BACnet interface creates access points with names and descriptions that can be

customized to accommodate any client’s naming scheme. It also exports standard BACnet

object properties in a clear, structured manner and can define an unlimited number of groups

of lighting fixtures.

C. The control system BACnet interface shall adhere to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004

“BACnet” (ISSN 1041-2336).

2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Provide a UL 924 listed device capable of emergency lighting circuit control. The device

shall force emergency lights ON upon loss of normal power. Features include:

1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20 amp ballast rating

2. Push to test button

3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface

2.12 NETWORK COMPONENTS & CABLING

A. Provide control module (Gateway) as required to facilitate communication of network

devices, linking into an Ethernet, and linking into the lighting control system management

software. This network capability may also be integral to the Room Controller device.

B. Network cabling shall be Class 2 wiring as recommended by the specified manufacturer.

Cable shall be plenum rated.

2.13 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and

configurable remotely from the software

B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all

devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, remaining occupancy time

delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions

time remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).

C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software:

model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s),

and parent network device.

D. The software must offer a Graphical User Interface (GUI).

E. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.

F. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.

G. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.

H. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.

I. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be

encrypted.

J. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download

and installation via the internet.

K. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area

network)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of low-voltage

lighting control installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification

tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Install the network lighting control system in accordance with the Manufacturer's written

instructions, as indicated on the shop drawings and as specified herein.

B. All components of the network lighting control system are not necessarily shown on the

plans. Provide all components required for a complete and functional system; locate devices

not shown on the plans where they can be easily accessed for maintenance, and include

location on the record drawings (shop drawings).

C. Coordinate location of all wall and ceiling mounted devices with the architectural RCPs and

elevations.

D. Locate relay panel(s) where indicated on the plans.

E. All exterior lighting fixtures shall be controlled via the relay panel with homeruns wired

through panel.

F. Route cabling in conduit except above accessible ceiling space.

3.3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES

A. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and

energy savings.

B. Coverage of occupancy sensors may vary by manufacturer. It shall be the responsibility of

the Contractor to place sensors in the proper place and with proper alignment to cover to all

the area intended in the Contract Documents.

3.4 PROGRAMMING

A. Programming of the addressable lighting control system shall be by a factory-authorized

agent of the Manufacturer of the system. All programming, testing, trouble shooting, etc.

shall be included in this contract.

B. The lighting control system shall be fully integrated with the building management system.


A. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-

authorized service representative to supervise the initial start-up, pretesting and adjustment of

the low-voltage lighting control system.

B. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made

for witnessing test, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested satisfactorily

prior to the Engineer's witnessed test.

C. Prefunctional resting:


a. Inspect for physical damage, defects alignment and fit.

b. Perform mechanical operational tests in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.

c. Compare nameplate information and connections to Contract Documents.

d. Check tightness of all control and power connections.

e. Check that all covers, barriers and doors are secure.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Contractor shall provide all necessary programming assistance to set up and program the

low-voltage lighting control equipment.

3. Electrical tests:

a. The system shall be completely tested in accordance with operational parameters,

tolerances and Manufacturer's instructions. Any problem shall be documented and

corrected.

b. Test all control circuits and verify proper operation of all lighting circuits throughout

the control system.

c. Ensure the lighting zone controls match that of the Contract Documents.

d. Verify the proper integration with the mechanical control system for override control

and monitoring of low-voltage lighting control system.

e. Provide a complete report listing every device, the date it was tested, the results and

the date retested (if failure occurred during the previous test). The test report shall

indicate that every device tested successfully.

D. Provide all system wide functional performance testing per the project commissioning

requirements.

E. Contractor shall replace at no costs to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do

not operate within factory specified tolerances.

F. Contractor shall submit the testing final report for review prior to Project closeout and final

acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested, results,

observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation and


3.6 TRAINING

A. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct a 4 hour training session for Owner's

Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instruction shall include

operation, programming and maintenance of equipment.

B. Contractor shall schedule training with a minimum of 7 days advanced notice.




TRUCKEE, CA

SURFACE RACEWAYS 262719 - 1

SECTION 262719 – SURFACE RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Surface nonmetallic raceways.

2. Multi-outlet assemblies.

3. Wireways.




1.2 REFERENCES




FS W-C-582; Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fitting; Surface.


UL 5; Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.

UL 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings.

UL 870; Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and proposed

application.

3. Submit Manufacturer's installation: Provide written instructions for raceway products

special installation techniques.

4. Complete bill of material listing all components.






TRUCKEE, CA




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Multi-outlet assemblies:

a. Legrand/Wiremold

b. Hubbell

2. Surface nonmetallic raceways and multi-outlet assemblies:

a. Legrand/Wiremold

b. Hubbell

3. Wireways:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co.

b. Circle AW Products.

c. Square D Co.


2.2 SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS

A. Assembly: Single, double or triple compartment raceway shall be complete to include bases,

covers, end plates, compartment divider, fittings and connections as required. Raceways

shall be UL labeled. Double and triple compartment raceway shall have individual covers for

each channel to allow access to one compartment at a time.

B. Construction: Raceway base, cover, compartment divider and end plates shall be of non-

metallic construction.

C. Size: Raceway size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.

D. Fittings: Boxes, extension rings, couplings, elbows and connectors shall be designed for use

with raceway system.

E. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard finish to be selected by the Architect.

2.3 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Assembly: Single or Double compartment raceway shall be factory pre-assembled, pre-cut

and complete, including bases, covers, end plates, compartment dividers, wiring, receptacles,

fittings and connections as required. Raceway shall be U.L. labeled.

B. Construction: Raceway base, cover, compartment divider and end plates shall be constructed

of cold rolled steel with 0.094" minimum wall thickness.

C. Size: Raceway size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. Receptacles: Convenience receptacles mounted in cover shall be NEMA 5-20R in

accordance with Specification Section 262726: Wiring Devices. Space receptacles on center

as indicated on Drawings.

E. Coverplates: Device coverplates shall be of same material and finish as the raceway.

F. Wiring: Receptacle circuits shall be pre-wired or field wired with minimum #12 AWG

conductors throughout entire length of section. 12" pigtails shall be provided for field

connections. Pigtails shall be properly tagged with circuit identification in the field. Tap

splicing shall be accomplished with No. 562 "Scotch-Lok" tap connectors.

G. Wire retention clips: Shall be installed in sufficient numbers to securely hold all wire lengths

in place.

H. Grounding: Ground continuity shall be maintained to receptacles throughout the entire length

of raceway by means of a separate, insulated, code sized ground conductor.

I. Fittings: Boxes, extension rings, couplings, elbows and connectors shall be designed for use

with raceway system.

J. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard finish to be selected by the Architect.

2.4 WIREWAYS

A. Assembly: Wireway shall be complete to include channel, cover, end plates, fittings and

connectors as required. Wireway shall be U.L. labeled.

B. Construction: Wireway channel, cover and end plates shall be constructed of galvanized

code gauge sheet steel for general-purpose use.

C. Size: Wireway size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.

D. Cover: Screw or hinged covers.

E. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of surface

raceway installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.


3.2 WIREWAYS

A. Preparation:

1. Locations of wireways shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated

with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas and shall not

unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipe, nor prevent removal of ceiling tiles or panels,

nor block access to mechanical or electrical equipment.

2. Exposed wireways shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of columns

and beams.

3. Wireways shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot water, steam

line or other heat producing source or three inches from such lines when crossing

perpendicular to the runs.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Installation:

1. Install wireways in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on


2. Installed complete with all necessary corner connectors, 'T' connectors feed connectors

and any other hardware required to install raceway systems as indicated in Drawings.

3. Conduits shall be securely fastened to wireways using two locknuts and an insulating

bushing or specified insulated connectors. Install grounding bushings or bonding

jumpers on all conduits terminating at concentric knockouts.

C. Supports:

1. All wireways shall be secured to building structures using specified fasteners, clamps and

hangers spaced according to Code.

2. Suspended wireways shall be supported with universal hangers attached to structure

above, spaced according to Manufacturer installation instructions.

3. Provide lateral bracing support along suspended wireway spaced at a maximum of 30'-0"

on center. Bracing shall consist of 3/8" threaded rod installed at a 45-degree angle up to

structural slab and anchored. Alternate bracing on both sides of wireway.

D. Grounding: Ground continuity shall be maintained throughout the entire raceway length per

NEC.




TRUCKEE, CA

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Switches.

2. Occupancy sensors.

3. Receptacles.

4. Floor mounted service boxes.

5. Coverplates.




1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES



1. Federal Specification (FS):

FS W-P-455A; Plate, Wall Electrical.

FS W-C-596; Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet.

FS W-S-896; Switch, Toggle.

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

NEMA WD-1; General-Purpose Wiring Devices.

NEMA WD-5; Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL):

UL 20 General-Use Snap Switches.

UL 231; Power Outlets.

UL 310; Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals.

UL 498; Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.

UL 514A; Metallic Outlet Boxes.

UL 514D; Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.

UL 943; Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.



TRUCKEE, CA


UL 1681; Wiring Device Configurations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS






application.

3. Provide color finishes for Architect to select from.


B. Where inscribed device coverplates are noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications,

conform to the requirements of Section 260553: Electrical Identification.






1.5 WARRANTY

A. Occupancy sensors offered under this Section shall be covered by a 1 one year parts and labor



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Switches, receptacles and coverplates:

a. Hubbell.

b. Pass & Seymour.

c. Leviton.

2. Occupancy sensors switches:

a. WattStopper

b. Leviton

c. SensorSwitch, Inc.

3. Floor mounted service boxes:

a. Hubbell.

b. Walker.



TRUCKEE, CA


c. FSR Inc.


2.2 WALL SWITCHES

A. Standards: Provide general-purpose 120/277 VAC switches that conform to NEMA WD-1

Specifications.

B. Color: Device color shall be as selected by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.

C. Wall switches:

1. Provide twenty ampere, 120/277 volt, Specification grade, toggle handle style, quick-

make slow-break, quiet type snap switch with silver cadmium alloy contacts, binding

head terminal screws, back and side wired with totally enclosed case.

D. Pilot light switches:

1. Provide twenty ampere, 120/277 volt, Specification grade, toggle handle, quick-make

slow-break, quiet type snap switch with silver cadmium alloy contacts, binding head

terminal screws, back and side wired with red handle lighted by a neon lamp which is

lighted when the switch is in the 'on' position.

E. Illuminated locator switches:

1. Provide twenty ampere, 120/277 volt Specification grade, toggle handle, quick-make

slow-break, quiet type snap switch with silver cadmium alloy contacts, binding heat

terminal screws, back and side wired with clear handle lighted by a neon lamp which is

lighted when the switch is in the "off" position.

2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General:

1. Occupancy sensors shall comply with the latest edition of the California Building Energy

Efficiency Standards, California Building Code, Part 6 and be certified by The California

Energy Commission. All sensors shall be listed in the most current directory of Certified

Occupancy Sensing Devices or be on file with the CEC.

2. Occupancy sensors shall be dual-technology type as specified herein with voltage and

wattage rating equal to the lights being controlled.

3. All sensors shall have an adjustable time delay for turning off lights and a sensitivity

adjustment.

4. Ceiling mounted sensors shall operate on low voltage as supplied by control unit.

Control unit shall contain power supply and relays for switching loads.

5. Units shall be furnished to cover the areas being controlled. No allowance shall be given

for providing sensors improperly sized for the square footage of the controlled area.

B. Color: Device color shall be as selected by Architect, unless otherwise noted.

C. Wall mounted single level control sensors:

1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type with single level switching

capability and coverage up to 900 square feet.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Operation shall be manual "ON" and manual or automatic "OFF".

3. Time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes.

4. Load capacity of 0 to 1800 watts at connected voltage.

D. Wall mounted dual level control sensors:

1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type with dual level switching

capability and coverage up to 1000 square feet.

2. Operation shall be manual (in two levels) "ON" and manual (in two levels) or automatic

(full) "OFF".


4. Load capacity of 50 to 1000 watts at connected voltages.

5. Integral photocell, 2 circuit, compatible with electronic bi-level switching ballast.

Provide with ambient light control adjustment.

E. Ceiling mounted single-directional sensors:

1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type single-directional with coverage

up to 900 square feet.

2. Operation shall be automatic "ON" and automatic "OFF". Provide with a manual

override switch.


4. Load capacity of 20 amps per power or slave pack at connected voltage.

5. Power pack consisting of Class 2, 24V output transformer and relay in single housing,

capable of powering up 2 sensors and mounted inside standard 4 inch square box.

F. Ceiling mounted omnidirectional sensors:

1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type omnidirectional with coverage

up to 1000 square feet.

2. Operation shall be automatic "ON" and automatic "OFF". Provide with a manual

override switch.


4. Load capacity of 15 amps per power or slave pack at connected voltage.

5. Power pack consisting of Class 2, 24V output transformer and relay in single housing,

capable of powering up to 2 sensors and mounted inside standard 4-inch square box.

2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. Standards:

1. Provide general purpose 20 ampere, 125/250 VAC receptacles that conform to NEMA

WD-1 Specifications. Specialty receptacles shall conform to NEMA WD-5

Specifications as applicable.

2. Provide NEMA 5-20R, commercial specification grade as noted herein, 20 amp, 125

VAC, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type receptacles.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. Receptacles shall be the standard conventional style device.

B. Color:

1. Device color shall be as selected by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.

C. General purpose single outlets:

1. Provide self-grounding back and side wired with binding head staked terminal screw.

D. General purpose duplex receptacles:

1. Provide self-grounding, back and side wired with binding head staked terminal screws

and break-off strip for two-circuit wiring.

E. Plug load controllable receptacles:

1. Shall be provided with receptacle marking printed on the face that it is controlled and

shall be NEMA approved, compliant with California Title 24, and ASHRAE Energy

Efficiency Standard 90.1

F. Tamper-resistant single outlets:

1. Provide self-grounding back and side wired with binding head staked terminal screw.

2. Shall have tamper-resistant feature and shall conform to CEC Article 406.12.

G. Tamper-resistant duplex receptacles:

1. Provide self-grounding, back and side wired with binding head staked terminal screws

and break-off strip for two-circuit wiring.


H. Ground-fault circuit interrupting (GFCI) receptacles:

1. Provide 20 amp, 125 VAC, receptacles consisting of NEMA 5-20R duplex device with

integral solid state sensing and signaling circuitry capable of detecting and interrupting a

maximum 5 milli-amp line-to-ground fault current in approximately 1/40th of a second.

2. Provide visual device with trip indication, manual reset and test mechanisms and with

point of use and multi-outlet protection.


I. Weather-resistant ground-fault circuit interrupting (GFCI) receptacles:

1. Provide 20 amp, 125 VAC, receptacles consisting of NEMA 5-20R duplex device with

integral solid state sensing and signaling circuitry capable of detecting and interrupting a

maximum 5 milli-amp line-to-ground fault current in approximately 1/40th of a second.

2. Provide visual device with trip indication, manual reset and test mechanisms and with

point of use and multi-outlet protection.

3. Shall have tamper-resistant feature conforming to CEC Article 406.12.

4. Shall be weather-resistant conforming to UL498.

J. Special purpose receptacles: Provide Specification grade devices with the NEMA

configuration, voltage and current rating, number of poles and ground provisions as noted on

the Drawings.



TRUCKEE, CA


2.5 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE BOXES

A. Single or Multi-service recessed floor box:

1. Single service or multi-service (combination power, communication, and/or audio visual)

floor box with flush cover and recessed compartment for access to service device(s). Box

shall be for installation concrete floors or wood floors as applicable to the application.

2. Box shall be constructed of formed steel with provisions for adjustments before and after

pour. Access hatch shall be steel and provided with carpet trim and insert. Make

allowances for floor finishes if other then carpet. Furnish with specified receptacle(s) and

accessories called for on Drawings.

B. Poke-through floor fitting:

1. Single service or multi-service (combination power, communication, and/or audio visual)

flush style, fire rated, poke-through device for installation in a 6" or 8" nominal hole

through a concrete floor. Provide with finish ring, receptacle, cable access, box, etc. or

any other accessories to facilitate the installation indicated on Drawings.

2.6 COVERPLATES

A. General:

1. Provide all coverplates with rounded edges and corners, smooth and free of grooves,

embossing or other embellishment.

2. Provide mounting screws to match the plate finish.

3. Provide gang type coverplates where two or more devices are installed at one location.

Individual gangable coverplates are not acceptable.

4. Provide plates of one design throughout the Project unless otherwise specified.

B. Color: Coverplate color shall be as specified by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.

C. Plastic coverplates:

1. Provide smooth, high impact, self-extinguishing thermoplastic coverplates and 0.100

inches thick with rounded edges and corners.

2. Provide openings to accommodate the devices indicated on the Drawings and in the

Specifications.

D. Metal coverplates:

1. Provide smooth, type 430 stainless steel coverplates, 0.035" thick with rounded edges and

corners.

2. Provide openings to accommodate the devices indicated on the Drawings and in the

Specifications.

E. Weatherproof coverplates:

1. Provide horizontal mounted, weatherproof in-use coverplate for one duplex or one GFCI

receptacle. Provide gasketed, spring loaded, vertically self-closing covers suitable for use

in damp and wet locations as described in UL 514 and NEC 406. Covers shall allow the

use of the device with the cover closed.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Furnish base plates, covers, hinge pins, spring and screws of corrosion resistant type 302

stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of wiring device



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate device heights in vending, kitchen and utility areas with benches and counters.

B. Coordinate switch mounting location with Architectural details. Unless otherwise noted,

locate switches on latch side of door.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on

the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install devices with the vertical centerline plumb and with all edges of the device flush

against the adjacent wall surfaces.

C. Mount switches at 42 inches to center above finished floor unless otherwise noted.

D. Mount receptacles vertically with the centerline 18 inches above finished floor and with

grounding slot at bottom.

E. Mount receptacles horizontally when mounting above counters, mount with grounding slot to

the left.

F. Mount GFCI receptacles in the following locations, whether indicated as GFCI type or not on

the drawings:

1. In toilet rooms.

2. Where receptacles are installed within 6’0” from edge of sinks.

3. In kitchens above counters.

4. On rooftops.

5. Outdoors.

6. Where serving vending machines.

7. Where serving electric drinking fountains.

8. Where required by the California Electrical Code.

G. Provide coverplates for all outlet boxes, switches, receptacles, etc.

H. Install blank coverplates on all outlet boxes in which no device is required or installed.

I. Provide coverplates that completely cover wall opening and seat against wall.

J. Provide stainless steel coverplates for all devices in kitchen/food service equipment areas.

3.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Set time delays in sensors in accordance with Owner's directions.

B. Where substituted occupancy sensors are used, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor

to place sensors in the proper place and with proper alignment to cover to all the area

intended in the Contract Documents.

C. Provide one power pack with each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor, whether indicated or

not on plans, unless wiring details or plans indicate otherwise.

D. Install wall mounted devices with the vertical centerline plumb and alleges of device flush

against adjacent wall surfaces.

3.5 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE BOXES

A. Installation:

1. Install floor boxes to be level or within 1/16" below screed line.

2. Make conduit connections and anchor box to sub-flooring.

3. Core drill hole in floor (core sized based on Manufacturer's installation instructions) for

insert of poke-through device.

4. Make conduit connection to poke-through box from floor below.

B. Coordination: Contractor shall mark the location of all floor boxes with paint prior to

installation or core drilling for review and approval by Architect.


A. Electrical testing:

1. Test proper polarity of all receptacles.

2. Test ground continuity of all wiring devices.

3. Test ground fault interrupting device operation.

B. Visual and mechanical inspection:

1. Check proper operation of all switches.

2. Visually inspect and replace damaged or defective devices.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of all boxes from dirt and paint prior to installation of devices.

B. Clean wiring devices and coverplates from dirt and paint over spray.




TRUCKEE, CA

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Fuses.

2. Molded case circuit breakers.




1.2 REFERENCES



1. Federal Specification (FS):

FS W-C-375; Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service.

FS W-F-870; Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses.


UL 248(1-16); Low-Voltage Fuses.

UL 489; Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

UL 512; Fuseholders.

UL 1066; Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures.


NEMA AB 1; Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





2. Describe product operation, equipment and dimensions and indicate features of each

component.


application.



TRUCKEE, CA


4. Provide factory certification of trip characteristics for each type and rating of circuit

breaker.

5. Provide current let-through and melting time information for each type and rating of

fuses.


7. Complete bill of material listing all components.

8. Warranty.



260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:



3. Parts list and part numbers.

4. Telephone numbers for authorized parts and service distributors.

5. Final testing reports.







A. Delivery: Overcurrent Protective Device components shall not be delivered to the Project site










1.7 WARRANTY




1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Three (3) spare fuses of each size and type or a minimum of 10 percent of the number

installed, whichever is greater, shall be supplied to the Owner in the specified spare fuse

cabinet(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Fuses:

a. Bussmann Division, Cooper Industries.

b. Gould Shawmut Co.

c. Littlefuse Inc.

2. Circuit breakers:

a. Eaton Electrical

b. Siemens

c. Square D


2.2 FUSES

A. General: All power fuses shall be time-delay, high interrupting (300 K AIC), current limiting

type, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. All fuses shall be the product of a single

Manufacturer and shall be selectively coordinated when applied in 2:1 ratios. Types of fuses

shall be as follows:

1. 0 - 600 amperes: UL Class J, dual element, time delay type fuse with separate overload

and short-circuit elements. The fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of

10 seconds.

2. 601 - 4000 amperes: UL Class L, time delay type fuses with 99.9% pure silver fuse links

and "O-rings" to seal between the end bells and the fuse barrel. Fuses shall hold 500% of

rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in 0.01 seconds or

less.

3. Motor branch circuit fuses (0-600 amperes): UL Class J dual element, time delay type

fuse. Motor branch circuit fuses shall be sized for Type 2 coordination for the motor

controller and back-up motor overload protection and shall be coordinated with motor

starter overload relay heaters.

B. Control and instrument fuses shall be suitable for installing in blocks or fuse holders. Exact

type and rating shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer of the equipment being

protected.

C. Fuses for installation in current limiting circuit breakers or motor circuit protectors shall meet

the specific requirements of the Manufacturers of that equipment to ensure compatibility.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Unless noted otherwise, circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt on and trip indicating.

B. Where stationary molded case circuit breakers are indicated on the Drawings to be current

limiting type, they shall be current limiting as defined by UL 489 and shall not employ any

fusible elements.

C. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting capacity not less than that indicated on the Drawings

or if not indicated, not less than 25,000 RMS symmetrical amps for 480 volt systems and

10,000 RMS symmetrical amps for 208 volt systems.

D. Covers shall be sealed on non-interchangeable breakers and trip unit covers shall be sealed on

interchangeable trip breakers to prevent tampering. Circuit breaker ratings shall be clearly

visible after installation or engraved nameplates shall be provided stating the rating. All

ferrous parts shall be plated to minimize corrosion.

E. Circuit breakers shall be toggle, quick-make and quick-break operating mechanisms with

trip-free feature to prevent contacts being held closed against overcurrent conditions in the

circuit. Trip position of the breakers shall be clearly indicated by operating handles moving

to a center position.

F. Multipole breakers shall have a single handle to open and close all contacts simultaneously in

both manual operation and under automatic tripping. Interpole barriers shall be provided

inside the breaker to prevent any phase-to-phase flashover. Each pole of the breaker shall

have means for Arc extinguishing.

G. All terminals shall be rated for aluminum or copper wire.

H. Unless noted otherwise, circuit breakers with trip ratings 400 amp and smaller shall be

ambient temperature compensated, thermal magnetic type unless otherwise noted. Breakers

shall be of full size, 1" per pole type. Panels with more than one branch breaker larger than

100 amps shall be installed in distribution type panels.

I. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 401 amps through 800 amps shall have solid state electronic

trips with true RMS reading through the 13th harmonic with 1% accuracy, interchangeable

trip via front accessible current plug, adjustable instantaneous and short time be rated as

indicated on Drawings at the voltage indicated.

J. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 801 amps through 2000 amps shall have electronic trips

with the following characteristics:

1. Electronic true RMS sensing trip, adjustable via current plug.

2. Adjustable long time setting and delay.

3. Adjustable short time pick-up and delay.

4. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up.

K. Accessories: Provide accessories as noted on the Drawings, i.e. shunt-trip, auxiliary contacts,

undervoltage trip, alarm switch, etc.

L. Spaces in the boards shall be able to accept any combination of 1, 2 or 3 pole circuit breakers

as indicated. Provide all necessary bus, device supports and mounting hardware sized for

frame, not trip rating.

M. Series rated breakers are not acceptable unless specifically noted on the Drawings.



TRUCKEE, CA


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of overcurrent

protective device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overcurrent protective devices in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions,

as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals; including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment Manufacturers published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.

Where Manufacturers torque requirements are not indicated tighten connectors and terminals

to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Standard 486A.

C. Install overcurrent protective devices and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices

comply with requirements. All devices shall be installed in accordance with applicable CEC

and NEMA standards for installation.

D. Circuit breakers serving "Fire Alarm Control Panel(s)" shall be red in color.


A. Independent testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent

Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing, calibration and inspection

required herein. Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:

1. Assure overcurrent protective device installation conforms to specified requirements and

operates within specified tolerances.

2. Field test and inspect to ensure operation in accordance with Manufacturer's

recommendations and Specifications.

3. Prepare final test report including results, observations, failures, adjustments and

remedies.

4. Verify ratings and settings and make final adjustments.

B. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made



C. The Contractor shall supply a suitable and stable source of electrical power to each test site.

The Testing Agency shall specify the specific power requirements.

D. Testing of overcurrent protective devices shall be done only after all devices are installed and

system is energized.

E. Prefunctional testing:

1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents and Manufacturer instructions for

installation and testing.




TRUCKEE, CA








a. Circuit continuity: All feeders shall be tested for continuity. All neutrals shall be

tested for improper grounds.

b. Determine that circuit breaker will trip under overcurrent condition, with tripping

time in conformance with NEMA AB 1 requirements.

c. Test all circuit breakers with frame size 225 amps and larger and 10 percent of all

circuit breakers with frame sizes less than 225 amps in each panelboard, distribution

board, switchboard, etc. unless otherwise noted.

F. Contractor shall replace at no costs to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do


G. Contractor shall submit the Testing Agency's final report for review prior to Project closeout

and final acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested,

results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation

and maintenance manuals.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust circuit breaker trip settings for coordination with other overcurrent protective devices

in system.

B. Adjust circuit breaker trip settings for adequate protection from overcurrent and fault

currents.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

overcurrent protective devices per Manufacturer's approved methods and materials. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct a 4 hour training seminar for Owner's

Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall include safe

operation, maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training and hands-on

instruction.

B. Contractor shall schedule training with a minimum of 7 days advance notice.




TRUCKEE, CA

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262819 - 1

SECTION 262819 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Disconnect Switches.




1.2 REFERENCES


except as otherwise indicated on specified:


FS W-F-870; Fuseholders (for plug and enclosed cartridge fuses).

FS W-S-865; Switch, Box (enclosed), Surface-Mounted.


NEMA KS 1; Enclosed Switches.


UL 512; Fuseholders.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





2. As a minimum the following characteristics shall be indicated:

a. NEMA types.

b. Current rating.

c. Number of poles.

d. Fuse provisions.

e. Enclosure dimensions.

f. Voltage.

g. Horsepower rating (if applicable).



TRUCKEE, CA


h. Short circuit rating.


application.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Eaton Electrical

2. Siemens

3. Square D


2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Description: Provide NEMA heavy-duty type switches with dead front construction and

padlock provisions for up to three locks in the “OFF” position.

B. Switch interior: Provide switch with switchblades that are fully visible in the “OFF” position

when the door is open. Provide UL listed lugs for copper conductors, lugs to be front

removable. Provide plated current carrying part.

C. Switch mechanism: Provide switches with a quick-make, quick-break, position indicating,

operating handle and mechanism and a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening

of the switch door in the “ON” position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door

open. Furnish an electrical interlock to de-energize control wiring when the disconnect

switch is opened.

D. Enclosures: Provide switches with hinged cover in NEMA 1 general purpose; sheet steel

enclosure for dry locations and NEMA 3R weatherproof galvanized enclosures for exterior,

damp or wet locations, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Provide an enclosure treated

with a rust-inhibiting phosphate primer and finished in gray baked enamel.

E. Ratings: Provide switches that are horsepower rated for 240 VAC or 600 VAC as required

for the circuit involved and that meet “I-SQUARED-T” requirements. Fusible switches to

have provisions for the types of fuses specified in Section 262816: Overcurrent Protective

Devices. UL listed short circuit rating, when equipped with fuses to be 200,000 amperes

RMS symmetrical. Furnish with provisions for RK-1 fuses for switches up to 600 amps. 800

amp switches and larger to have provisions for Class L fuses.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



TRUCKEE, CA


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of disconnects

switch installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate locations of switches and equipment in the field to provide code required

clearances in front of switches and to ensure that switches are insight of the controller as

described in NEC Article 430.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Include construction channel and mounting hardware as required to support disconnect

switch.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide engraved, machine screw retained type 'NP' nameplate on each disconnect switch.

See Section 260553: Electrical Identification.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

both the interior and exterior of enclosure of all construction debris, scrap wire, paint

splatters, dirt, etc.




TRUCKEE, CA

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Interior lighting fixtures.

2. Light emitting diodes (LEDs).

3. LED drivers.




1. Division 05: Miscellaneous. Fittings, brackets, backing supports, rods, etc. as required

for support and bracing of lighting fixtures.

2. Division 09: Acoustical treatment. Slack fixture support wires.

1.2 REFERENCES




UL 66; Fixture Wire.

UL 844; Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous Locations.

UL 924; Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.

UL 1598; Luminaires.

UL 2108; Low Voltage Lighting Systems.

2. Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

IESNA LM-79-2008; Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric Measurements

of Solid-State Lighting Products.

IESNA LM-80-2008; Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Light Sources.

3. Restriction of Hazardous Substances in LED (RoHS):

EU RoHS; Directive 2002/95/EC Restriction of Hazardous Materials.


A. Provide and install a fully functional and operating lighting fixture system as indicated,

complete with, wiring, control and securely attached to support system to meet all seismic

code requirements.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Where catalog number and narrative or pictorial descriptions are provided, the written

description shall take precedence and prevail.

1.4 SUBMITTALS






application.

3. Independent Testing Laboratories, Inc. or equal, photometric test report for each

luminaire type listed on the fixture schedule. Test reports shall be based on Illuminating

Engineering Society published test procedures and shall contain candlepower distribution

curves in five lateral planes for fixtures with asymmetric distributions and fixture

luminance data for vertical angles above 45 degrees from nadir.

4. Shop Drawings:

a. Suspension details for fixtures recessed in, mounted on or suspended from hung

ceilings. Details shall clearly illustrate proposed methods for complying with the

requirements of CAC Title 24 and UBC Standard No. 47-18 requiring support

independent of the suspended ceiling system.

5. Mock-ups: Provide mock-up lighting fixture samples where “FIXTURE MOCK-UP” is

indicated on the Fixture Schedule. Refer to Part 3 – Execution for requirements.


7. Complete bill of material listing all lighting fixtures and other components.

8. Warranty.

9. In addition to the requirements for Substitutions, under Section 260010: Basic Electrical

Requirements, all requests for approval of non-specified products must be accompanied

by the following:

a. A list of comparable buildings where the product is currently installed and can be

observed. Buildings shall be within a 100-mile radius of District’s office.

b. Furnish a working sample complete with housing, trim, and 8’ cord and plug.


A. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of in

accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to


1. A detailed description and catalog cut of each lighting fixture type.


3. Pictorial parts list and parts number.

4. Telephone numbers for authorized parts and service distributors.



TRUCKEE, CA








A. Delivery: Lighting fixtures shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected storage

space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to Manufacturer at no

cost to Owner.







1.8 WARRANTY

A. Light fixtures offered under this Section shall be covered by a parts and labor warranty for

malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. The warranty period shall

be no less than 5 years for LED light fixtures, 2 years for any other light fixture. Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Lighting fixtures: Refer to Fixture Schedule.

2. LEDs & LED drivers: As provided by the light fixture manufacturer, and meeting the

requirements herein.

3. LED Retrofit Lamps:

a. Cree

b. Soraa

4. LED emergency battery pack:

a. Bodine.


2.2 FIXTURES

A. Refer to the fixture schedule on the plans.

B. All fixtures shall have LED light source.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. Maximum color temperature shall be 3500 K.

D. Standard lumen output shall meet or exceed the State of California Title 24 Energy Code for

high efficiency luminaries.

E. Luminaires shall not draw power in the off state. Luminaires with integral occupancy,

motion, photo-controls, or individually addressable luminaires with external control and

intelligence are exempt from this requirement. The power draw for such luminaires shall not

exceed 0.5 watts when in the off state.

F. Luminaire manufacturers shall adhere to device manufacturer guidelines, certification

programs, and test procedures for thermal management.

G. Luminaires shall be fully accessible from below ceiling plane for changing drivers, power

supplies and arrays

H. The finish of all fixtures and trim shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect prior to

ordering.

I. All standard fixtures must bear UL label. Attaching of labels after delivery of fixtures is not

acceptable.

J. All labels affixed to the fixture shall be in a location not visible from normal viewing angles.

K. Ferrous mounting hardware and accessories shall be finished using either a galvanic or

phosphate primer/baked enamel process to prevent corrosion and discoloration of adjacent

materials.

L. Fasteners shall be manufactured of galvanized steel.

M. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and shall be designed to provide sufficient ventilation of

LED arrays.

N. All sheet metal Work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles

bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints

shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion

after assembly. All surfaces shall be finished so as to eliminate all exposed sharp edges. All

mitered corners or joints shall be accurately aligned with abutting intersecting members.

Sheet metal Work shall be properly fabricated so that planes will not deform (i.e. become

concave or convex) due to normal expected ambient and operating conditions.

O. Wiring channels and LED array mountings shall be rigid and accurately constructed.

P. Architectural Coordination

1. Consult Architectural Drawings for details of ceiling construction, finish, reflected

ceiling plans and other applicable details and provide lighting fixtures suitable for the

particular type of ceiling at each location.

2. Recessed fixtures installed in direct contact with insulation shall carry an IC rating.

3. Where fixtures are mounted in architectural coves, soffits, valances or cabinets and are

given an overall length, the Contractor shall verify all lengths in the field prior to

releasing fixture order.



TRUCKEE, CA


4. Where fixtures are surface mounted or suspended to match the length of walls or other

architectural elements, the Contractor shall verify all lengths in the field prior to releasing

fixture order.

2.3 LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LED):

A. Refer to the Fixture Schedule for size and type of LED lamps required.

B. All diodes shall come from the same manufacturer and carry the same bin number.

C. All diodes shall be tested and tuned for the optimal Kelvin color point.

D. Color correlated temperature: 3500K

E. Minimum CRI (Color Rendering Index): 80

F. Diodes shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70% of initial lumens

throughout this period.

G. LED fixture components shall be free of all toxic materials to include lead, cadmium and

mercury, and shall be RoHS compliant.

H. Groups of three or more diodes in a single housing shall be tested for even distribution.

I. All LED fixtures shall have an IES formatted electronic photometric report.

J. Comply with IES LM-79-08 Approved Method for measuring lumen maintenance of LED

light sources.

K. Comply with IES LM-80-08 Approved Method for electrical and photometric measurement

of SSL product.

L. LED arrays shall be sealed, high performance, long life type; minimum 70% rated output at

50,000 hours.

M. LEDs shall be “Bin No. 1” quality.

N. The LED light source shall be fully dimmable with use of compatible dimmers switch

designated for low voltage loads.

2.4 LED DRIVERS:

A. LED drivers shall be integral to fixture housing or remotely located, when specified, within

15 feet of diode assembly.

B. Drivers shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70% of initial lumens

for that period.

C. Typical LED drivers shall be electronic, 0-10V dimming.

D. Drivers shall be solid state and accept 120 through 277 VAC at 60 Hz input.

E. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.

F. Maximum driver case temperature not to exceed driver manufacturer recommended

operational parameters.

G. Output operating frequency: 60Hz.

H. Interference: EMI and RFI compliant with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.



TRUCKEE, CA


I. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20% Maximum.

J. Meet electrical and thermal conditions as described in LM-80 Section 5.0. 7.

2.5 FIXTURE TRANSFORMERS

A. Low voltage transformers:

1. Low voltage transformers shall be core and coil construction, unless otherwise noted.

2. Primary voltage shall be as noted in Fixture Schedule, secondary voltage 12 VAC, unless

otherwise noted.

3. Where transformers are integral to the fixture, they shall be accessible from below.

4. Sound rating shall be the lowest available. Replace excessively noisy transformers at no

cost to the Owner.

2.6 EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS

A. Internal type: Self-contained, modular, battery inverter unit factory mounted within the

fixture body.

1. Test switch and LED indicator light: Visible and accessible without entering ceiling

space.

2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, with a minimum nominal 10-

year life.

3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid state, constant-current type.

4. The product shall meet the U.L. Standard #924 "Emergency Lighting Equipment".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of lighting fixture



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Architectural Plans shall govern exact ceiling construction and mounting conditions for all

fixtures. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of fixture mounting and

compatibility with ceiling construction.

B. Fixtures in areas where exposed or concealed pipe and ductwork prevents direct access to the

structural ceiling, shall be provided with appropriate support system to suspend fixture below

obstructions to avoid conflicts with same.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting fixtures in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated

on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for all supports, hangers and hardware necessary for a




TRUCKEE, CA


C. Fixtures shall be plumb, level, square, in straight lines and without distortion. Remedy light

leaks that may develop after installation of recessed or enclosed fixtures.

3.4 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Physical supports:

1. Recessed fixtures in framed ceilings shall be supported by joist hangers fastened to

adjacent ceiling joists.

2. Recessed downlights in framed ceilings shall be supported with Manufacturers supplied

bar hangers and shall be installed according to the Manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Surface mounted fixtures solely supported by recessed boxes in a gypsum board ceiling

shall have a 1 1/8" steel bar screwed or welded to the back of the box. This steel bar

must be long enough to span two ceiling support channels and shall be attached to the

channels by twisting wire around the bar and the support channel. For fixtures weighing

over 50 pounds, provide fixture studs in recessed box.

4. Support surface mounted fixtures more than 18" wide at or near each corner or edge, in

addition to support from outlet box.

5. Twisting wire around the bracket and two adjacent ceiling support channel runners on

either side of fixture shall support recessed downlights manufactured with built-in

brackets.

6. Where ceiling and/or wall construction or pipe and/or ductwork is such that mounting

channels, strong-backs, trapezes, brackets, etc., are required to properly support fixtures,

provide these supports under this Section, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Support outlet boxes as specified in Section 260533: Boxes. Provide all boxes with

grounding pigtail.

8. On concrete ceilings, use one of the following for supporting fixtures other than by outlet

box:

a. Preset concrete inserts, provided inserts are completely covered by the fixture

canopy.

b. 1/4" by appropriate length wedge type anchor.

B. Seismic supports:

1. Recessed fixtures in suspended ceilings shall be supported by connecting two fixture

support wires to the fixture at diagonal opposite corners for fixtures weighing 56 pounds

or less. Connect four wires, one at each corner for fixtures weighing more than 56

pounds.

2. Surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be attached to the main ceiling

runner with at least two positive clamping devices and shall have a fixture support wire

attached to each clamping device and to the structure above.

3. Recessed downlight fixtures in suspended ceilings shall be supported by connecting one

fixture support wire to the fixture housing.

4. All suspended fixtures shall be able to swing 45 degrees from vertical in any direction

without obstruction. Furnish suspended fixtures with universal joint type hanger canopy



TRUCKEE, CA


and longitudinal sway adapter at each stem, to permit 45-degree swivel on 360-degree

circle at canopy and 45-degree longitudinal movement at sway adapter. Submit

Drawings of hanger assembly for review prior to ordering. If suspended fixture is not

free to swing 45 degrees in any direction, without obstructions, provide fixture seismic

restraint to prevent contact in conform to DSA IR 16-9.

5. Unless fixtures are cable hung, Contractor shall, provide for all suspended fixtures a

safety wire or cable attached to the fixture and structure at each support capable of

supporting four times the supported load.

6. All recessed fixtures shall be furnished with earthquake clips where installed in tee bar

ceiling.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

A. All junction box coverplates for the lighting branch circuit system shall be clearly marked

with a permanent black ink felt pen identifying the branch circuit (both panel designation and

circuit number) contained in the box.


A. Visual and mechanical inspection.

1. Inspect for physical damage, defects, alignment and fit.

2. Perform operational test of each lighting fixture after installed, circuited and energized.

3. Perform emergency operational test of all lighting fixtures connected to emergency

circuiting by interrupting normal power source.

B. Contractor shall replace at no cost to the Owner all equipment which is found defective or do


C. Mock-ups:

1. Where noted in the Fixture Schedule, the Contractor shall provide sample(s) for use in

full-size field mockup of specific lighting fixtures. The Contractor shall allow time in the

bid and be responsible for installing a sample fixture on the Project for review, prior to

acceptance and final installation of lighting fixture. This mock-up will be required to be

coordinated and reviewed with the Owner's Representative and the Architect or Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the labor and materials for the field

mock-up including, but not limited to, special rigging or scaffolding and adjusting

fixtures in field, as directed by the Architect or Engineer.

2. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual final

installation as to: height, distance from adjacent surfaces, material, color, etc. The

Contractor shall submit a written description of each proposed mock-up with Drawings in

order to obtain Architect’s approval prior to commencement of each mock-up.

3. The purpose of the mock-up is to study the general appearance and performance of and to

make comparisons between the various lighting systems. At that time, certain minimal

test variations may be requested as to reflector shape, color, etc. Final modifications, if

any, shall be considered a part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no

additional cost to the Owner.

3.7 ADJUSTING



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Field aiming: Where any adjustable light fixture is specified, the Contractor shall allow time

in the bid and be responsible upon the installation of the light fixtures, for aiming as

described in the fixture schedule. This aiming will occur at night under the direction of the

Owner's Representative and the Architect or Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible

for providing the labor and materials for field aiming. This shall include, but not limited to,

special rigging or scaffolding, adjusting fixtures in field, and testing of various lenses or

louvers with fixtures, as directed by the Architect or Engineer.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean lighting fixtures prior to Project closeout in accordance with Manufacturer's

recommended materials and methods.




TRUCKEE, CA

BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS 270010 - 1

SECTION 270010 – BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Table of Contents, Division 27 - Communications, Division 28 - Fire Life Safety:


270010 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

270528 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

270529 COMMUNICATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

270553 COMMUNICATIONS IDENTIFICATION

271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

275123 SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

286113 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

B. Work included: This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for

Division 27 and Division 28. The following administrative and procedural requirements are

included in this Section to supplement the requirements specified in Division 01.

1. Quality assurance.

2. Definition of terms.

3. Submittals.

4. Coordination.

5. Record documents.

6. Operation and maintenance manuals.

7. Rough-in.

8. Communications installation.

9. Cutting, patching, painting and sealing.

10. Field quality control.

11. Cleaning.

12. Project closeout.

C. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work


complete and operable installation.

1. General and supplementary conditions: Drawings and general provisions of Contract and

Division 01 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 27 Sections.

2. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the

installation of underground conduit, in-grade pull boxes, vaults, etc. Refer to Division

31, Earthwork.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. Selective demolition: Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or

salvage as indicated. Also dismantling communications materials and equipment made

obsolete by these installations. Refer to Division 02, Selective Demolition.

4. Concrete Work: Include forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast-in- place concrete, finishing

and grouting as required for underground conduit encasement, pull box slabs, vaults, etc.

Also includes setting of floor boxes in existing concrete slabs, saw-cutting of existing

slabs and grouting of conduits in saw-cut. Refer to Division 03, Concrete.

5. Miscellaneous metal Work: Include fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding

and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, cable trays, racks, etc. Refer to

Division 05, Miscellaneous Metals.

6. Miscellaneous lumber and framing Work: Include wood grounds, nailers, blocking,

fasteners and anchorage for support of communications materials and equipment. Refer

to Division 06, Rough Carpentry.

7. Moisture protection and smoke barrier penetrations: Include membrane clamps, sheet

metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealant as required for waterproofing of

conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors, ceiling slabs

and foundation walls. All penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade shall be

taped and made vaportight. Refer to Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

8. Access panels and doors: Required in walls, ceilings and floors to provide access to

communications devices and equipment. Refer to Division 08, Access Doors also,

Division 05, Metals.

9. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for exposed

conduit, pull and junction boxes, etc. where indicated as field painted in this Division.

Refer to Division 09, Painting.

10. Conduit: Include conduit and boxes for Interbuilding and Intrabuilding distribution of

cabling. Refer to Division 26: 260531, 260533 and 260543.

D. Work furnished and installed under another Division requiring connections under this

Division includes but is not limited to:

1. Elevator controllers.

2. Fire alarm control panel.

3. Temperature control panel(s).

4. Lighting control panels.

5. Mechanical control panel

6. Security alarm control panel(s)


A. Reference to Codes, Standards, Specifications and recommendations of technical societies,

trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such

publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Such codes or standards

shall be considered a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent than is

specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred authority

for reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Contract Documents. The Contract

Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

C. Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the latest edition

of all governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following

minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. California Electric Code (CEC).

2. California Building Code (CBC).

3. California Fire Code (CFC).

4. California Mechanical Code (CMC).

D. Standards: Equipment and materials specified under this Division shall conform to the

following standards where applicable:

ACI American Concrete Institute

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc

EIA Electronics Industries Alliance

ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

FCC Federal Communications Commission

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

NETA National Electrical Testing Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

TIA Telecommunication Industry Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adapter: Shall mean a connecting device joining two fiber connectors, either like or unlike.

B. Cabling: A system comprised of cables, wires, cords, and connecting hardware.

C. Channel: End-to-end transmission path, i.e. the entire portion of the horizontal cabling to

each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and,

if a full crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus

and equipment cord.

D. Connect: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross-connect wires, etc. to

complete an electrical or optical circuit.

E. Cord: Shall mean length of cordage having connectors at each end. The term “cord” is

synonymous with the term “jumper” and “lead.”

F. Identifier: A unique code assigned to an element of the telecommunication infrastructure that

links it to its corresponding record.



TRUCKEE, CA


G. Passive link segment: Shall mean the cable, connectors, couplings, and splices between two

fiber optic termination units.

H. Permanent link: Test configuration for a horizontal cabling link excluding test cords,

connections at the ends of the test cords, patch cords, equipment cords, line cords, etc. The

“permanent” portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of cable, consolidation

point (if used), termination/connecting apparatus in equipment rooms, and the connectors at

outlets.

I. Abbreviations:

1. BEP: Building Entrance Protection, for termination of OSP twisted pair cabling.

2. CAT: Category, used when identifying the performance characteristics of twisted pair

cabling.

3. CMP: Communication Media Plenum, rating applied to ISP twisted pair cable.

4. CMR: Communication Media Riser, rating applied to ISP twisted pair cable.

5. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Facilities, telecommunication equipment rooms housing

network equipment and containing termination fields for backbone cabling from MDF

and horizontal cabling from outlet devices.

6. ISP: Inside Plant, cable installation within building.

7. MDF: Main Distribution Facilities, telecommunication equipment room housing possible

service entrance facilities for interbuilding backbone cabling, network equipment, house

voice system equipment headend, backbone cabling distribution headend, termination

fields for backbone and horizontal cabling.

8. MMF: Multimode, fiber cable.

9. MPOE: Minimum Point of Entry, for serving telecommunications utility terminations.

House’s service provider’s termination field(s) and interfaces between utility’s facilities

and premises facilities.

10. NAM: Network Access Module, workstations.

11. OFN: Optical Fiber Non-conductive, general purpose indoor non-plenum rated.

12. OFNP: Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum, plenum rated cable.

13. OFNR: Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser, non-plenum rated riser cable.

14. OSP: Outside Plant, cable installation outside of building.

15. PIC: Plastic Insulated Conductors.

16. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.

17. SMF: Singlemode, fiber cable.

18. UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair, copper cable type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Format: Furnish in format as noted in Division 01.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Submittals shall consist of detailed Shop Drawings, Specifications, block wiring diagrams,

"catalog cuts" and data sheets containing physical and dimensional information, performance

data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication and material finish. Clearly

indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional

accessories which are included and those which are excluded. Furnish quantities of each

submittal as noted in Division 01.

C. Each submittal shall be labeled with the Specification Section Number and shall be

accompanied by a cover letter or shall bear a stamp stating that the submittal has been

thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and is in full compliance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Cover letters shall list in full the items and data submitted. Failure to

comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of data.

D. The Contractor shall submit detailed Drawings of all telecommunications equipment rooms

and closets if the proposed installation layout differs from the construction documents.

Physical size of telecommunications equipment indicated on the Drawings shall match those

of the telecommunications equipment that is being submitted for review, i.e.: equipment

racks, cable ladder, fuse protectors, ground bars, etc. Minimum scale: 1/4" = 1'- 0". Revised

telecommunications equipment layouts must be approved prior to release of order for

equipment and prior to installation.

E. The Manufacturer shall recommend the method of anchoring the equipment to the mounting

surface and shall provide the Contractor with the assembly dimensions, weights and

approximate centers of gravity.

F. All re-submittals shall include a cover letter that lists the action taken and revisions made to

each Drawing and equipment data sheet in response to Submittal Review Comments. Re-

submittal packages will not be reviewed unless accompanied by this cover letter. Failure to

include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the re-submittal package.

G. Substitutions:

1. All requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure

outlined in Division 01.

2. Where items are noted as "or equal," a product of equal design, construction and

performance will be considered. Contractor must submit to the Engineer all pertinent test

data, catalog cuts and product information required substantiating that the product is in

fact equal to that specified. Only one substitution will be considered for each product

specified.

3. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes

or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of

quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment, which in the opinion

of the Engineer is equal in quality, utility and appearance will be approved as

substitutions to that specified.

4. Whenever any material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with a Federal

specification, an ASTM standard, an ANSI specification, UL rating or other association

standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the Manufacturer certifying that

the product complies with the particular standard specification. When requested by the

Engineer, support test data to substantiate compliance shall be submitted by the

Contractor at no additional cost.



TRUCKEE, CA


5. Substitutions shall be equal, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, to the specified

product. The burden of proof of such shall rest with the Contractor. When the

Architect/Engineer in writing accepts a substitution, it is with the understanding that the

Contractor guaranteed the substituted article or material to be equal to the one specified

and dimensioned to fit within the construction. Approved substitutions shall not relieve

the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the Work or from any

provisions of the Specifications.

6. The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses in connection with the substitution

materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of the substitution on the

Contractor, Subcontractor's or other Contractor's Work. No substitution of material,

processes or equipment shall be permitted without written authorization of the

Architect/Engineer. Any assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution

prior to acceptance by the Engineer are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be so

notified, within sufficient time, as delineated in Division 01, prior to the Bid Opening to

allow the issuance of an Addendum.

2. If, in the event that time does not permit notification or clarification of discrepancies

prior to the Bid Opening, the following shall apply: The Drawings govern in matters of

quantity and the Specifications govern in matters of quality. In the event of conflict

within the Drawings involving quantities or within the Specifications involving quantities

or within the Specifications involving quality, the greater quantity and higher quality

shall apply. Such discrepancies shall be noted and clarified in the Contractor's Bid. No

additional allowances will be made because of errors, ambiguities or omissions that

reasonably should have been discovered during the preparation of the Bid.

B. Project conditions:

1. Examination of Project site: The Contractor shall visit the Project site and thoroughly

review the locale, working conditions, conflicting utilities and the conditions in which the

Telecommunications Work will take place. Verify all existing conditions in the field. No

allowances will be made subsequently for any costs that may be incurred because of any

error or omission due to failure to examine the Project site and to notify the Engineer of

any discrepancies between Contract Documents and actual Project site conditions.

2. Protection: Keep conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and other openings closed to

prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover fixtures, equipment, devices and apparatus and

protect them against dirt, paint, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and during

construction period. Prior to final acceptance, restore to original condition any fixture,

apparatus or equipment damaged including restoration of damaged factory applied

painted finishes. Protect bright finished surfaces and similar items until in service. No

rust or damage will be permitted.

3. Supervision: Contractor shall personally or through an authorized and competent

representative constantly supervise the Work from beginning to completion and, within

reason, keep the same foreman and workmen on the Project throughout the Project

duration.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. Preparation:

1. Drawings:

a. Layout: General layout indicated on the Drawings shall be followed except where

other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

b. Accuracy: Drawings for the Work under this Section are essentially diagrammatic

within the constraints of the symbology applied.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide Project Record Drawings as described herein:

1. Drawings shall fully represent installed conditions including actual locations of telecom

outlets, patch panels, termination blocks, security panels, security devices, fiber panels,

fire alarm panels, intercom systems, clock system, video system, labeling of all

components and systems, correct conduit and cabling as well as routing, revised fire

alarm schedule listing Manufacturers and products actually installed. Contractor shall

record all changes in the Work during the course of construction on black line prints.

These prints shall be made subject of monthly review by the Owner's Representative to

ascertain that they are current. If not current monthly payments may be withheld.

2. Record Drawings shall be the transfer of information on these prints to the construction

documents via computer aided drafting (CAD) or Revit process. A set of electronic Cad

or Revit files of the Telecommunications documents will be provided to the Contractor in

the design format.

3. Record drawing submissions shall be provided to the Engineer to review upon the

completion of the following phases of Work:

a. All underground installation.

b. Building communications rough-in.

c. Final communications installation.

4. A single set of half size prints of the Record Drawings shall be submitted for review.

Upon receipt of the Engineer's review comments, corrections shall be made and the

Contractor shall provide the following:

a. Two sets of full size prints.

b. Four sets of half size prints.

c. One electronic file of Cad or Revit

d. One electronic set in pdf.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prior to Project closeout furnish to the Owner, six (6) hard back 3-ring binders containing all

bulletins, operation and maintenance instructions, part lists, service telephone numbers and

other pertinent information as noted in each Section all equipment furnished under Division

26. Binders shall be indexed into Division Sections and labeled for easy reference. Bulletins

containing more information than the equipment concerned shall be properly stripped and

assembled.



TRUCKEE, CA


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Contractor shall verify lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be

responsible for the accuracy of the setting out of Work and for its strict conformance with

existing conditions at the Project site.

B. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements for

the actual equipment to be connected.

C. Refer to equipment specification in Divisions 22 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation, sequencing, handling and installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's

written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or accepted

equal except as otherwise specified. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Shop Drawings prepared by Manufacturer.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for telecommunications installations.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-

in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of telecommunications materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment

requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting height is not detailed or dimensioned, contact the Architect for direction

prior to proceeding with rough-in.

7. Coordinate connection of telecommunications systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,

franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for

each service.

8. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are indicated

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install telecommunications equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for

ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.



TRUCKEE, CA


11. Coordinate telecommunications systems, equipment and materials installations with other

building components.

12. Provide access panel or doors where devices or equipment are concealed behind finished

surfaces. Furnish and install access doors per the requirements of Division 08.

13. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to other systems

that are required to maintain a specified slope.

14. Conform to the National telecommunications Contractor's Association "Standard of

Installation" for general installation practice.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING, PAINTING AND SEALING

A. Structural members shall in no case be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that will

impair their structural value. Cutting of holes, if required, shall be done with core drill and

only with the approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer.

B. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent

installations.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected telecommunications systems equipment,

components and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of

telecommunications items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new

Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled

to be removed.

E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of

dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

F. Patch existing surfaces and building components using experienced installers and new

materials matching existing materials and the original installation. For installers'

qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building

components being patched.

G. Application of joint sealers:

1. General: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturers' printed application instructions

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent

requirements apply.

2. Installation of fire-stopping sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and other

accessory materials, to fill openings around telecommunications services penetrating

floors and walls, to provide fire-stops and fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or

wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements

established by testing and inspecting agency.


A. General testing requirements:

1. The purpose of testing is to ensure that all tested telecommunications equipment, both

Contractor and Owner supplied, is operational and within industry and Manufacturer’s

tolerances and is installed in accordance with design Specifications.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Tests and inspections shall determine suitability for energization.

3. Perform tests in presence of the Owner's Representative and furnish test equipment,

facilities and technical personnel required to perform tests.

4. Tests shall be conducted during the construction period and at completion to determine

conformity with applicable codes and with these Specifications.

B. Tests: In addition to specific system test described elsewhere, tests shall include:

1. Equipment operations: Test All systems for proper operation

2. Circuit numbering verification: Select on a random basis various patch panel ports and

wire test to verify compliance of the port labeling with actual field wiring.

C. Contractor shall perform testing on fiber strands with an OTDR and Power Meter.

D. Contractor shall perform testing on each cable of the Structured Cabling system with test

equipment that will provide a full test of the EIA/TIA requirements for the installed category

cable and provide test results of each cable under test.

E. Testing safety and precautions:

1. Safety practices shall include the following requirements:

a. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.

b. OSHA.

c. NSC.

d. NFPA 70E.

F. Calibration of test equipment:

1. Testing Agency shall have calibration program that assures test instruments are

maintained within rated accuracy.

2. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

a. Field instruments: Analog, 6 month maximum; Digital, 12 months maximum.

b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months.

c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor.

3. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment.

4. Records, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested, must be kept

up-to-date.

5. Up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures shall be maintained for test

instrument.

6. Calibration standards shall be of higher accuracy than instrument tested.

7. Equipment used for field testing shall be more accurate than instrument being tested.

G. Coordinate with General Contractor regarding testing schedule and availability of equipment

ready for testing.

H. Notify Owner and Engineer one week in advance of any testing.



TRUCKEE, CA


I. Any products which fail during the tests or are ruled unsatisfactory by the Owner's

Representative shall be replaced, repaired or corrected as prescribed by the Owner's

Representative at the expense of the Contractor. Tests shall be performed after repairs,

replacements or corrections until satisfactory performance is demonstrated.

J. Testing Agency shall maintain written record of tests and shall assemble and certify final test

report.

K. Include all test results in the maintenance manuals.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Prior to acceptance of telecommunications systems, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

telecommunications rooms from construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's

approved methods and materials.

B. Upon completion of Project, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

both the interior and exterior of all Telecommunications equipment per Manufacturers

approved methods and materials. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.

C. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.

3.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Training: At the time of completion, a period of not less than 2 hours shall be allotted by the

Contractor for instruction of building operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all

systems. This 2 hours training is in addition to any instruction time called out in the

Specifications for specific systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the

Contractor making all necessary arrangements with Manufacturer’s Representative. The

equipment Manufacturer shall be requested to provide product literature and application

guides for the users' reference. Costs, if any, for the above services shall be paid by the

Contractor.

B. Special tools: Provide one of each tool required for proper operation and maintenance of the

equipment provided under this Section. All tools shall be delivered to the Owner at the

Project completion.

C. Keying: Provide two keys for each lock furnished under this Section and turn over to Owner.




TRUCKEE, CA

COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS 270528 - 1

SECTION – 270528 – COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Cable trays.

2. Cable tray accessories.

3. Wire basket cable support system and accessories.

4. Cable runway.

5. Fiber Duct

6. Innerduct




1.2 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards except

as otherwise indicated or specified:


2. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):

3. Factory Mutual System (FM):

4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Regulations:




8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

9. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)



TRUCKEE, CA




NEMA VE 1; Cable Tray Systems

12. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products

ASTM A510 General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse

Round Wire, Carbon Steel

ASTM A633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc and Steel

1.3 DEFINITIONS




each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if

a full crossconnection is implemented, the cross connect termination/connecting apparatus

and equipment cord.













outlets.

I. Abbreviations:




TRUCKEE, CA



cabling.

























A. Pathways used underground, and above ceilings to convey fiber between buildings and

building Telecommunications rooms, and distribution cable between Telecommunications

rooms and cable outlets.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Cable Tray shall be located above accessible ceiling and will support distribution cable

between spaces within the building. Cable Tray shall be placed above ceiling in double-

loaded classroom wing cooridors. Cable tray shall be sized for 40% fill and have dividers

placed when using with different system cabling (i.e...security, fire alarm, etc..). Refer to

Cable Tray Section 270536

C. J-Hooks shall be used above ceiling to support cable from the data outlet conduit to the cable

tray or IDF room. J-hooks shall be sized for 40% fill.

D. A minimum of 2 conduit sleeves with bushings on both ends, shall be provided above ceiling

for pathway between classrooms, offices, workrooms, corridors etc... Sleeves shall be a

minimum of 2" and maximum 4" and shall be sized for a maximum 40% cable fill with one

spare conduit.

E. Innerduct shall be used in underground duct, steam tunnels and riser conduits between

Telecom rooms, to separate fiber optic cables.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 270010: Basic Communications





Basic Communications Requirements.


4. Complete Bill of Material listing all components.

B. Dimensions and configurations of equipment shall conform to the space allocated on the

Drawings. The Contractor shall submit a revised layout if equipment furnished varies in size

from that indicated on Drawings for the Engineer's approval.







A. Delivery: Equipment components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected

storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.



TRUCKEE, CA


Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to manufacturer at no

cost to Owner. Components shall be properly packaged in factory-fabricated containers and

mounted on shipping skids.




C. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to



1.8 WARRANTY




1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL:

A. Provide one spray can of matching finish paint for touching up damaged surfaces after

installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



B. Cable Tray

1. Chatsworth Products

2. Chatsworth Products

3. B-Line Systems, Inc.

4. Cablofil EZ Tray

C. Innerduct:

Carlon.

Endot.

MaxCell.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. J-Hooks Systems:

Erico Caddy Fastners.

B-Line.

Mono Systems

Or Approved Equal

E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 270010: Basic Communications Requirements.

2.2 SOLID-BOTTOM-TYPE CABLE TRAY

A. Assembly: Shall be complete to include tray, cover, accessories, fittings and supports as

required. Cable tray shall be NEMA VE 1; Class 12C.

B. Construction: Cable tray, accessories and fittings shall be constructed of galvanized.

C. Size: Cable tray size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings and/or sized for a

maximum 40% fill.

D. Inside radii of fittings: 24 inches.

E. Accessories and fittings: Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates,

reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors and grounding straps.

F. Covers: Non-flanged solid cover.

2.3 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY

A. Assembly: Shall be complete to include tray, cover, accessories, fittings and supports as

required. Cable tray shall be NEMA VE 1; Class 12C.

B. Construction: Cable tray, accessories and fittings shall be constructed of galvanized steel.

Cable tray bottom shall be ladder type with rungs spaced 9 inches on center.

C. Size: Cable tray size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.


E. Accessories and fittings: Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates,

reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors and ground straps.

F. Covers: Non-flanged solid cover.

2.4 CENTER SUPPORT LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Assembly: Shall be complete to include tray, accessories, fittings and supports as required.

Cable tray shall be NEMA VE 1; Class 12A.

B. Construction: Cable tray, accessories and fittings shall be constructed of aluminum alloy.

Tray shall utilize a center rectangular tube as a spine to which cross rungs are attached,

spaced 9 on center. Tray shall be supported from the center spine.

C. Size: Cable tray size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.


E. Accessories and fittings: Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, connectors and

ground straps.

2.5 WIRE BASKET SYSTEM SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide wire basket of type and sizes indicated; with connector assemblies, clamp

assemblies, connector plates, splice plates and splice bars. Construct units with round edges

and smooth surfaces, in compliance with applicable standards and with the following

additional construction features.

B. Construction:

1. Wire basket system shall be made of high strength steel wires and formed into a standard

2” x 4” wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. All wire ends along

system sides shall be rounded during fabrication.

2. All straight section longitudinal wires shall be straight, with no bends.

3. Wire basket size shall be as indicated on the drawings.

4. Wire diameter: 0.177 inches, minimum.

5. All fitting shall be field formed as needed to accommodate layout as indicated.

6. All splicing assemblies shall be the bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.

7. Hardware, including splice connectors and support components shall all be furnished by

Manufacturer.

C. Materials and finishes:

1. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication:

Straight sections shall be made from steel meeting the minimum mechanical

properties of ASTM A510 and shall be coated after the wire basket system has been

fabricated in accordance with ASTM A123 (CSA Type 1).



TRUCKEE, CA


All hot-dip galvanized after fabrication sections must be returned to the point of

manufacture after coating for inspection and removal of all icicles and excess zinc.

2. Electro-galvanized zinc: Support accessories and miscellaneous threaded hardware shall

be coated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC3. All threaded components shall be coated

in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1.

D. Support system:

1. Wire basket shall be pendant hung via threaded rods on each side of tray and expansion

anchors to form a trapeze system with construction channel.

2. Wall mounted to structural wall supports with manufacturers approved support hardware.

3. Wire basket under floor support stand designed to elevate basket 4” off the floor.

4. No hardware required to mount basket to bracket. Simply bend tabs of bracket down

around wires.

5. Attach bracket to floor using ¼” x 1” long expansion anchors.

2.6 J-HOOKS SYSTEMS

A. J-Hooks shall be installed a maximum of 48" apart.

B. J-Hooks shall be supported from decking or building structure useing methods approved by

the manufacturer.

C. Cable count shall not exceed manufacturers recommended maximum and shall be sized for

40% fill.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of cable tray



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Location of cable tray shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated with

ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas and shall not

unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipe, nor prevent removal of ceiling tiles or panels, nor

block access to mechanical or electrical equipment. Provide offsets as required to avoid

obstruction of cable tray with other trades.

B. Exposed cable trays shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of columns and

beams.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. Cable trays shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot water, steam line or

other heat producing source or three inches from such lines when crossing perpendicular to

the runs.

D. When cable tray is utilized for telecommunication cabling, it shall not be placed closer than 3

inches to any branch circuit power raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install cable tray in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on


B. Shall conform to NEMA VE 1 requirements.

C. Support cable tray at each connection point, at the end of each run and at other points to

maintain spacing between supports of 8 feet maximum.

D. Cable tray support shall be a trapeze type hanger system consisting of two (2) 3/8" threaded

rods supported from structure above with 1 5/8" x 1 5/8" construction channel span between.

Channel shall have 1" slots spaced 2" on center and be mounted with open side down. Mount

cable tray on trapeze hanger using hold-down clamps to secure.

E. Provide lateral bracing support along cable tray spaced at a maximum of 30'-0" on center.

Bracing shall consist of 1 5/8" x 1 5/8" construction channel attached to one side of trapeze

channel and installed at a 45-degree angle up to structural slab. Anchor bracing channel to

slab with expansion bolts. Alternate bracing on both sides of cable tray.

F. Use expansion connectors where indicated in NEMA VE 1.

G. Provide bonding continuity between cable tray sections and fittings and ground per NEC.

3.4 PENETRATION

A. Cable trays penetrating fire rated walls shall be the solid-bottom-type with a flanged-solid

cover and extend 18 inches beyond wall on both sides. Cover shall be sealed and non-

removable.

B. Wall shall be patched around cable tray per the requirements of Division 07.

C. Provide fire rated fire-stop pillows within solid cable tray to maintain fire separation rating of

wall. Install pillows per the requirements of the Manufacturer in quantities as required based

on opening size. Pillows shall be Nelson type PLW fire-stop or approved equal.

D. Provide fire rated sleeves when passing through walls.

3.5 CLEANING



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all

equipment per Manufacturers approved methods and materials. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt and debris.

B. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.




TRUCKEE, CA

COMMUNICATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 270529 - 1

SECTION 270529 – COMMUNICATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Materials to support cable runway, cable tray, conduit, junction boxes and terminal

cabinets.




1.2 REFERENCES













1.3 DEFINITIONS




each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if

a full crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus and

equipment cord.





TRUCKEE, CA












outlets.

I. Abbreviations:



cabling.

























TRUCKEE, CA



1.4 SUBMITTALS






a. Plan View of all main pathway systems including:

1) Cable riser systems.

2) Cable Tray

3) Cable Runway

4) J-Hooks

b. Drawings shall consist of support details and support points of cable tray and cable

runway installation.


Basic Communications Requirements.


5. Complete Bill of Material listing all components.

6. Final test results.

7. Warranty.

B. Dimensions and configurations of equipment shall conform to the space allocated on the

Drawings. The Contractor shall submit a revised layout if equipment furnished varies in size

from that indicated on Drawings for the Engineer's approval.






C. Manufacturer’s qualifications:

D. Installer’s qualifications:


A. Delivery: Equipment components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected

storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to manufacturer at no

cost to Owner. Components shall be properly packaged in factory-fabricated containers and

mounted on shipping skids.



TRUCKEE, CA





C. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to



1.7 WARRANTY




1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL:

A. Provide one spray can of matching finish paint for touching up damaged surfaces after

installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 MANUFACTURERS



1. Concrete fasteners:

a. Phillips "Red-Head".

b. Remington.

c. Ramset.

2. Concrete inserts and construction channel:

a. Unistrut Corp.

b. GS Metals "Globe Strut."


3. Conduit straps:

a. O-Z/Gedney.

b. Erico "Caddy" Fastening Products.



C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 270010: Basic Communications Requirements.



TRUCKEE, CA


2.3 CONCRETE FASTENERS

A. Provide expansion-shield type concrete anchors.

B. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers. Obtain approval by Architect and

Structural Engineer prior to use.

2.4 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Provide pressed galvanized steel, concrete spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting

square or rectangular support nuts of ¼ inch to ½ inch diameter thread for rod support.

2.5 THREADED ROD

A. Provide steel threaded rod, sized for the load unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in the

Specifications.

2.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL

A. Provide 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch (nominal), 12 gauge galvanized steel channel with 17/32-

inch diameter bolt holes and 1-1/2 inch on center in the base of the channel.

2.7 CONDUIT STRAPS

A. One hole strap, steel or malleable iron, with malleable iron clamp-back spacer for surface

mounted wall and ceiling applications.

1. Use malleable strap with spacers for exterior and wet locations.

2. Use steel strap without spacers for interior locations.

B. Steel channel conduit strap for support from construction channel.

C. Steel conduit hanger for pendant support with threaded rod

D. Steel wire conduit support strap for support from independent #12 gauge hanger wires.

E. Factory testing:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of supporting

device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do

not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 03, Cast-in-place concrete.

B. Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support the

equipment loads.

3.3 INSTALLATION



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Furnish and install supporting devices as noted throughout Division 27 and Division 28.

B. Telecommunication, Security, Fire Alarm and other system devices and conduit supports shall

be independent of all other system supports that are not structural elements of the building,

unless otherwise noted.

C. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using

precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

D. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster or gypsum board

partitions and walls.

E. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.

F. Use self-drilling anchors, expansion anchor or preset inserts on concrete surfaces.

G. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.

H. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit or acoustical

ceiling suspension wires.

I. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the Architect or

Structural Engineer.

J. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a

neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

K. Install surface-mounted cabinets with minimum of four anchors. Provide additional support

backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support cabinets and

panels.

L. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets in stud walls.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and

elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.5 WOOD SUPPORTS

A. Wood supports are not allowed on this project.

3.6 ANCHORAGE

A. All floor mounted, free standing telecommunications equipment such as racks and cabinets

etc... shall be securely fastened to the floor structure.




TRUCKEE, CA

COMMUNICATIONS IDENTIFICATION 270553 - 1

SECTION 270553 – COMMUNICATIONS IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - General

2. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Equipment Racks

3. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Equipment Cabinets

4. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Fuse Protectors

5. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Vertical & Horizontal Wire

Managers




1.2 REFERENCES













1.3 SUBMITTALS






TRUCKEE, CA


2. Schedules for nameplates to be furnished.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems:

a. Brady.

b. Panduit.

c. Tyton

2. Equipment Racks:

a. Chatsworth.

b. B-Line.

c. Panduit.

d. Ortronics

3. Equipment Cabinets:

a. Chatsworth.

b. Great Lakes.

c. Panduit.

d. Ortronics

4. Fuse Protectors:

a. Porta Systems.

b. Circa.

c. Systemex.

5. Vertical & Horizontal Wire Managers:

a. Chatsworth.

b. B-Line.

c. Panduit.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 270010: Basic Communications Requirements.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Type NP: Engraved, plastic laminated labels, Signs and Instruction Plates. Engrave stock

melamine plastic laminate 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 square inches or 8

inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved nameplates shall have white letters

and be punched for mechanical fasteners.

B. Color and letter height as specified in Part 3: Execution.

2.3 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATES

A. Coverplate material shall be as specified in Section 262726: Wiring Devices.

B. Methods of inscription: (Unless otherwise noted)

1. Type-on-tape:

a. Imprinted or thermal transfer characters onto tape lettering system.

b. Tape trimmer.

c. Matte finish spray-on clear coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of switchboard



3.2 APPLICATION

A. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - General

B. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Equipment Racks

C. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Equipment Cabinets

D. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Fuse Protectors

E. Identification Requirements and Labeling Systems - Vertical & Horizontal Wire Managers

3.3 NAMEPLATES

A. Installation:

1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

3. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.

B. Provide type 'NP' color coded nameplates that present, as applicable, the following

information:



TRUCKEE, CA


1. System and Equipment designations

C. Nameplates for signal systems equipment and devices are to be black except as follows:

1. Fire alarm and life safety - Red

2. Security/card access/CCTV systems - Green

3. Clock, intercom, sound, MATV, CATV - Blue

3.4 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATE

A. General:

1. Lettering type: Helvetica, 12 point or 1/8" high.

2. Color of characters shall be black.

3. Locate the top of the inscription ½” below the top edge of the coverplate.

4. Inscription shall be centered and square with coverplate.

B. Application:

1. Provide inscribed coverplates for devices as outlined below:

a. Telecommunication outlets.

2. Type-on-tape inscriptions shall be provided for the following devices:

a. Telecommunication outlets.

3. Type-on-tape installation:

a. Tape shall be trimmed to the height of the letters.

b. Trim tape length to 1/4 inch back from each edge of coverplate.

c. Contractor hands shall be clean or covered with surgical type glove prior to

application of tape. Tape installations with visible fingerprints or smudges will not

be acceptable.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all

equipment per Manufacturers approved methods and materials. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt and debris.

B. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.




TRUCKEE, CA

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1

SECTION 271500 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Horizontal twisted pair cabling.

2. Telecommunication testing.




1.2 RELATED SECTIONS



1.3 REFERENCES




FCC Part 15; Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits.

FCC Part 68; Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network.


EIA; Testing Standards.

3. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) / Telecommunications Industry

Association (TIA) / Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C; Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards,

including the following:

• Part 1: General Requirements.

• Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.

• Part 2, Addendum 1: Transmission Performance Specifications

for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cable.



TRUCKEE, CA


• TIA SP 3-4426 (12/28/06 or latest version): Transmission

Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Augmented

Category 6 Cable (to be published as TIA-568-C.2-10).

ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A; Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces, including the following:

• TIA/EIA-569-A-1: Perimeter Pathway Addendum.

• TIA/EIA-569-A-2: Furniture Pathway Fill Addendum.

• TIA/EIA-569-A-3: Access Floors.

• TIA/EIA-569-A-4: Poke-Thru Devices.

• TIA/EIA-569-A-6: Multi-Tenant Pathway and Spaces.

• TIA/EIA-569-A-7: Cable Trays and Wireways.

ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B; Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.

ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-B; Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure.

ANSI/J-STD-607-A; Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications.

ANSI/TIA/EIA-758; Customer-Owner Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling

Standard (TIA/EIA-758-1: Addendum No. 1).

TIA TSB-155; Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed

Category 6A Cabling to Support 10GBase-T.

4. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. (BICSI):

BICSI (TDMM); Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual.

BICSI; Customer-Owner Outside Plant Design Manual.

BICSI (WDRM); Wireless Design Reference Manual.

BICSI (NDRM); Network Design Reference Manual.

5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

ICEA S-80-576-2002; Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor

Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems.

ICEA S-83-596-1994; Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable.



TRUCKEE, CA


ICEA S-87-640-1999; Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.

ICEA S-90-661-2002; Category 3, 5 & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor

Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication

Wiring Systems.

ICEA S-104-696-2001; Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable.


UL 444; Communication Cables.

UL 497; Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communication Circuits.

UL 1651; Optical Fiber Cable.

UL 1690; Data-Processing Cable.

UL 1963; Communications-Circuit Accessories.

UL 2024A; Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Above finish floor (AFF) - Standard mounting height (e.g., 18 inch AFF) for a device using

the center line of the device as the measurement point.

B. Administration - The methodology defining the documentation requirements of a cabling

system and its containment, the labeling of functional elements and the process by which

moves, additions, and changes are recorded.

C. ANSI/TIA/EIA - Associations involved in developing telecommunications industry

standards.

D. Attenuation - The decrease in magnitude of transmission signal strength between points,

expressed in dB as the ratio of output to input signal level.

E. Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (ACR) - The ratio obtained by subtracting insertion loss

(attenuation [dB]) from near-end crosstalk (dB). ACR is normally stated at a give frequency.

F. Auditory assistance device - An intentional radiator used to provide auditory assistance to a

handicapped person or persons. Such a device may be used for auricular training in an

educational institution, for auditory assistance at places of public gatherings, such as a

church, theater, or auditorium, and for auditory assistance to handicapped individuals, only,

in other locations.



TRUCKEE, CA


G. Backboard - Backboard generally refers to the 3/4" A-C grade plywood sheeting, lining the

walls of the telecommunications room. Plywood shall be void-free, with two coats of fire

retardant paint matching the painted interior walls covering both sides.

H. Backbone - A facility (e.g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between any of the following

spaces: telecommunications rooms, common telecommunications rooms, floor-serving

terminals, entrance facilities, equipment rooms, and common equipment rooms.

I. Basic link test configuration - Horizontal cable of up to 90m (295 ft) plus up to 2m (6.5 ft) of

test equipment cord from the main unit of the tester to the local connection, and up to 2m

(6.5 ft) of test equipment cord from the remote connection to the remote unit of the tester.

Maximum length is 94 m (308 ft).

J. Bonding Conductor (BC) - A conductor used specifically for the purpose of bonding.

K. Cable Labeling System –

1. The scheme employed when identifying cable or its associated hardware.

2. Scheme adapted for labeling cables to identify them based on ANSI/TIA/ EIA-606-A,

Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.

See administration.

L. Cable Runway - Hardware designed and manufactured for horizontal pathway distribution of

cable and inside wiring inside the MC, IC, or TR rooms.

M. CAT - Category used when identifying the performance characteristics of twisted pair

cabling.

N. Ceiling Distribution System - A distribution system that utilizes the space between a

suspended or false ceiling and the structural surface above.

O. Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) - A private television system, typically used for security

purposes, in which the signal is transmitted to a limited number of receivers.

P. Communications plenum cable (CMP) - Type CMP communications plenum cable shall be

listed as being suitable for use in ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air

and shall also be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing

characteristics. (NEC)Cables must pass required test for fire and smoke characteristics of

wires and cables, NFPA 262 or UL 910.

Q. Communications Riser Cable (CMR) - Type CMR communications riser cable shall be listed

as being suitable for use in a vertical run in a shaft or from floor to floor and shall also be

listed as having fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from

floor to floor. (NEC) Cables must pass requirements for flame propagation.

R. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) - Radiated or conducted electromagnetic energy that has

an undesirable effect on electronic equipment or signal transmissions.



TRUCKEE, CA


S. Entrance Conduit - Conduit that connects the campus underground infrastructure with the

building's Telecommunications Room.

T. Fire Retardant - Any substance added to delay the start or ignition of fire or slow the spread

of the flame of any material.

U. Firestopping - The process of installing [specialty] listed fire-rated materials into penetrations

of fire-rated barriers to reestablish the fire-resistance rating of the barrier.

V. Firestopping Location. A penetration through a fire-rated wall with a sleeve.

W. Firestop System - A specific installation consisting of the material(s) (firestop penetration

seals) that fill the opening in the wall or floor assembly, and around and between any items

that penetrate the wall or floor (e.g., cables, cable trays, conduit, ducts, pipes), and any

termination devices (e.g., electrical outlet boxes) along with their means of support.

X. Grounding Conductor - A conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the buildings

main grounding busbar.

Y. Grounding System - A system of hardware and wiring that provides an electrical path from a

specified location to an earth ground point.

Z. Horizontal Cabling - The part of the cabling system that extends from the work area

telecommunications outlet to the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications room.

AA. Hybrid Cable - An assembly of two or more cables, of the same or different types or

categories, covered by one overall sheath.

BB. Infrastructure (Telecommunications) - A collection of those telecommunications

components, excluding equipment, that together provide the basic support for the distribution

of all information within a building or campus.

CC. Intermediate Cross-connect (IC) - the connection point between a backbone cable that

extends from the main cross-connect and the backbone cable from the horizontal cross-

connect.

DD. Loose Tube - A type of optical fiber cable construction where one or more fibers are laid

loosely in a tube. Also called loose tube fiber.

EE. Main Cross-connect (MC) - The cross-connect normally located in the Telecommunications

Equipment Room for cross-connection and interconnection of entrance cables, first-level

backbone cables, and equipment cables.

FF. Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) - A data communications network that covers an area

larger than a campus area and smaller than a wide area network. Typically interconnects two

or more LANs and usually covers an entire metropolitan area.



TRUCKEE, CA


GG. MPOE - Minimum Point of Entry, Utility Partnerships/Alternate Carrier, usually located

within the Telecommunications Room.

HH. Multimode Fiber (MMF) - An optical fiber that carries many paths of light or an optical

waveguide that allows many bound modes to propagate.

II. Single-mode Fiber (SMF) - An optical fiber, usually step-index grade, which supports only

one mode of light propagation. This does not necessarily imply single wavelength operation.

The light source is normally a laser.

JJ. Strand (STR) - A single unit of optical fiber within a cable (e.g., a 12-strand fiber cable has

12 individual optical fibers within the cable sheath).

KK. Telecommunications Entrance Facility - Utility Partnerships/Alternate Carrier Minimum

Point of Entry that is usually located within the Main Cross-connect Room (MC).

LL. Telecommunications Equipment Room (TER) - A centralized space that provides space and

maintains a suitable operating environment for the termination of backbone and campus

cabling and house centralized communications and/ or computer equipment (such as Core

Switches and Servers). Note: An equipment room is considered distinct from a

telecommunications closet because of the nature or complexity of the equipment housed by

the equipment room.

MM. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) - A grounding busbar, located in the

MC, connected to the main building ground electrode by a continuous 2/0 - #4 AWG wire

(Wire size is dependent on the distance between the busbar and the building main).

NN. Telecommunications Room (TR) – A room dedicated to housing a group of

telecommunications connectors (e.g., patch panel or punch-down block) that allows

equipment and backbone cabling to be cross connected with patch cords or jumpers.

OO. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - A United States-based independent testing laboratory that

sets safety tests and standards.

PP. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) - A device that is inserted between a primary power

source (e.g., a commercial utility) and the primary power input of equipment to be protected

(e.g., a computer system) to eliminate the effects of transient variances or temporary

outages.Retain acronyms, abbreviations, and terms that remain after this Section has been

edited.


A. Provide a complete telecommunication cabling system installation as specified herein and as

shown on the Drawings. In general, system shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

1. Work Station Horizontal twisted pair cabling:



TRUCKEE, CA


a. Horizontal twisted pair cables shall route between the IDF and workstation

outlets, and shall consist of Category 6 or Category 6A 4-pair, UTP, plenum

rated copper cables.

b. Category 6 horizontal twisted pair cable will support communication devices

such as but not limited to the following:

1) Data work stations

2) Telephones (VoIP)

3) Emergency Phones

4) Fax Machines

5) AV Equipment

6) HVAC Equipment

7) Intercom/clocks/bell System (InformaCast)

8) VoIP Phone System (Cisco)

9) Security Cameras

10) Security Alarm Panels

11) Fire Alarm Panels

c. Category 6A horizontal twisted pair cable will support communication devices

such as but not limited to the following:

1) Wireless Access Points (WAP) locations.

d. Category 6 horizontal twisted pair cables for data system applications shall

terminate on Category 6, patch panels for interface with routers/switches.

e. Category 6A horizontal twisted pair cables for WAP system applications shall

terminate on Category 6A, patch panels for interface with network switches.

f. Horizontal twisted pair security cables (Surveillance Cameras, Security

Intercom, Security Panels) shall terminate on Category 6, 19” wide patch panels

(48 port) with modular 8-pin connector front for interface with Owner furnished

routers/switches via Category 6, RJ45-RJ45 patch cords. Patch panels shall

have 110 type terminations at rear for horizontal cable terminations.

g. Angled horixontal wire management shall be provided every 4 angled patch

panels above and below, 2 RU.

h. Copper jack standard is Category 6 and Category 6A, RJ-45 connectors at patch

panels and workstation outlets.

2. Patch cords:

a. UTP patch cords shall match the physical and performance criteria of the

specified horizontal twisted pair cable from the same manufacturer. The cords

shall be terminate with:

1) 568A-568A for Data between network switch patch panel. Cord shall be

blue

2) 568A-568A for Data between network switch to cat 6 security patch

panel. Cord shall be green.

3) 568A-568A, Category 6A for Data jack to work station and WAP. Cord

shall be yellow.

4) 568A-568A for Security jack to camera, and security panels. Cord shall

be green.

b. Patch cords shall be furnished in varying lengths as required.



TRUCKEE, CA


c. Patch cord quantities shall match the following:

1) Two patch cords for each category 6 or 6A cable installed. This includes

one standard line cord at the work station and one patch cord at the

IDF/MDF room.

B. Workstation wall outlets:

1. Standard telecommunication outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise

noted on the Drawings:

a. Two horizontal twisted pair cable(s) per outlet UON. Blue cable

b. Single -gang cover plate with 4-ports.

c. RJ-45 connector jacks for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color to match

cable.

d. Blanks as required.

2. All data outlets shall be located within 12" from a 120V duplex power outlet.

C. Workstation furniture outlets:

1. Furniture telecommunication outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise


a. Two horizontal twisted pair cable(s) per outlet. Blue Cable

b. Furniture base cover plate with 4-ports.

c. Two RJ-45 connector jacks for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color to

match cable.

d. Blanks as required.

2. All data outlets shall be located within 12" from a 120V duplex power outlet.

D. Wireless Access Point Outlets

a. WAP telecommunication outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise


b. Two horizontal twisted pair category 6A cable(s) per outlet. Yellow cable

c. Two-gang cover plate with 2-ports when wall mounted.

d. Two port surface mount box (bisquit block) for above ceiling attached to 12

awg. steel wire or wall.

e. Two Cat 6A RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color

to match cable.

f. Blanks as required.

2. Surveillance Camera Outlets

a. Above ceiling telecommunication outlets shall consist of the following, unless

otherwise noted on the Drawings:

b. Two horizontal twisted pair cable(s) per outlet. Green for Cameras

c. Two port surface mount box (bisquit) for above ceiling attached to 12 awg. steel

wire or wall.

d. Two RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color to match

cable.

e. Blanks as required.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. Wall mounted telephone outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise noted

on the Drawings:

a. One horizontal twisted pair cable per outlet. Blue cable

b. Single-gang metal coverplate with 1-port and two support studs.

c. One RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color to match

cable.

4. Analog telephone outlets (Fire Alarm Panel, Security Panel, Elevator Phones) outlets

shall consist of the following, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings:

a. Two horizontal twisted pair cable per outlet. White cable

b. Two port surface mount box (bisquit) mounted in enclosure.

c. Two RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations, T568A. Color to match

cable.

E. Refer to Drawings for complete documentation of above requirements and all additional

requirements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS




and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed

standards.

2. Describe system operation, equipment, dimensions and indicate features of each

component.


application.

4. Shop Drawings prepare in Revit 2015, to include the following:

a. Building floor plans showing location of all outlets, raceways, cable trays,

conduits and cable routing to each device at same scale as construction

documents.

b. Provide 1/4" scale plans of equipment layout in BDF and IDF rooms.

c. Provide wall elevations of BDF and IDF rooms at 1/4” scale.

d. Provide equipment rack elevations at 1/4" scale.

e. Use identical symbols as those used in construction documents.

f. Text shall be a minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full scale.

g. Screen all background information.

5. Furnish structural calculations for equipment anchorage as described in Section

270010: Basic Communications Requirements.


7. Warranty.

B. Installer's qualifications: Furnish satisfactory proof of required experience specified herein

for system installer.

1. The installing contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer for the product

installed to provide a manufacturers product and application warranty.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Technicians shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system components installed

per the manufacturers requirements to provide a certified structured cabling system.

C. Record Drawings:

1. Furnish Record Drawings as described in Section 270010: Basic Communications

Requirements, utilizing Shop-Drawing submissions with updated field conditions.

These Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing point-to-point wiring location of all

devices.

b. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram showing the system components and all conduit

and wire type/sizes between each.

2. Drawings shall be incorporated into the Record Drawing submission.

3. Final acceptance will not be made until the Engineer has approved the Record

Drawings.



270010: Basic Communications Requirements, to include the following:



3. Schematic wiring diagrams.

4. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributor.

5. Final testing reports.




B. Only products and applications listed in this section may be used on the Project unless


C. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of

experience in design and manufacturing of the materials and equipment specified herein.

D. Installer's qualifications:

1. Installer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of experience in satisfactory

completion for Projects similar in scope and cost. Provide backup information on 5

such Projects.

2. Installer shall possess a current, active and valid C7 California State Contractors

License.

3. Conduit contractor shall possess a current, active and valid C10 California State

Contractors License.

4. The installer shall be the Manufacturer's certified reseller/installer of the

telecommunication equipment/cable system provided. The certification shall have



TRUCKEE, CA


been completed 60 days prior to project bid date. Provide evidence of this

certification.


A. Delivery: Telecommunication system components shall not be delivered to the Project site


not acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipping shall be replaced and returned to


B. Storage: Store in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain


construction debris and traffic.


prevent internal components damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall

not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a Life Time product

and application warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and

workmanship. Warranty shall be provided from the component manufacturer and shall name

the owner on the warranty certificate. Warranty shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.

B. Contractor shall provide required drawings, test results, application and any other items

required by the manufacturer to produce the required warranty.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance services:

1. Distributor of the major system components shall maintain a replacement parts

department and provide testing equipment when needed. A complete parts department

shall be located close enough to supply replacement parts within a 4 hour period.

2. Service must be rendered within 4 hours of system failure notification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be in compliance with all features

specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1. Horizontal twisted pair cable:

a. Berktek/Nexans



TRUCKEE, CA


b. Panduit

c. Commscope/Systimax

d. or approved equal

2. Cat 6 or Cat 6A Twisted pair patch cord cable:

a. Berktek/Nexans

b. Panduit


3. Category 6 and 6A Horizontal Structured Cable Systems

a. Berktek/Nexans

b. Panduit


4. Test equipment:

a. Fluke Networks.

b. Agilent Technologies WireScope 350 Test Set.

c. Tektronix.

B. Horizontal cable support bar:

1. Application: Suitable to horizontally support cables at termination points on back of

patch panels

2. Finish: Anodized Black

2.2 HORIZONTAL TWISTED PAIR CABLING

A. Horizontal cables:

1. Application:

a. Suitable for indoor installations, exposed within equipment rooms, above

suspended ceilings and below raised floors in cable trays, hangers or on deck, or

within walls. If space is used as an air plenum, cable shall either be plenum

rated or installed in EMT conduit.

b. Each cable run shall be continuous single cable, homogenous in nature, without

splices.

c. Cables shall meet CAT6 and 6A performance criteria.

d. Cables shall be CMR or CMP rated as required for rating of space..

2. Conductors:

a. Insulated conductors: Eight #22 AWG, solid copper wire insulated with FEP

for plenum applications or thermoplastic polyethylene or high-density

polyolefin for non-plenum rated applications.



TRUCKEE, CA


b. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair and

four such paired cables to form a unit with individually color-coded pairs to

conform to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994 and

EIA-230).

3. Cable sheath:

a. Outer jacket: Seamless outer jacket, flame-retardant PVC, applied to and completely

covering the internal components (twisted pairs).

b. Flame rating: CMP according to NEC Article 800, tested to NFPA 262 and UL

Listed as such.

4. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 for CAT6 and Cat 6A UTP

cabling.

5. Color

a. Blue for workstation data

b. Yellow for Wireless Access Points (WAP)

c. Green for surveillance cameras

d. White for analog phones

B. Patch Cords

1. Application: Suitable for indoor installations within equipment rooms or workstation

environments.

2. Cords assembled from a single, continuous length of cordage, homogenous in nature

and terminated at both ends via 8-position modular plugs. Splices are not permitted

anywhere.

3. Cordage:

a. Insulated conductors: Eight #24 AWG, solid copper wire insulated with

thermoplastic polyethylene or high-density polyolefin for non-plenum rated

applications.

b. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair and

four such paired cables to form a unit with individually color-coded pairs to

conform to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994 and

EIA-230).

4. Cable sheath:

a. Outer jacket: Seamless outer jacket, flame-retardant PVC, applied to and

completely covering the internal components (twisted pairs).

b. Flame rating: CM according to NEC Article 800, tested to UL listed as such.

5. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 for CAT6 and Cat 6A UTP

cabling.

2.3 CATEGORY 6 SECURITY DISRIBUTION PATCH PANELS



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Application: To terminate horizontal distribution cable for security panels and surveillance

cameras. The patch panels shall match the category of the horizontal cable and be from the

same cable manufacturer or matched to the cable manufacturer for maximum warranty as

required by the manufacturer.

1. Copper patch panels shall be 19” rack mountable 24/48 ports and shall be no more

than two rack mounting units in height.

2. All copper patch panels shall have IDC-type terminating blocks.

3. There shall be port identifier label space on the front and shall also include a port

identifying number.

2.4 CATEGORY 6 AND 6A DATA SYSTEM PATCH PANELS

A. Application: To terminate horizontal distribution cable for data and telephone systems. The

Termination panels shall be Cat 6, 2U, 48 port angled panels.

B. Application: To terminate horizontal distribution cable for data WAP locations. The

Termination panels shall be Cat 6A, 1U, 24 port angled panels.

2.5 COPPER RISER TERMINATION BLOCKS

A. Application: To terminate riser copper cable.

B. Materials

1. 100 pair 110 termination blocks with C5 connectors

2.6 WORKSTATION JACKS AND WALLPLATES

A. Outlet faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installations to standard single gang flush wall

mounted outlet box plaster rings, and floor boxes.

B. Outlets:

1. Data Jacks shall be 8 pin, IDC termination and rated Category 6.

a. Voice/Data/ Jack: Blue

b. Security Camera Jack: Green

2. Standard wall mounted faceplates:

a. Faceplate shall be single-gang, flush mounted with 4 ports and shall include

required accessories.

b. Faceplate shall be White ABS Plastic with a ID label window at the top and

bottom of the plate.

3. Partition furniture mounted faceplates:

a. Faceplates shall have 4-ports and shall include required accessories, such as icons,

blank inserts, label windows and labels.



TRUCKEE, CA


b. Furniture plate shall match the type furniture installed for a seamless snap in fit to the

base knock out of the installed furniture.

c. Faceplates shall match the color of the furniture base.

4. WAP Data Jacks shall be 8 pin, IDC termination and rated Category 6A.

a. WAP Jack : Yellow

C. Labels:

1. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer

printer or hand-held printer.

2. Labels for horizontal cables:

a. Adhesive backed labels and self-laminating feature.

b. Fit the horizontal cables specified herein by fully wrapping around the cable

jacket.

c. Size: 2” x .05” printable area, minimum.

d. Color: White with black lettering

D. Miscellaneous components:

1. Velcro cable ties:

a. Width: 0.75”.

b. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is applied.

2. Plenum cable ties:

a. Suitable for use in plenums or air handling spaces.

b. Color: Maroon or other distinctive non-white color.

2.7 CABLE TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Twisted pair cabling:

1. Horizontal cable tester:

a. Equipment shall meet TIA/EIA-568C.2 Addendum 1 requirements for Level III

accuracy, as applicable for cable type specified herein.

b. Test standards: ISO/IEC 11801 Class C and D; ISO/IEC 11801-2000 Class C

and D, 1000Base-Y, 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3 10Base-T; ANSI TP-PMD;

IEEE 802.5.

c. Areas of test measurement (minimum):

1) Wire Map.

2) Length.

3) Insertion Loss.

4) The following at both master unit and remote unit:

a) Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

b) Power Sum NEXT (PSNEXT) loss.

c) Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT).

d) Power Sum ELFEXT.

e) Return Loss (RL).

f) Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio (ACR).

g) Power Sum ACR (PSACR).



TRUCKEE, CA


5) Propagation Delay and Delay Skew.

6) Characteristic Impedance.

7) DC Loop Resistance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of the

telecommunication cabling system installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and

specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made

satisfactory.

B. Verify that pathways and supporting devices are properly and completely installed prior to

cable installation.

C. Verify dimensions of pathways to include length, i.e. “true tape” conduit runs.

D. Prior to installation, verify that equipment rooms are ready to accept cables and terminations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Horizontal management panels:

1. Provide the horizontal management panels mounted to racks with one above the top

patch panel and one below the bottom patch panel in each rack bay where patch panels

occur. Panels shall be angled

2. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.

B. Accessories: Provide all accessories as required for a complete installation. Include one bag

of rack mounting screws, as come packaged with rack product. Attach the screws directly to

the rack, which shall constitute turn-over to the Owner.

C. Horizontal twisted pair cabling:

1. Horizontal cable installation and routing:

a. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature with

no splicing.

b. Cabling shall not exceed a cable length of 295’ (90m) from the termination

point at the Telecom room to the termination at the workstation outlet, including

service slack, when measured using test equipment.

c. Place cables within the designated pathways, such as cable tray or basket tray,

cable runway, cable hangers, etc. Do not fasten, support or attach cables to

other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits, etc.), other systems

(i.e. ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc.), or to the outside of conduits, cable

trays and non-approved pathway systems.

d. Place and suspend cables during installation and termination in a manner to

protect them from physical damage or interference. Place cables with no kinks,



TRUCKEE, CA


twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during

installation or termination at no additional cost.

e. Route cables at 90º angles, allowing for bending radius.

f. Do not exceed pulling tension of 25 lbs.

g. Do not use cable-pulling compounds.

h. Do not exceed a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and

after installation.

i. Route cables beneath other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits,

etc.) in above ceiling applications. Do not route cables over building

infrastructure/s. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables

in the future.

j. Place cables 6” minimum away from power sources to reduce interference from

EMI.

k. Do not set 360º service loops in place for slack storage. Instead, set slack as

forward-and-back or as figure eights.

l. Place a pull string along with cables where run in conduits and spare capacity in

conduit remains. Tie off ends of the pull string to prevent the string from

falling onto the conduit.

m. When exiting the primary pathway, such as cable or basket tray, to the

workstation outlets, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the

pathway using an approved velcro cable tie.

2. Cable routing and dressing within telecommunications rooms:

a. Within rooms, only use Velcro type straps.

b. Place cables within the overhead cable support system. When routing vertically

on walls, fasten the cables onto vertical supports every 24” on center.

c. Provide 12” minimum sheath cable slack, length not to exceed permanent link

maximum length requirement. Place the slack in the overhead cable support

system.

d. At the rack bay, route and neatly dress cables from the overhead cable support

system into the back of the vertical management sections. Divide the cables

equally between both sides of an equipment rack such that a cable does not

travel past the midpoint of the rack prior to termination. Fasten the cables to the

cable support bar at the back of the patch panel using approved ties.

3. Termination in the telecommunications rooms:

a. Provide termination apparatus and accessories required for a complete

installation. Install and assemble termination apparatus, accessories and

associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Properly relieve strain from the cables to and at termination points per

manufacturer’s instructions. Provide a strain relief bar at the back of the

modular patch panels for proper strain relief.

c. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer’s latest

installation requirements and TIA/EIA-568-C standard installation practices.

Terminate cable pairs onto the termination apparatus compliant to T568B

wiring.

d. Modular patch panels and horizontal management panels:

1) Provide quantity of patch panels to support the terminations of cables

served from respective Telecom Room.



TRUCKEE, CA


2) Install and assemble aptch panels and wire management panels according

to the manufacturer’s instructions.

3) Install the termination hardware and cable management as shown on the

Drawings.

4) Terminate cables in sequential order using the link’s identifier starting at

the top left and completing a block before moving to the next block

below.

5) Terminate all WAP cables on it's own patch panel.

4. Cable routing and dressing at workstations:

a. Provide 18” cable slack at each workstation outlet, length not to exceed permanent

link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within ceiling space neatly on a

cable hanger or other approved cable support device.

b. Route to partition furniture mounted faceplates:

1) Route cables from primary or secondary pathway within ceiling through the

furniture partition feed pathway (stub from wall or floor box) into opening at

bottom of furniture system. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting or other

damage to cable jacket.

2) Provide spiral wrap around cables from furniture-feed pathway to point where

cables enter furniture.

5. Termination at the workstation outlets:

a. Provide device components, connectors, and accessories required for a complete

installation. Install and assemble connectors, jacks, adapters, termination apparatus,

accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

b. Provide blue connectors for data links, yellow connectors for wireless data, and green

connectors for cameras.

c. Wall mounted standard devices:

1) Install devices at heights indicated on drawings.

2) Mount faceplates plumb, square and at the same level as adjacent power

receptacles.

3) Patch gaps around faceplates so that faceplate covers the entire wall

opening.

d. Partition furniture mounted devices:

1) Coordinate installation of the faceplate adapters with the furniture

contractor, including color.

2) Mount faceplate adapters into the designated openings for horizontal

cables.

e. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest

installation requirements and TIA/EIA-568-B standard installation practices.

Terminate cable pairs onto the connector compliant to T568A wiring.



TRUCKEE, CA


6. Patching and cross connecting:

a. In equipment rooms, provide one modular patch cord for each connector jack in

each workstation outlet. Install from the horizontal termination field to the

network switches/equipment. Neatly dress patch cords within the horizontal

and vertical cable management components. Cords lengths shall be coordinated

with the owners IT representative.

b. At work station, provide one modular patch cord for each cable jack installed in

each workstation outlet. Cords shall include:

1) 100% of cords shall be 10'

3.3 LABELING

A. General requirements:

1. Labeling, label colors, and identifier assignments shall conform to EIA/EIA-606-A

Administration Standards and as approved by the Owner.

2. Provide permanent and machine-generated labels. Hand written labels will not be

accepted.

B. Horizontal twisted pair labeling:

1. Cables:

a. Text color shall be black, #10 font size.

b. Label installation:

1) Provide labels on both ends of cable.

2) Install labels such that they are visible by technician from a normal

stance.

3) Fully wrap label around the cable jacket (self lamination).

4) Provide one label within 4” of the termination apparatus.

2. Modular patch panels:

a. Text color shall be black, #10 font size .


1) Provide a Letter designation for each panel (A, B, C etc...). Patch Panel

port number will match the cable designation at the station end..

3. Outlets:

a. Text color shall be black, #10 font size.


1) At faceplates, provide labels above and below jacks.

2) At surface boxes, provide labels on the top of the box.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A. General:

1. Calibrate test sets and associated equipment per the manufacturer's instructions at the

beginning of each day’s testing and after each battery charge. Fully charge the test sets

prior to each day’s testing to ensure proper operation.

2. Ensure test equipment and test cords are clean and undamaged during testing

activities. Per the Engineer’s discretion, halt testing activity and clean testing

equipment, test cords and related apparatus.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. Permanently record test results electronically within test equipment at the time of

testing.

B. Twisted pair testing:

1. Test for UTP cabling as follows:

TESTS FOR CATEGORY 6 CABLING TABLE

Subsystem Type Test Configuration Notes

Horizontal CAT6 and

Category 6A

Category 6

Category 6A

Permanent

Link

Per TIA/EIA-

568-C.2

2. Precautions:

a. Adhere to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions during all testing.

b. Prior to any testing activity or any measurements taken, ensure the test

equipment is at room temperature, approximately 70ºF.

c. Fully charge power sources before each day’s testing activity.

3. Horizontal twisted pair testing:

a. Test equipment set-up:

1) Set-up the tester to perform a full CAT6 and/or Cat 6A test, as a

Permanent Link configuration.

2) If the tester has the capability, set the cable type as product specific

setting. If not, set as generic CAT6, or Cat 6A cable.

3) Set the tester to save the full test results (all test points, graphs, etc.).

4) Save the test results with associated cable link identifier.

5) Calibrate the test set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Acceptable test results measurements:

1) Overall test results:

a) Links which report a Fail, Fail or Pass for any of the individual

tests shall result in an overall link Fail. All individual test results

must result in a Pass to achieve an overall Pass.

b) Any reconfiguration of link components required as a result of a

test Fail, must be re-tested for conformance.

c) Remove and replace any cabling links failing to meet the criteria

described in this Specification, at no cost to the Owner, with

cables that prove to meet the minimum requirements.

2) Wire map: Provide continuous pairs and terminate all of the cabling

links correctly at both ends, no exceptions taken.

3) Length: Ninety-four meters (308 feet) is the maximum acceptable

electrical length measurements for any cabling link measured under a

Permanent Link configuration, including test cords.

4) Insertion loss: The acceptable insertion loss measurements for any

horizontal cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in

TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

5) Worst pair-to-pair near end crosstalk (NEXT) loss: The acceptable worst

pair-to-pair NEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that which is no greater

than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-C.2.



TRUCKEE, CA


6) Power sum NEXT loss: The acceptable power sum PS-NEXT loss for

any horizontal cable is that which is no greater than that listed in

TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

7) Worst pair-to-pair ELFEXT and FEXT loss: The acceptable worst pair-

to-pair ELFEXT and FEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that which is

no greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

8) Power sum ELFEXT and FEXT loss: The acceptable PS-ELFEXT and

PS-FEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that which is no greater than

that listed in TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

9) Return loss: The acceptable return loss measurements for any horizontal

cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-

C.2.

10) Propagation delay and delay skew: The acceptable propagation delay and

delay skew measurements for any horizontal cabling link is that which is

no greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

C. Record documents:

1. Permanently record all test results.

2. Export test results’ numerical values to a single Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

3. Submit test results in a format acceptable to the Owner, Owner’s Representative and

the Engineer before system acceptance.

4. Cable, fiber and pair identifiers of the test reports shall match the identifiers as labeled

in the field, i.e. use the same ID on the cable/termination label as what appears on the

test report.

5. Measurements shall carry a precision through one significant decimal place, minimum.

6. Use feet for the units for measurements shown on the print of the test measurements.

7. Print report such that fiber strands of a given cabling link have matching axis scales.

The “X” and the “Y” axis shall be the same from report-to-report.

8. The trace of the printed test report shall show the launch cord.

9. For each fiber optic cable test, report shall contain the following information:

a. Project name and address.

b. Test company’s and Operator’s name.

c. Date measurements were taken.

d. Test equipment type to include model and serial numbers.

e. Cable identification number, fiber/strand number and fiber type (i.e. multimode,

, etc).

f. Measurement direction.

g. Set-up parameters (i.e. wavelength, pulse width, refractive index, event

threshold, etc.)

h. Length of fiber.

i. Overall link loss.

j. Passive link insertion loss testing:

1) Wavelength.

2) Loss measurement.

k. Pass/Fail

10. For each cabling link, include either a schematic graphic or a brief narrative accurately

describing the test set-up. The description shall include test/launch cord (with length),



TRUCKEE, CA


expected events (connectors, slices, etc.) with expected distances, etc. This

information will eliminate many questions the Engineer will have while reviewing the

reports.

11. For each twisted pair horizontal cable test, report shall contain the following

information:

a. Project name and address.

b. Test company’s and Operator’s name.

c. Date measurements were taken.

d. Test equipment type to include model and serial numbers.

e. Cable identification number and pair number.

f. Measurement results.

g. Pass/Fail

3.5 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Contractor shall inspect all installed Work in conjunction with the General Contractor and

develop a "punchlist" for all items needing correction. Provide punchlist to the Engineer

prior to their final walk of Project.

B. Punchlist work and the required remediation shall be performed prior to system final

acceptance.

C. Replace or repair work completed by others that was defaced or destroyed during the

installation of the telecommunication cabling system by this contractor.

D. Make changes to adjust the system to optimum operation for final use. Contractor is

responsible for making changes to the system such that any defects in workmanship are

correct and all cables and the associated termination hardware passes the minimum test

requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove all unused, excess and left over products, to include debris, spills, and installation

equipment.

B. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean conditions with no evidence of

damage.

C. Legally dispose of debris.

D. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to final punch

list.

3.7 TRAINING



TRUCKEE, CA


A. At the completion of all Work, a period of not less than 4 hours shall be allocated by the

Contractor for instruction and training for the Owner’s Representative. The Cabling

Contractor will need to describe how the cable from each cover plate is separated between

different patch panels and 110 blocks, how cross-connects are made and other basic cable

plant management skills.





TRUCKEE, CA

SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 275123 - 1

SECTION 275123 – SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. IP Intercom/public address system.

2. IP Clock System




1.2 REFERENCES




UL 13; Power-Limited Circuit Cables.

UL 50; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

UL 813; Commercial Audio Equipment.


A. InformaCast (Singlewire) is a District-wide server based paging system (v.11.0.2) that

utilizes IP based multicast packets for the purpose of voice and data communications. The

InformaCast paging server is currently installed at the district Network Operations Center

(NOC), located on the second floor of Truckee High School. Access to the system is through

a web page for all designated users. Basic access is also available through the Cisco phone

system, with the Cisco Unity server also being located at the NOC. Message delivery is

accomplished via speakers with both on the wall traditional installed devices, and also

through the phone speakers. Text messaging is available to speakers with digital clocks

where the clocks also act as a scrolling marquee. Text will be available on the phones that

offer some sort of LCD display.

B. The system connects via switches and routers to all of the school sites. At this time, all sites

have at least one working IP speaker installed. All switches and routers must pass multicast

packets.

C. All speakers will be IP based speakers with SIP compatibility.

D. All classroom clock/speakers will support talkback (microphone), and have a digital clock

that can be used as a scrolling marquee.

E. The speakers will be installed on switch ports configured to VLAN 103.

F. All phones will be on VLAN 100 with the integrated switch to have access to VLAN 24 (data

identification for phone system).

G. All phones in regularly occupied spaces will have a large LCD display at least 3” x 4” they

can be black and green (such as a Cisco 7942) or color display capable of being integrated



TRUCKEE, CA


with the InformaCast system. The Cisco phones will also have an integrated switch within

the phone handset with an available data port.

H. Furnish all labor, project management, materials, tools, equipment and resources necessary

for the installation of a new Intercom System as shown on the plans and as herein specified.

I. It is the intent of these specifications and the accompanying plans that the Contractor

furnishes and installs a system complete in every respect and ready to operate. All

miscellaneous items and accessories required for such installation, whether or not each such

item or accessory is shown on the plans or mentioned in these specifications, shall be

furnished and installed.

J. Furnish additional items not mentioned herein to meet requirements as specified without

claim for additional payments. Items, may include hardware, rack panels, termination blocks

etc., software and other devices that are required for installation.

K. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to examine the plans and specifications

carefully before submitting his bid. Any questions or discrepancies discovered shall be

brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, prior to bid, and resolved by way of

addendum.

L. The features currently provided by this system are:

1. Mass paging (via Web, Cisco phones with services configured, phone via internal phone

# or external phone #)

2. Individual speaker paging when possible (via Web or my internal phone #)

3. Text messages (via Web console delivered to phones currently)

4. Intercom (key site users only)

5. Clocks

6. Bells (Programmed by the IT Department, with trained staff at each school site)

7. Panic buttons (one per site already configured prerecorded voice and text)

8. E911 notification (to key personnel via phone and email)

9. Panic button located on each school main office phone (Cisco model #7962) with relay to

InformaCast system, which will tie in to magnetic door hold open release systems for all

classroom doors, both new construction and modernization/renovation doors. The

InformaCast system will also be programmed with pre-recorded security message that is

to be broadcast via intercom speakers. Note that fire doors are connected to the Fire

Alarm system.

M. Features that may be used at some point:

1. RSS feeds to different people and devices (i.e. weather)

2. Outbound emails (in limited use now for E911)

3. Connect to blackboard connect (mass notification system

4. )Use of clocks as scrolling marquee



TRUCKEE, CA


5. InformaCast Mobile client (a cloud-based broadcast service that allows people to send

and receive text, audio, image, and other forms of notification via mobile devices running

iOS or Android. Note – The District may need to add a license).

N. Furnish and install all necessary equipment, including but not limited to back boxes, specialty

boxes, speakers, wall plates, supports and enclosures.

O. Furnish and install all necessary structured cabling as needed from speakers and other IP

equipment to IDF’s or MDF, and provide for all network connectivity (i.e. fiber patch cables,

Cat6 cable, etc.) for distribution of the intercom system.

P. Furnish all programming of the system (initial and final) and audio level adjustments (initial

and final).

Q. All materials, equipment and apparatus provided shall be new and of the latest design or

model offered for sale by the manufacturer.

R. An uninterruptible power supply ‘UPS’ shall be provided for the school communication

system and sized to allow 100% battery operation for a period of 30 minutes.

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate the installation of equipment

with the other contractors on site, the Architect, and the Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Documentation on the network requirements that are needed for proper installation and

distribution.




component and cross referenced with a Component Block Relationship Diagram.


application.


a. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing location of and conduit routing to all

devices.

b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams in block or riser format showing all components,

conduit and wire types and sizes with cable legend.

c. Provide ¼” scale plan of equipment layout in main equipment room (MDF).

d. Include elevations of equipment rack(s).


Basic Communications Requirements Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.

7. Complete Bill of Materials listing all components.

8. Warranty.

B. Installer's qualifications: Furnish satisfactory proof of required experience specified herein

for system installer.



TRUCKEE, CA


C. A copy of the intercom contractor’s valid state contractor's license (C7) and written

confirmation from the factory that he is an authorized distributor/installer of the submitted

equipment.

D. The following information shall be submitted at the end of the project and included in O&M

Manuals.:

1. Copy of product data cut sheets as submitted for review as noted above.

2. Complete as-built drawings on scaled floor plans depicting the final location of all

equipment, each device, and cable routing as installed.

3. Certificate of Completion identifying that the installation is complete, programming is

complete, training of the Owner and appropriate staff is complete. Certificate shall be

signed by the Contractor and the Owner, and dated.

4. The following information shall be submitted at the end of the project and provided

during Owner training:






C. Installer's qualifications: Firms with a minimum of 5 years of successful installation

experience with projects utilizing school communication systems similar to that of this

Project.

D. The system shall be approved for direct interconnection to the utility services under part 68 of

FCC rules and regulations. Those systems that are not FCC approved or utilize an

intermediary device for connection, will not be considered. Provide FCC registration number

of system being proposed in equipment submittal.

E. Underwriter’s Laboratories under UL Standard 1459 shall list the communication system

supplied. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the

Contractor's submittal.


A. Delivery: School communication system components shall not be delivered to the Project

site until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material

is not acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipping shall be replaced and returned to


B. Storage: Store in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain






1.8 WARRANTY



TRUCKEE, CA





1.9 SYSTEM START-UP


initial start-up of the school communication system. Sufficient time shall be allowed to

properly check the system out and perform required minor adjustments before the Engineer's

witnessed test shall begin.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Informacast/Cisco

B. Atlas Clock/Speaker

C. Other manufacturers systems and suppliers are not acceptable.


A. Components of the IP Intercom System shall provide a complete system IP Based solution for

a fully functioning Intercom System (IC) and Public Address System (PAS) for the project.

System shall include software from a single manufacturer for complete control and

monitoring of the system for a fully supported system. System shall be IP based and operate

over a separate school Local Area Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN).

B. Contractor shall provide all system programming for configuration and interfaces.

C. System shall be capable of being configured and controlled remotely via Owner provided

connectivity (e.g. via a smart phone, VPN, etc.).

D. System shall include General Purpose Input and Output (GPIO) trigger points for interfacing

to other systems including Emergency and Security Systems, to provide event driven

configuration scenarios for the system.

E. Each classroom shall be a “zone” on the system capable of individual intercom use or as part

of a “zone group” or “all call” during Public Address System use. Classroom end device shall

be a PoE device attached to the school network.

F. Common areas, including but not limited to, Corridors, Commons (cafeteria), Multi-Purpose,

Media Center, Mechanical Rooms, and Restrooms, shall be provided with PAS coverage

from the system for general and emergency announcements.

G. System shall provide multicast for configuration of LAN and WAN with standard Ethernet

protocols.

H. System shall provide opening tones and messages for announcements to speakers.

I. All common area loudspeakers shall operate from a network switch. The loudspeakers shall

be grouped in modular zones allowing maximum flexibility for paging area assignment.

J. Server, Software and Operating System shall be provided and connected to a separate Owner

LAN. Provide all necessary hardware for support of system software.

2.3 CURRENT DISTRICT HARDWARE:



TRUCKEE, CA


A. InformaCast server located at the High School NOC

B. Cisco phones 7942, 7962, 8961, and 6901 (in unoccupied areas)

C. Valcom VIP-490AL-bge-IC Small Flex Horn

D. Valcom VIP-148AL-BGE-IC Large Horn (outside areas and gyms)

E. Valcom VIP-580A-bge-IC Surface Mount Horn

F. Atlas Sound I8SCM+ Classroom speaker with mic and digital clock

G. Atlas Sound I8S+ Hallways and areas that don’t require a clock

2.4 ITEMS NEEDED DURING THIS PROJECT:

A. Appropriate speaker installed in location designated .

1. Valcom VIP-490AL-bge-IC Small Flex Horn

2. Valcom VIP-148AL-BGE-IC Large Horn (outside areas and gyms)

3. Valcom VIP-580A-bge-IC Surface Mount Horn

4. Atlas Sound I8SCM+ Classroom speaker with mic and digital clock

5. Atlas Sound I8S+ Hallways and areas that don’t require a clock

B. InformaCast licenses to accommodate new speakers being installed (comes 50 at a time)

C. Cisco basic licenses for all classroom speakers and others as identified by key site personnel

the district will supply any information above and beyond the classroom count.

D. The District has adequate switch connectivity with POE

E. The Contractor is to provide a list of all room numbers and associated MAC addresses to the

District at the end of each phase of construction, and at the conclusion of the project.

2.5 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. The following functional capabilities are required for the Intercom notification system:

1. System operation shall allow administrator to define user privileges, define loudspeaker

zones, pre-recorded messages, bell schedules, bell designations, event logs, background

music streams, system configuration and end point status.

2. Automatically sound a tone or play a pre-page WAV file over any loudspeaker connected

for two-way communication to alert the classroom teacher that this two-way call has been

established. This is intended to prevent unauthorized monitoring. The privacy tone must

repeat every 15 (fifteen) seconds. (System must allow option of defeating this tone via

software programming by law enforcement in case of school emergency situations.)

3. Distribution of emergency announcement(s) from any authorized telephone to all areas

furnished with a loudspeaker. Emergency announcements shall have the highest system

priority.

4. Distribution of general announcements from any administrative telephone, staff

telephone, or classroom telephone. The system shall be capable of providing all-call,



TRUCKEE, CA


group call, and multiple group calls. Classroom speakers shall be software assignable to

an unlimited amount of paging groups. No exceptions.

5. Provide the ability to define and archive unlimited amount of time schedules. Each

schedule shall be capable of controlling an unlimited amount of events. An event is

defined as but not limited to, pre-defined audio wav files, relay controls, streaming

music, etc. System shall be capable of uploading and storing wav files, text-to-speech and

recording on the fly. System shell allow for an unlimited amount of audio sources that are

programmable to play over an unlimited amount of audio groups. The system shall be

capable of supplying an unlimited amount of relays for building control. Each scheduled

audio event shall be distributable to an unlimited amount of audio groups. The system

shall feature the ability to automatically initiate up to an unlimited amount of schedules

per day, based upon the day of the week or calendar dates up to 5 years in advance.

Schedule administration, modification and creation functions must be available through a

browser based system. Systems that do not allow the school to manage their own

schedules with browser based software and do not offer calendar based scheduling up to

5 years in advance or require separate page and time groups shall not be acceptable.

6. Call buttons shall be placed in each classroom and talkback area and will trigger caller ID

information to main office.

7. System shall be capable of placing intercoms call on hold in order to perform other

administrative functions.

8. Programmable features shall be stored in non-volatile memory and shall not be lost due to

power failures.

9. Classroom initiated intercom calls must be able to be assigned to ring at specific

administrative ports. These administrative ports shall have the flexibility to be forwarded

to other administrative ports should a call go unanswered or should the assigned

administrative port be busy.

10. System must allow facilities to annunciate incoming intercom calls at multiple

administrative phones simultaneously. Calls may be answered from any of the

administrative telephones by simply lifting handset, dialing the room number or pressing

a button on telephone. Once answered, the call will automatically be cancelled for other

administrative phones.

11. System functionality must include the capability to manually distribute an unlimited

amount of chained events via browser based device, pushbuttons, contact closure, or dial

up tones from any administrative telephone. These events shall be customizable with

respect to volume levels, cadence, priority, type and duration. Browser access and dial up

events must only be accessible by authorized users.

12. The system must be capable of providing an unlimited amount of ports to be connected to

the telephone system via SIP, FXS or FXO Port integration from the intercom system.

These ports shall provide built-in Enhanced Caller Line Identification which will visually

announce the name of the teacher or location, the architectural classroom number.

13. The system shall have the ability to control all system relays. Relays shall be controlled

through any computer on the LAN/WAN, DTMF controlled, automatically cycle at a



TRUCKEE, CA


programmed time of day, follow time schedule events. All relays must be software

programmable with the flexibility to change as required.

14. The system shall provide an unlimited amount of user administration and system

operation access. The audio program material shall be controlled and distributed by way

of a browser based device such as a computer allowing simple and easy changes. Systems

that require manual operated switch-banks or cumbersome DTMF telephone codes for

distribution shall not be acceptable.

15. The system shall have the ability to store a minimum of 25000 seconds of WAV files and

shall not be lost due to power outage.

16. The WAV files shall be activated via any computer on the LAN/WAN, Telephone and/or

Telephone system, and/or pushbuttons.

17. The WAV files shall be programmable as to what level of priority they can be broadcast.

They shall be programmable as to override any class change tones, normal all call, music,

and intercom in the event of an emergency.

18. The WAV files shall also have the ability to be broadcast into an unlimited number of

audio groups.

19. The WAV files shall be have the ability to be broadcast via a schedule for any day of the

week or time of the day. They shall also have the ability to be broadcast for any duration

of time and repeat number of plays with the ability to select how long the duration is

between each repeated broadcast.

20. The WAV files shall also have the ability to be a part of the class change tones within the

system. These files shall be able to replace any tone within the class change schedules as

to offer the flexibility of customizable tones and or phrases in this class change mode.

2.6 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS FOR MANAGED VOIP PRODUCTS

A. Hardware Requirements

1. 10/100 Ethernet

B. Bandwidth Requirements

1. 86 kbps per active One Way Page

2. 172 kbps per active Two Way Call

C. TCP Requirements

1. Port 21 for FTP

2. Port 22 for SSH

3. Port 23 for Telnet

4. Port 80 for Web based access

UDP Requirements

5. 7 Bi-directional Ports: 4097, 4098, 4099, 4120, 4121, 4122, 4197, 123 (for NTP)

6. The addition of Multicast-to-Unicast gateways (VEUTM) will require additional ports



TRUCKEE, CA


D. Multicast Requirements

1. A correctly configured multicast (IGMPv2 or IGMPv3) enabled network is essential

2. 4 multicast addresses: 239.1.1.2, 239.1.1.3, 239.1.1.4 and 239.1.1.5 are the defaults

3. SIP Ports: The default SIP TCP & UDP port number is 5060. Port 20,000 is the default

UDP port used for the RTP media stream.

E. Power Requirements

1. Power requirements for IP speakers and clocks: 802.3af PoE compatible switches or

equivalent inline power injector.

2. Power requirements for IP LED signs and IP Emergency Call Towers: 802.3at High

Power PoE compatible switches or equivalent inline power injector

F. Power requirements for other managed VoIP products: 802.3af PoE compatible switches,

equivalent inline power injector.

2.7 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. Speakers: System speakers shall be capable of utilizing standard Cat 6 infrastructure for

installation from the MDF or IDF’s as applicable, to the classroom and/or zone, thus allowing

for only one type of wiring infrastructure within the school.

B. IP Speaker (for classrooms and other necessary talkback locations) – shall provide two-way

communication with hands free talkback ability. All new classroom IP Speakers shall be

connected via PoE (802.3af). Use Atlas Sound I8SCM+

1. Speaker qualities:

a. IP Clock/Speaker Combo Classroom speaker with mic and digital clock

b. Back boxes are required for combo models listed. Recessed back box model FEST-

I8SC.

2. IP Clock/Speaker combo must require only one (1) network drop (RJ45) per unit to

handle both speaker and clock inclusive.

3. Allow volume level to be electronically adjusted via software.

4. Provide call switch input via screw terminal connections.

5. Provide internal RJ45 connection.

6. Include all mounting hardware and any necessary back boxes.

7. IP Speakers for Restrooms, cooridors etc.. (for “common” area one-way paging areas). 8”

IP Speaker(s) shall be flush (recessed) mounted unless otherwise indicated on plans. Use

IP speaker part # Atlas Sound I8S+.

C. Exterior Common Area Paging Loudspeaker Horns – Surface mounted one-way IP horn

speaker with integral amplifier and volume control. Install with necessary brackets and

vandal resistant enclosures where requested and connected with Cat6 cable. Speaker

qualities:

1. Valcom VIP-490AL-bge-IC Small Flex Horn



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Valcom VIP-148AL-BGE-IC Large Horn (outside areas and gyms)

3. Valcom VIP-580A-bge-IC Surface Mount Horn

D. PoE Switches. Switches shall be rack mountable to meet district standard as noted below:

1. The network switches will be provided by the district. Contractor shall set up the VLAN

as required per Districts direction.

E. UPS units: Provide as required to support all system components in order to maintain

intercom system functionality during power outages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of school

communication system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and

Specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made

satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Supplying Contractor shall coordinate all necessary service requests with the local utility and

act as the agent for the Owner.

B. Coordinate with Owner for quantity of incoming lines required.

C. Coordinate with serving Telephone Company the installation and wiring of RJ31X blocks.

These are required for fire alarm signaling, for security signaling and for campus energy

management system.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install school communication system in accordance with Manufacturer’s written

instructions, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Provide all cable, equipment, miscellaneous parts and accessories to make a complete and

fully operational system as described herein.

3. Equipment shall be installed and wired in accordance with accepted engineering and

installation practices. Only the highest degree of workmanship will be accepted. All

Work is subject to the Owner/Engineer’s approval. Work that does not meet approval

shall be rectified to their satisfaction at the sole expense of the Contractor.

B. Wiring

1. Refer to Section 27 15 00.

2. The intercom contractor shall provide and install all cabling, clips, hangers, j-hooks, etc.

as required.

3. Wiring shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications. Wiring shall meet

all local and state codes. All wiring shall be tested per category 6 standards.

4. All wiring shall be listed for the intended purpose. The cabling shall be Cat6 for all

connections from the IDF or MDF to the classroom and or zone origination point. All IP

speakers shall be homerun connected to each local IDF that serves that area, or MDF as

noted on plans. There shall be no additional cabling required from the IDF to the MDF as

this is accomplished through the shared fiber network devices and infrastructure. All



TRUCKEE, CA


interior wiring shall be in accordance with new construction guidelines suggested by the

Manufacturer, including the speaker and the call-in switch.

3.4 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, all systems must be completely tested by the respective

manufacturer's representative, and all necessary modifications and/or adjustments must be

made to assure compliance with this specification. Testing shall be performed in the presence

of the Owner's representative at a time mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and Owner's

representative.

B. Testing shall include functionality of interface between the Intercom systems and Owners

phone system, and shall not be conducted until phone system is operational and able to be

tested in this manner.

3.5 PROGRAMMING

A. All programming of system shall be done by Contractor at the direction of the Owner. Allow

for sufficient time to program entire system.

B. Upon completion of programming, training and acceptance of system, provide the Owner

with a computer disk containing all specific system programming.


A. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-


the school communication system. Objectives shall be to:

1. Assure school communication system installation conforms with specified requirements

and operates within specified tolerances.

2. Field test and inspect to ensure operation is in accordance with Manufacturer’s



remedies.

4. Verify settings and make final adjustments.

B. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangements can be

made for witnessing tests, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested

satisfactorily prior to the Engineer's witnessed test.

C. Pretesting:

1. Upon completing system installation, adjust the system and perform complete pretesting

to determine conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Correct any

deficiencies observed in the pretesting. Replace all malfunctioning or damaged items and

retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

2. Continuity tests of circuits.

D. Visual and mechanical inspection:

1. Inspect for physical damage, defects alignment and fit.

2. Perform mechanical operational tests in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.

3. Compare nameplate information and connections to Contract Documents.

4. Check tightness of all connections.

5. Check that all covers, barriers and doors are secure.

E. Electrical tests: Perform an operational test to verify conformance of system performance

and conditions to Contract Document within Manufacturer's tolerances.



TRUCKEE, CA


F. In the event that the system fails to function properly during the testing as a result of

inadequate pretesting or preparation, the Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the

necessity for retesting including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and Engineer's

hourly rate.

G. Contractor shall replace at no cost to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do


H. Contractor shall submit the testing final report to the Engineer for review prior to Project

closeout and final acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices

tested, results, observations, deficiencies and remedies. Include a copy of the test report in

the Owner’s operation and maintenance manuals.

3.7 TRAINING

A. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct two 4 hour training seminars for

Owner's representative upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall include

safe operation, maintenance, system programming, schedule changes and testing of

equipment.





TRUCKEE, CA

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 286113 - 1

SECTION 286113 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).

2. Initiating devices.

3. Notification devices.

4. Remote annunciator panels.

5. Communication systems.

6. Door lock control system.

7. Fire alarm auxiliary equipment control.

8. Record Drawings.

9. Pretesting and final testing.

B. Work furnish and installed under another Section, but connected under this Section:

1. Fire sprinkler alarm system flow switches, valve monitors and post indicating valves

(P.I.V.).

2. Elevator controller for recall.

3. Elevator Cab mounted speakers.

4. Door hold-open/closure devices with integral smoke detectors.

5. Fire barrier roll-down doors and shutters.

6. Fan and fire/smoke damper control system for smoke management.

C. Work furnish and connected to life safety system under this Section, but installed and

connected to HVAC system under another Section:

1. Duct mounted smoke detectors.

2. In-duct mounted smoke detectors for fire/smoke damper control. Except that wiring for

damper power, control and monitoring shall be under this contract.

D. Item furnished by electrical, but installed and connected under another Section:

1. Elevator cab mounted life safety speakers.

E. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work





TRUCKEE, CA


1. Division 08: Roll-Down Doors, Door Hardware.

2. Division 14: Elevators.

3. Division 23: HVAC System.

4. Division 21: Fire Sprinkler System.

5. Division 26: Electrical Systems

6. Division 27 & 28:


270010 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

270526 COMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING

270528 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

270529 COMMUNICATIONS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

270536 COMMUICATIONS CABLE TRAYS

270553 COMMUNICATIONS IDENTIFICATION

271100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS

271313 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING

271323 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING

271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

274133 CATV SYSTEM

275123 SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

281600 SECURITY ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

282300 SURVEILLANCE CAMERA SYSTEM

1.2 REFERENCES




ANSI C62.41; Guide for Surge Voltage in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

ANSI / ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (1996 edition).


NFPA 72; National Fire Alarm Code.

NFPA 101; Life Safety Code.

3. 2010 California Building Code:

UBC CBC 905; Smoke Control.


UL 38; Manual Signaling Boxes Fire Alarm Systems.

UL 268; Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems.

UL 268 A; Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.

UL 464; Audible Signal Appliances.

UL 497B; Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits.



TRUCKEE, CA


UL 521; Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

UL 864; Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.

UL 1424; Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.

UL 1480; Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency and Commercial and

Professional Use.

UL 1481; Power Supplies for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.

UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances Standard.

UL 1711; Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

UL 1971 Signal Devices for Hearing Impaired.

5. International Engineering Consortium (IEC)

a. IEC 60849 Voice Inteligibility Testing

6. Factory Mutual System (FM) approval guide.

FM P7825 Approval Guide.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Addressable device: A fire alarm system component with discrete identification that can

have its status individually identified or that is used to individually control other functions.

B. Alarm signal: A signal that indicates a state of emergency requiring immediate notification

of the fire department and building occupants.

C. Annunciator: A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric displays or other

equivalent means in which each indication provides status information about a circuit,

condition or location.

D. Supervisory signal: A signal that indicates the impairment of a fire protection system, which

may prevent its normal operation.

E. Trouble signal: A signal that indicates that a fault, such as an open circuit or ground, has

occurred in the fire alarm system or in a separate subsystem monitored by the fire alarm

system.

F. Initiating device: A system component that originates transmission of a change of state

condition, which initiates an appropriate response via the fire alarm system.

G. Notification appliances: A fire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, speaker, light or

text display that provides audible, tactile or visible outputs or any combination thereof.

H. Notification device circuit: A circuit to which notification devices are connected to visually

and audibly indicate an alarm signal.

I. Signaling line circuit: A circuit to which any combination of circuit interfaces, control units

or transmitters are connected and over which multiple system input signals or output signals

are carried.

J. Class B wiring: A circuit that is monitored for integrity such that a single break, a single

wire-to-wire short or a single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a trouble signal on



TRUCKEE, CA


the LSCP no matter where the break, short or loss of carrier condition occurs, but which

would prohibit devices beyond the fault, short or carrier loss from remaining operational.

This would be Style 3 wiring for signaling line circuits, Style B for initiating device circuits

and Style Y for notification device circuits.


A. The life safety system shall be zone non-coded addressable. It shall be 24 VDC closed

circuit, electronically supervised, voice evacuation/relocation, device indicating, auxiliary

control system, automatic alarm type; operating from manual pull stations, smoke detectors,

heat detectors and sprinkler system switches. The system shall include all wiring, raceways,

pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm and

supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification devices and all other accessories

required for a complete operating system.

B. Provide system with the following circuit functions:

1. Style B for initiating device circuits.

2. Style 4 for signaling line circuits interconnecting the riser loop or network.

3. Style Y for notification device circuits.

C. For overall system description based on system input signals and output controls and

monitoring, refer to Sequence of Operation Matrix on the Drawings.

D. In addition to the above sequence of operation, the FACP shall perform the following

functions:

1. Identify every addressable device by location, priority and device type.

2. Read and display at FACP the sensitivity of addressable smoke and heat detection

devices.

3. Remain 100% operational and capable of responding to an alarm condition while in the

routine maintenance mode.

4. Be capable of supporting non-addressable as well as addressable devices.

5. Allow individual programmable control of each connected remote or panel mounted

relay.

6. Provide the user with the field programmability to add or change addressable device

types and custom messages on-site via the system printer/terminal.

7. Display up to 127 alarms and/or up to 127 trouble indications, one at a time, as a list on

the system printer/terminal.

8. Change the status of configured circuits (arming or disarming) and change status of

relays.

9. Generate an addressable detector sensitivity report providing a chamber voltage listing

(device testing) for each detector.

E. A Very Early Smoke Detection System shall be installed throughout the area shown on the

drawings. The system shall consist of highly sensitive ultrasonic flow sensing or laser based

Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to a network of sampling pipes. The Air



TRUCKEE, CA


Sampling System shall be interconnected with the Building Life Safety Control Panel and

HVAC functions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS






component.


application.

4. Shop Drawing package shall include:

a. Basic:

1) Name of Owner and occupant.

2) Address of the building.

3) Contractor’s name, address, telephone number and license number.

b. Symbols legend.

c. Equipment list showing quantity, make, model and CSFM listing number for each

device.

d. Wire and cable schedule.

e. Scope of Work with overall system description.

f. Sequence of operation matrix with system inputs signals and output functions.

g. Code summary and Building type.

h. Assignment of Class and/or Style designation for device circuits.

i. Plot plan and floor plans of building with partitions, walls and room identification,

showing locations of each device and control/monitoring equipment, communication

equipment, air sampling pipe routing, conduit routing and size and cable/conductor

type and quantity. Field devices shall all have a discrete identification designation

located adjacent to each device on the Drawings.

j. Point-to-point wiring diagram in block or riser format showing all fire alarm

components, device designations, conduit, wire types and sizes, and air sampling pipe

sizes.

k. Provide 1/4" scale plan of equipment layout in main fire control room.

l. Include elevations of control panels, fireman’s fan and damper control panel, voice

communications panel, graphic annunciator panel and remote annunciator panel.



TRUCKEE, CA


m. Overall description of smoke control system based on Smoke Control Report,

developed by others.

n. Smoke control operation matrix by individual initiating device for fan and damper

control/monitoring as well as ancillary equipment controlled.

o. Elevation indicating mounting heights for manual pull stations, audible and visual

devices and combination audible/visual devices.

p. Rated penetration details.

q. Typical wiring diagram details of field devices.

r. Detector mounting details at HVAC ducts.

s. Battery standby calculations showing total standby power needed to meet the

specified system requirements.

t. Voltage drop calculations for system wiring circuits.

u. Data sheets and CSFM listings for all components and devices.





8. Provide California State Fire Marshal ‘CSFM’ listing sheet for each device.

9. Warranty.

B. Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings for review by State Fire Marshal prior to

the purchase and installation of equipment. Provide quantities of drawing sets as required by

jurisdiction. Fire alarm system shall be designed and wet signed by a Registered California

Professional Fire Protection Engineer.

C. Record Drawings:

1. Furnish Record Drawings as described in Section 260010: Basic Electrical

Requirements, utilizing Shop Drawing submissions with updated field conditions. These

Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing point-to-point wiring location of and

conduit routing to all devices.

b. Block diagram/riser diagram showing the FACP, system components and all conduit

and wire type/sizes between each.

2. Drawings shall be incorporated into the Record Drawing submission.

3. Final acceptance will not be made until the State Fire Marshal has approved the Record

Drawings.

4. Record drawings shall be submitted in AutoCad 2010 and PDF.




TRUCKEE, CA



260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:




4. Schematic Drawings of wiring system, including all initiation and annunciation devices,

control panel, annunciators, communication system, fan control system, door locking

control system, printer/terminal, etc.

5. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributors.




B. Only products and applications listed in this section may be used on the Project unless


C. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of

experience in design and manufacturing of the materials and equipment specified herein.

D. Installer's qualifications:

1. Installer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of experience in satisfactory

completion for Projects similar in scope and cost. Provide backup information on 5

such Projects.

2. Fire Alarm installer shall possess a current, active and valid C7 California State

Contractors License.

3. Conduit and Electrical contractor shall possess a current, active and valid C10

California State Contractors License.

4. The installer shall be the Manufacturer's certified reseller/installer of the fire alarm

system provided.


A. Delivery: Fire alarm/life safety system components shall not be delivered to the Project site










D. Provide a laminated map of the entire school with all rooms/numbers showing each zone.

1.9 WARRANTY



TRUCKEE, CA


A. The fire alarm work shall be free from defects of workmanship and materials for two years

after filing notice of completion and remedy any defects developing during this period, free

of charge. Manufacturers whose equipment has a longer guarantee period shall provide a

written guarantee.

B. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a minimum 2 year parts

and labor warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. If

manufacturers offer a longer standard warranty, the warranty shall be provided in writing.

Warranty shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.

C. The warranty package shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Provide required inspection, testing, and maintenance services at least every six months

throughout the warranty period.

2. Emergency maintenance service.

3. Service by factory trained service representative of system Manufacturer.

4. Replacement of any defective components.

1.10 SYSTEM START-UP


initial start-up of the fire alarm/life safety system. Sufficient time shall be allowed to

properly check the system out and perform required minor adjustments before the Engineer's

witnessed test shall begin.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Material:

1. Provide the following fire alarm system components as extra materials, matching the

products installed and packaged for storing.

a. Manual pull station: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number installed.

b. Detectors: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent, for each type, of the number

installed.

c. Strobes, Speaker/strobes: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number

installed.

d. Speakers: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number installed.

B. Maintenance Service:

1. For a period of two years following acceptance the equipment Supplier shall have a

person(s) familiar with this Project attend semi-annual meetings with the Owner's

Representative to review system performance, operation and any system problems. That

person shall provide a written summary of the items discussed in each meeting and a

schedule of when the system problems will be corrected. The report is due within 7

working days after each meeting.

2. During the 6th, 12th, 18th, and 24th month following system acceptance, on a weekend

day, the equipment Supplier shall perform a complete tests of the system, in a manner

similar to the acceptance test. A written report shall be submitted to the Owner certifying



TRUCKEE, CA


that each initiating device has been tested. A copy of these test forms shall be submitted

to the Engineer for review and acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Edwards (EST3).

2. Notifier - (ONYX Series)

3. Firelite - (MS series)

4. Simplex

2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE:

A. Conduit:

1. Conduit shall be in accordance with the California Electrical Code (CEC).

2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40

percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a

single conduit.

3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and

shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors,

per CEC Article 760-29.

4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar

power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and

signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices

and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without

interference or loss of signals.

5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel or any other remotely mounted control

panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the LSCP

manufacturer.

6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum.

7. Connectors shall be compression type fittings to join EMT to a box or enclosure and to

couple two ends of EMT conduit. Fittings shall be: Zinc plated, steel UL listed concrete

tight, and thread less where connecting to conduit. Male hub threads -NPSM where

connecting to box or cabinet with steel locknuts.

B. Wire:

1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.

2. Wiring shall be in accordance with state and national codes (e.g., CEC Article 760) and

as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of

conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less

than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and

14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.



TRUCKEE, CA


3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use

with a protective signaling system.

4. Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit.

5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and support

a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet when sized at 12 AWG. The design of the

system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC

communication circuit.

6. All field wiring (with exception of external communications Ethernet) shall be

electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.

7. The life safety control panel shall be capable of T-tapping NFPA Style 4 (Class B)

Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for

example, the amount of T-taps, length of T-taps etc., is not acceptable.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for

their use and purpose.

D. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,

maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as

FIRE ALARM. Life safety control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The

control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.

The control panel enclosure shall feature a quick removal chassis to facilitate rapid

replacement of the LSCP electronics.

2.3 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

A. Control panel:

1. The panel shall comply with applicable requirements of UL864 and shall provide power,

annunciation, supervision and control for the complete fire alarm system. The panel shall

be modular in construction, installed in a flush mounted steel cabinet with hinged door

and cylinder lock, containing all modules necessary to operate as indicated herein.

2. Addressable devices shall be individually identified by the system and any quantity of

addressable devices may be in alarm at any time up to the total number connected to the

system.

3. The panel annunciator shall be a minimum of an 80 character alphanumeric display,

which shall provide a user definable custom message associated with each detection

device or zone.

4. Dynamic supervision of system electronics, wiring, initiating devices and software shall

be provided by the control system. Failure of system hardware or wiring shall be

indicated by type and location on the alphanumeric annunciator. Software and processor

operation shall be monitored by an independent hardware watchdog, which will indicate

their failure. The panel shall provide failsafe operation, i.e. all incoming alarms shall

override all other modes of operation.

5. Provide a service mode to permit the arming and disarming of individual initiating or

output devices as well as manually operating output devices. Status of these devices shall

be displayed upon command from the control panel. The panel shall automatically return

to the normal mode in the event the panel remains unattended in the service mode.



TRUCKEE, CA


6. The panel shall be capable of measuring and adjusting the sensitivity of addressable

detectors upon request. An alphanumeric display shall be provided to display custom

messages and give readings of detector sensitivity detector by detector. Each device on

an addressable initiating circuit shall be checked continuously to include the following:

a. Sensitivity.

b. Response.

c. Opens.

d. Shorts.

e. Ground faults.

f. Functionality.

g. Status.

7. The panel shall monitor the addressable smoke detectors in such a manner that if the

detectors become dirty and reach and maintain 80% of alarm threshold for five (5)

consecutive hours, a trouble condition indicating exactly which device needs service shall

be automatically annunciated. If the device becomes too insensitive for a period of 10

seconds, the trouble indication will read: "Input device response too low."

8. The panel shall report, by specific device number, any device removed from an

addressable initiating circuit and all other devices shall continue to function.

9. The panel shall automatically indicate the total quantity of alarms and troubles that have

occurred prior to reset at the control unit.

10. No alarm or trouble indication shall be resettable until it has been acknowledged. It shall

not be possible to reset the system until all alarms have been acknowledged.

11. The panel shall be capable of:

a. Counting the number of addressable devices within a designated area or "zone"

which are in alarm.

b. Counting "zones" which are in alarm.

c. Counting the number of addressable devices which are in alarm on the system.

d. Differentiating among types of addressable devices such as smoke detectors, manual

stations, water-flow switches and heat detectors.

e. Assigning priorities to types of devices, zones or groups of devices.

f. Cross-Zoning.

12. Each addressable device shall report its condition to the panel control unit every three (3)

seconds in a manner such that failure of the connections to or internal electronics of the

device will result in a trouble signal that identifies the specific device involved.

13. Panel output circuits shall be supervised and capable of providing 1.5 amps at 24 VDC.

14. Provision for programmable control relays in panel shall be included having dry contacts

rated 120 VAC, 5 amp inductive.



TRUCKEE, CA


15. Programmable remote relays shall be controlled in the same manner as panel mounted

relays.

B. Initiation/notification modules:

1. All modules shall be plug-in, dynamically supervised and easily replaceable. Field

wiring shall be connected to the panel with removable multi-conductor connectors to

facilitate rapid removal and replacement of both the module and wiring for ease of

serving the panel. The modules shall be system interconnected by a card edge connector.

2. Provide zone input addressable modules for monitoring non-addressable initiating

circuits.

3. Provide programmable signal modules on output circuits for operation of DC audible

devices.

4. Provide, as needed, programmable supplementary relay modules containing four

independent relays fitted with form "C" contacts, rated at 120 VAC, 5 amps inductive.

C. Power supply: Emergency generator feed adequate to serve panel modules, initiating

devices, annunciating devices, remote annunciators, door hold-open/closure devices, roll-

down fire doors or shutters, fire/smoke dampers. All power connections whether AC or DC

shall be separately fused within panel.

D. Uninterruptible power supply (batteries):

1. Provide an uninterruptible power source for all volatile system components including

control panel, peripherals and remote annunciators. Power source shall consist of but not

be limited to all necessary conduit, wire, outlets, transformers, panels and connections to

each piece of equipment as required.

2. Uninterruptible power shall be required such that loss of power shall not cause the system

operator to be required to restart the system or any part thereof upon return of power.

The uninterruptible power supply shall be NFPA approved for applications and shall

provide a 24 hour backup of the system; an then, at the end of that period, operate all

alarm indicating devices used for evacuation for 5 minutes.

3. Provide a dual rate battery charger capable of recharging batteries to 80% capacity in 8

hours.

E. Remote station signal transmitter: Electrically supervise, capable of transmitting alarm and

trouble signals over telephone lines to remote monitoring station receiver.

F. Auxiliary relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each initiating device

zone to provide accessory functions specified.

2.4 ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual pull stations: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 38. Addressable

manual stations shall be connected into addressable initiating circuits. Stations shall be single

action type. Stations shall be finished in red, with raised letter operating instructions of

contrasting color. Control panel shall monitor the station by address and function. The use

of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Stations shall have a separate screw

terminal for each conductor and be capable of field programming for its "address" location on

an initiating circuit.



TRUCKEE, CA


B. Heat detectors: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 521. Addressable

detectors shall be electronic designed for detection of fire by combination fixed temperature

and rate-of-rise principle. Detectors shall be connected into addressable initiating circuits.

All electronics shall be contained within detector head and shall plug-in to terminal base.

Detector shall be field programmable and contain external indication that is readily visible.

The detector shall be dynamically supervised and individually identified by LSCP, as well as

sensitivity adjustable. Rating for fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F190

degrees F. Detectors shall have screw terminals in base for making all wiring connection.

C. Smoke Detectors: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 268.

1. Photoelectric detectors: Addressable detectors shall be electronic designed for detection

of abnormal smoke densities. Detectors shall consist of separate transmitter and receiver

units. The transmitter unit shall emit an infrared beam to the receiver unit. When the

signal at the receiver falls below a preset sensitivity, the detector shall initiate an alarm.

The receiver shall contain an LED that is powered upon an alarm condition. Long-term

changes to the received signal caused by environmental variations shall be automatically

compensated. Detectors shall be connected into addressable initiating circuits. All

electronics shall be contained within detector head and shall plug-in to terminal base.

Detectors shall be field programmable and contain external indication that is readily

visible. The detector shall be dynamically supervised and individually identified by

LSCP, as well as sensitivity adjustable. Detectors shall have multiple sensitivity settings

in order to meet UL listings for the different distances covered by the beam. Detectors

shall have screw terminals in base for making all wiring connections.

2. Duct smoke detectors: Addressable detector shall have a duct housing, mounted exterior

to the duct and with perforated sampling tubes. Activation of a detector shall cause

shutdown of the associated air-handling unit via auxiliary contact base. Detectors shall

be rated for the air velocity to be expected.

3. In-duct smoke detector: Addressable detector shall have external mounted box with relay

output, remote test station with LED status indicator and keyed test switch and sensor

head mounted within duct. Activation of detector shall cause associated fire/smoke

damper to close via auxiliary relay base.

D. Interface modules: Addressable interface module shall be connected into addressable

initiating circuits. This device shall be used for interfacing normally open or normally closed

direct shorting contact devices to an addressable initiating circuit (i.e. water flow, tamper

switches, non-addressable initiating devices, etc.). Module shall be dynamically supervised

and individually identified by LSCP.

E. Programmable relay modules: Addressable interface module containing a programmable

control relay with contacts rated at 2.0 amps at 30VDC, 0.6 amps at 120 VAC.

2.5 NOTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Speakers, strobes and combination speaker strobes:

1. These units shall be mounted flush in all finished areas and surface mounted in

unfinished equipment areas. White enamel grill for units mounted in finished (public)

areas; red for units mounted in unfinished (mechanical) areas.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Maximum loading: The loading on both the strobe and audio circuits shall not exceed

75% of its rated capacity. Verify that strobe in-rush currents are safely within the

maximum rated capacity of the circuit.

3. Speaker: Wall and ceiling mounted units shall include a blocking capacitor for line

supervision and screw terminals for in and out wiring. The back of the speaker cone shall

be covered to protect the cone from damage and dust. The speakers shall operate over a

frequency range of 400 - 4000Hz and shall have field selectable power taps of 1/8 to 8

watts with sound output up to 92dBA at 10 feet measured per UL standard 1480 when set

on the 8 watt tap. Speaker shall be rated for operation on a 70.7-volt audio system.

4. Strobe: Wall and ceiling mounted units shall incorporate 15, 30, 75, 110 candela strobe

lights that flash once per second with 24 VDC input with a maximum current draw of

.088 amps.

5. Strobe/speaker: Wall and ceiling mounted units with speaker Specifications listed above

and shall incorporate 15, 30, 75, 110 candela strobe lights that flash once per second with

24 VDC input with a maximum current draw of .088 amps.

6. Remote power supplies for strobe circuits:

a. Provide quantity of remote power supplies required for system. Power supplies shall

be mounted in hinged NEMA 1 enclosures, maximum 24" wide, with locking handle

and the following items:

1) Back-up emergency batteries, sized per NFPA standards. Provide separate

enclosure for batteries if required to prevent damage from corrosive gases.

2) Provide an automatic dual rate (high rate and float charge) battery charger

capable of recharging batteries to 80% capacity in 8 hours. The charger output

shall be supervised and fused.

3) Supervised programmable relays or network interface module to control strobe

lights on a floor-by-floor basis.

b. Power supplies shall be connected to emergency power 120 VAC circuits.

c. If the power supply loses AC power, a system trouble shall occur.

d. Locks shall be keyed the same as all other life safety panels.

B. Bells: Shall be 6 inch10 inch surface mounted recessed with matching mounting back box.

Bells shall be of vibrating type, suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells

shall be the under dome type producing a sound output rating of at least 84 dBA 87 dBA at

10 feet. Bells used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for outdoor

use and provided with metal housing and protective grilles.

C. Fireman’s remote LCD annunciator: Shall have a two line by 40-character LCD display.

Dedicated LED lamps shall light upon activation of any alarm, supervisory or trouble

condition and a tone-alert shall sound. The backlit alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LED)

shall indicate type of alarm, number of alarms, supervisory conditions and troubles in the

system and a custom location designation. Annunciator shall include control switches for

system acknowledgments, alarm silence and system reset. Information is transmitted to the

annunciator over a single twisted, shielded pair cable. Annunciator shall be flush mounted in

NEMA 13R enclosure for interior exterior applications.



TRUCKEE, CA


D. Life safety command center annunciator:

1. Provide a surface mounted panel, sized as required to contain the following features:

a. Graphic silk-screened representation of the building in vertical cross-section, i.e.

show all floors stacked one above another.

b. LED indicating lights that shall illuminate the respective floor's LED indicator light

for an occurrence on that floor:

1) System trouble. Illuminates on any component failure or abnormal condition for

both the fire alarm and communication systems. (Yellow LED, only on floors

with equipment.)

2) Sprinkler Water flow. (Blue LED)

3) Smoke Detector (each zone). (Red LED)

4) Duct Smoke Detector. (Red LED)

5) Manual Pull Station (Yellow LED)

6) Annunciation Devices Activated. (Green LED)

7) Tamper Valve or PIV. (Blue LED)

c. Sonalert Horn.

d. Lamp test pushbutton.

e. Horn silence pushbutton. This pushbutton shall be momentary type and shall allow a

subsequent alarm to ring the horn again. On/off switch is not acceptable.

f. Black silk-screened lettering describing the function of each device and light.

g. Brush stainless steel faceplate with continuous piano hinge to access wiring

compartment and 1/4 turn captive fasteners.

h. Annunciator shall be UL and CSFM listed.

2. This annunciator shall annunciate alarm and trouble conditions it shall not contain any

control capability over the fire alarm and communication system. All system horn

silence and acknowledge shall be performed at the control equipment itself.

3. All control power shall be battery backed up and originate from the life safety control

panel.

2.6 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND SUPERVISION

A. Under this Section, provide connections to the following equipment to activate control

sequence of operation:

1. Fire sprinkler system components: Provide a pair of wires from a remote mounted

addressable interface module (2'-6" maximum wire length) for each of the following

devices:

a. Each water flow switch to initiate an alarm signal.

b. Each valve monitor switch (tamper switch) to initiate a trouble signal.

c. Each P.I.V. to initiate a trouble signal.



TRUCKEE, CA


2. Elevator controller(s): Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the LSCP or

remote mounted programmable relays to elevator controller(s) for each of the following:

a. Elevator recall to ground floor.

b. Elevator recall to alternate floor designated by fire marshal. Alternate floor contacts

will activate if ground floor detector is in alarm.

3. Door hold-open/closure devices: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the

LSCP or remote mounted programmable relays to each door hold-open/closure device for

power to and release of doors.

4. Roll-down fire doors and shutters: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in

the LSCP or remote mounted programmable relays to each roll-down fire door or shutter

for release of door.

5. Smoke Curtain: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the LSCP or remote

mounted programmable relays to the smoke roll-down curtain for activation of the

curtain.

6. Door lock control system interface: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in

LSCP or remote mounted programmable relays to interface with security door control

system for override of stairwell and exit doors. Additional wires are required to security

control panel to annunciate when doors are unlocked via LSCP system. Provide a two

position switch "auto-unlocked" in LSCP for manual override control with intertie wire to

security control panel. Door lock power shall be furnished by security system.

7. Building management system (BMS) interface: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry

contacts in LSCP or remote mounted programmable relays to BMS system control panel.

Contacts shall be normally closed and shall open upon any alarm condition.

2.7 LIFE SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

A. System operation:

1. Provide a modular, fully supervised, zone selective voice communication system in the

Life Safety Command Center Room. The page alarm system shall be utilized for

automatic pre-recorded voice signaling and manual voice override paging.

2. Output zones shall be as indicated on the drawings.

3. All zone selector switches shall be toggle type with adjacent on/off LED light and clearly

identified by floor, elevator or stairwell number.

4. Manual override via the hand-held microphone shall take priority over any and all alarm

signals to assure communication of one-way voice instructions.

B. Communication amplifiers:

1. The unit shall be solid state complete with microphone and volume control.

2. The total harmonic distortion shall be less than 2% at 100% of rated output.

3. Amplification equipment shall be sized to provide sufficient power to drive one speaker

per 1,000 square feet of building area on each floor with the speakers set on a wattage tap

that allows 15dB above the ambient noise level in all areas of a normal 45dB office

environment. Plus an additional 25 percent per amplifier. I.E. provide amplifiers rated



TRUCKEE, CA


for the maximum number of speakers possible in the building plus 25 percent spare

capacity.

4. Provide output terminals mounted on a heavy-duty terminal strip for making all required

connections.

5. Outputs shall be compatible with multi-tap speakers as required.

6. Electronic circuit protection shall be incorporated in the amplifier that provides automatic

limiting against short circuits and overloads on its outputs. A thermostatic control shall

protect the amplifier from operation at excessive temperatures and a circuit breaker for

over current protection shall be provided.

7. The front panel of the amplifier shall have a power indicator and a thermal overload

indicator.

8. The amplifier shall operate from a 105 - 125 volt 60 Hz power source.

9. The unit shall be ruggedly constructed, temperature stable and be capable of operating in

ambient temperatures ranging from -20 degrees C to +55 degrees C. The power

transformers shall be heavy duty, fully enclosed and designed for continuous operation.

The chassis shall be heavy-gauge steel with a perforated enclosure and both shall be

finished in low luster black enamel.

10. Provide speaker zone supervision such that any zone in "trouble" shall be annunciated at

the remote annunciator and the printer.

11. The amplifiers shall be mounted in the same room as the Life Safety Control Panel.

12. Amplifiers shall be provided in 120 or 250-watt RMS increments at 70VRMS output

voltage levels. Amplifiers shall be continuously supervised and be configured for single

channel operation and redundancy for backup. All amplifiers shall have 60 to 15 KHz

frequency response and be equipped with a battery saver feature to minimize supervisory

current drain when operating on the 24VDC standby batteries.

13. Each speaker circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens and ground faults in the

wiring and for short circuit faults on the speaker circuit wiring and shall be so arranged

that a fault condition in any circuit or groups of circuits will not cause an alarm to be

sounded. A short circuit on the speaker circuit wiring will automatically disconnect only

the affected circuit thereby insuring the integrity of all other speaker circuits to receive an

alarm signal and protect the system amplifiers, pre- amplifiers and taped voice or tone

generators. The occurrence of any fault will light a trouble LED and sound the Sonalert

but will not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit that does not have a fault

condition. Initiating and speaker circuits shall be wired using Class B supervised circuits

(a break or ground fault in any conductor will be reported as a trouble condition).

14. Digital message repeater module (DRM) shall be provided for a pre-recorded general

instruction message. The standard operating sequence shall be thirty seconds of alarm

tone, followed by a 30 - 60 second digitized general instruction message. After the

message is sent or has been interrupted by the hand-held microphone, before the tape

message is completed or failure of the MRM, the alarm tone will again sound

continuously until the system is reset or the tone silenced. The DRM will be supervised

for EPROM memory and general status. Message shall be settable to be continuous

repeatable or 1 - 3 times.



TRUCKEE, CA


15. Redundant tone generators (RTM) shall be provided for alarm and auxiliary tone

generation (slow whoop). RTM's shall be continuously supervised for operation and

placement.

C. Remote switch bank and microphone panel:

1. Provide push-to-talk override microphone for life safety paging.

2. A bank of switches shall be provided within reach of the microphone for selective paging

of each zone and a complete building page.

3. Provide a means for each toggle switch to accept an identification tag in the faceplate.

Provide graphic quality lettering or Kroy lettering on each I.D. tag. Do not hand letter.

4. The microphone and switches shall be mounted in a panel on the wall in the Life Safety

Control Panel Room.

2.8 VOICE COMMUNICATION BACK-UP POWER SUPPLY (BATTERIES)

A. Provide a back-up power source for all system components including but not limited to,

amplifiers, digital message units and microphone circuits. Power source shall consist of but

not be limited to all necessary conduit, batteries, wire, outlets, transformers, panels and

connections to each piece of equipment as required.

B. Back-up power shall be required such that loss of utility power shall not cause the system

operator to be required to restart the system or any part thereof upon return of power. The

back-up power supply shall be NFPA approved for life safety applications and shall provide a

4-hour backup of the maximum load possible on the system as required by NFPA 72.

C. During power failure the amplifiers shall be automatically shut off to minimize drain on

batteries but will turn on automatically during alarm or manual activation.

D. Provide an automatic dual rate (high rate and float charge) battery charger capable of

recharging batteries to 80% capacity in 8 hours. The charger output shall be supervised and

fused.

E. If the system loses AC power, a system trouble shall occur.

F. A solid-state power transfer circuit that shall switch to standby power automatically and

instantaneously if normal power fails or falls below 15% of normal ("brown out" conditions).

This electronic circuit shall allow the batteries to be effectively "floated" on the operating

system to avoid upsetting the normal microprocessor scan and minimize resultant nuisance

2.9 BATTERIES:

A. Upon loss of Primary (AC) power to the control panel, the batteries shall have sufficient

capacity to power the fire alarm system for required standby time 60 hours followed by 15

minutes of alarm battery backup.

B. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level

checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.

C. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery/charger systems may be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



TRUCKEE, CA


A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of fire alarm/life

safety system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install fire alarm/life safety system in accordance with Manufacturer's written

instructions, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. The 120/208-volt, 3 wire, 60 cycles AC emergency power supply required to power the

system. Connect to red colored circuit breaker(s) in panel board. Identify circuit as "Fire

Alarm Circuit Control".

B. Wiring:

1. Refer to Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable.

2. Individual input and output device addressability as well as remote sensitivity

measurement, supervision and power shall all be performed on the same pair of wires.

Wiring shall be Class B.

3. Each Class B initiating circuit shall consist of a two (2)-wire circuit. allowing a

maximum of 20 T-taps and not requiring any end-of- line device for supervision. Each

initiating circuit shall accommodate up to 75% of the manufacturers maximum

addressable programmable initiating devices, to allow for future expansion.

4. Wiring for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways, shall

be as recommended by the Manufacturer's current requirements.

5. All wiring shall be installed in a continuous steel conduit system. All conduit fittings

shall be steel compression. Conduit shall be of the size recommended by the equipment

Supplier. Refer to Section 260546: Signal Systems Raceway.

6. Wire color-coding shall remain the same throughout the system.

7. No wiring other than that directly associated with life safety/fire alarm detection, alarms

or auxiliary fire protection functions (no 120 VAC), shall be permitted in life safety/fire

alarm conduits.

8. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, PIV's, sprinkler valve

monitors, door hold-open/closure devices, smoke management fans, smoke dampers,

elevator controller, emergency generator, etc.

9. All wiring shall be checked and tested to ensure that there are no grounds, opens or

shorts.

10. All life safety/fire alarm junction boxes shall be color-coded and marked per Section

260553: Electrical Identification.

11. Wire nut splices are not allowed.

12. Wires shall be numbered at each connection, termination and junction point. Wire

numbering tags shall be Brady Perma-Code, Westline or equal wire makers. Each group

of wires shall be tagged with its destination at each panel, terminal box or junction box.



TRUCKEE, CA


13. All wire used on the life safety/fire alarm and communication system shall have a

minimum insulation rating of 105 degrees C. Bell wire or thermostat wire is not

acceptable.


A. Refer to Division 1 for commissioning requirements.

B. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-


the fire alarm/life safety system.

C. Independent testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent

Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing, calibration and inspection

required herein. Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:

1. Assure fire alarm/life safety system installation conforms to specified requirements and

operates within specified tolerances.

2. Field test and inspect to ensure operation in accordance with Manufacturer's



remedies.

4. Apply label on fire alarm/life safety system control panel upon satisfactory completion of

tests and results.

5. Verify settings and make final adjustments.

D. Engineer witnessed testing: Allow a period of 8 hours for Engineer review and final check.

E. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made



F. Pre-functional testing:

1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents and Manufacturer instructions for

installation and testing.








a. The system shall be completely tested prior to final acceptance testing. All points

shall be tested from point of initiation to the final point or points of annunciation. All

circuits shall be tested for continuity and ability to transmit the required signal

correctly to the LSCP. Any problem due to wrong wire type, wire twist, impedance,



TRUCKEE, CA


mismatches, noise filtering or shielding shall be completely corrected during

pretesting and prior to any final acceptance tests.

b. Testing shall include each and every device in the system. Coordinate with other

trades as necessary for testing.

1) Sprinkler flow switches: Record time delay from water flow to alarm and adjust

as necessary for a 30-50 second delay.

2) Tamper switches: Verify "trouble "signal is received and alarmed on closing of

each valve.

3) Smoke detectors and duct smoke detectors: Test with actual or approved

artificial smoke. Verify that reset does not occur when devices are cleared of

smoke. Verify supervisory circuit function. Perform pressure differential test on

all duct-mounted smoke detectors.

4) Door release: Verify that proper alarm activates every held-open door, roll-down

doors and shutters, to ensure doors close completely to the closed position.

5) Elevator recall: Verify that elevators recall to designated floor by testing elevator

lobby detectors with smoke. This is necessary on the ground floor and one other

only.

6) Voice communication systems: Verify that each floor can be selected.

7) Intelligibility testing shall be per IEC 60849 and verified and tested by a third

party testing organization.

8) Tone and prerecorded message generation: Activate by means of an alarm

initiating device on each floor and verify that they are clearly audible in all

occupied spaces including elevator lobbies, toilets, core areas, stairwells,

mechanical rooms and garage. Adjust power taps at speakers to obtain proper

+15 dBA level above ambient noise. Verify the override capability of the

microphone paging system.

9) FFCP: Verify correct fan and damper control and status annunciation for each

life safety fan and damper.

10) Central station notification: Verify that one set of conductors in the terminal

cabinet becomes a short circuit on any "trouble" condition and that the other set

becomes a short circuit on any "alarm" condition. Verify that the conductor

groups are labeled properly.

11) Printer and remote annunciators: Verify that all alarm and trouble conditions

print on the printer and annunciate at the remote annunciation panels.

12) Emergency generator power status: Verify this annunciate their respective

"Trouble" and "Running" conditions.

c. Third Party Testing:

1) A third party shall be provided by the contractor to perform voice audibility

testing to verify performance per IEC 60849.

d. Test Report:



TRUCKEE, CA


1) Provide a complete report listing every device, the date it was tested, the results

and the date retested (if failure occurred during the previous test). The test report

shall indicate that every device tested successfully.

2) Submit two typed copies of the test report on 8- 1/2" x 11" paper in a neatly

bound folder to the Engineer for approval. Failure to comply with this will result

in a delay of final testing and acceptance.

G. Functional performance testing:

1. After the approval of the test report, provide a schedule of final testing to be done in the

presence of the State Fire Marshal and Owner's Representative. The schedule must be

received by the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks prior to the Final Test Date and must list

the dates and time slots in which the various systems can be tested.

2. Coordination of the Final Test dates with all parties (General Contractor, Mechanical

Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Owner and others) shall be the sole responsibility of the

Contractor. If a party is required to be present during any phase of testing to activate a

device, ensure that the party or a qualified representative of the party is present

throughout that phase of the testing.

3. Provide a means for testing of the entire fire alarm system from the Main Fire Alarm

Control Panel.

H. In the event that the system fails to function properly during the testing as a result of

inadequate pretesting or preparation. The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the

necessity for retesting including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and the Engineer's

hourly rate.

I. Contractor shall replace at no costs to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do


J. Contractor shall submit the Testing Agency's final report to the Engineer for review prior to

Project closeout and final acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates,

devices tested, results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included

in the operation and maintenance manuals.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Refer to Specification Section 260800: Electrical Commissioning.

B. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct an 8 hour training seminar for

Owner's Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall

include safe operation, maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training

and hands-on instruction.

C. Contractor shall schedule training with a minimum of 7 days advance notice.
